You are on page 1of 3250

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Printable PDF version

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

GRAPHISOFT
Visit the GRAPHISOFT website at http://www.graphisoft.com for local distributor and product availability information.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide


Copyright 2013 by GRAPHISOFT, all rights reserved. Reproduction, paraphrasing or translation without express prior written permission is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks
is a registered trademark of GRAPHISOFT. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD

Contents

Contents
Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo _________________________________ 35 ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide _____________________________ 41
Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Automatic Model-Based Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Link Element Height to Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Core-Based Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Curved Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 More Intuitive Element Creation in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Anchor Door/Window Reveal to Wall Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Building Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Easily Editable 3D Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Improved Door/Window Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Enhanced Composite/Profile Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Floor Plan-Based 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Improved Zone Creation and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Smarter Attribute Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Better Management of Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 PDF/A Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Export ArchiCAD Model to STL Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Integrated Connections with Google Earth, Sketchup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 One-Step Renovation Status Update for All Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Conceptual Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Improved Tool Settings Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Duplicate Elements in Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Open BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 IFC Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Support for Multiple IFC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 IFC Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Other IFC-related Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Saving Elements to Common DWG Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Energy Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Easy Creation and Visualization of Thermal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Streamlined Management of Structure/Opening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Model-based Solar Irradiation Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Custom Operation Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Assign Multiple Building Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

More Detailed Energy Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Library Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General door/window developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ArchiCAD Performance Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated ArchiCAD Help Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 or 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changed Intersection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back-Saving from ArchiCAD 17 to ArchiCAD 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link to Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reveal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Core-Based Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Roofs and Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changed Renovation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17 . . . . . . . . . Minimal Space Extended to Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Automatic Home Story Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

80 81 82 83 85 86 87 91 96 98 99

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo ____________________________ 101


102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 114 117 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 127 130 131 132 134 135 137 141 142 143

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Lost Criteria Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 IFC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Review New Model View Options for Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Configuration __________________________________________________ 169


Start ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Create New Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Open a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Close a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Saving from ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 File Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Template Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Archive Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Troubleshooting Problem Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Opening Projects through a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Add-Ons and Goodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Project Location and Project North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 About Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Quick Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Layer Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Use Layers to Prevent Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate AutoCAD Work Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Building Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pen Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefine a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element-Level Surface Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Align 3D Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Surfaces in Section/Elevation/IE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Surfaces in the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Surfaces in Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Missing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Attributes of GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommendations for Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Objects to Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Embedded Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage BIM Server Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reload/Refresh Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Library from Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Library Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Container File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Favorite Settings as Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Favorite Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Favorite Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Favorite to Placed Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

230 231 232 235 236 237 238 239 240 243 244 247 248 249 251 255 256 258 259 260 261 263 264 266 270 271 274 275 277 280 281 282 293 294 295 296 297 299 301 302

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

The ArchiCAD User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 About Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 About Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Customizing your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Work Environment Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Saving Your Customized Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer . . . . 328

Interaction ____________________________________________________ 329


Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Fit in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Navigator Preview (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Navigation in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Accessing 3D Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Explore Model (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Orbit (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Navigator Preview (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 3D connexion Enabler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 About the Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 How to Display the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Project Workflow in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Organizer Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Navigator Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Navigator Project Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Navigator View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Clone a Folder in the View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Setting up a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Saving a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Options Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Projects in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Origins in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reposition User Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Values in the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Selection of Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Information Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deselecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Store and Access Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marquee Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Marquee Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Marquee (Geometry Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select All Elements in a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Marquee in Find & Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Editing Operations within the Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Input Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

382 383 384 385 387 388 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 399 400 403 404 405 408 409 411 412 413 420 421 423 425 426 428 429 431 432 433 434 435 437 438 439 440

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

The Intelligent Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 About the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Parameters Shown in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Defining Tracker Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Coordinate Input in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Measure Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Grid Snap Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Working with Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Guide Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Editing Plane in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Editing Plane Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Editing Plane and 3D Element Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Reposition Editing Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Using Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Projection of Cursor with Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Coordinate Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Relative Construction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Angle Bisector Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods) . . . . . . . 500 Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Snapping to Existing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Special Snap Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Cursor Snap Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Basic Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Cancel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Move Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Nudging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Dragging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Rotating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Mirroring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset All Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersect Two Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Align function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribute Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Element Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Modifying Element Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching with the Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretch Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Elements to Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Fillet or Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Element Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve/Straighten Element Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explode into Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Element Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock/Unlock Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Magic Wand in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

526 528 530 533 534 535 536 539 541 545 546 547 548 551 554 556 560 562 563 565 568 570 576 579 580 581 584 586 588 589 591 595 597 601 604 605 608 609 610 612

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Magic Wand Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings . . . . . . . . 615 About Trace References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Choosing a Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Show/Hide Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Move Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 Activate Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Rebuild Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Compare Reference with Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Why Consolidate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Linework Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Fill Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Virtual Building ________________________________________________ 641


ArchiCAD Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 About Model Views in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Floor Plan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 About Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Navigate Among Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Defining Story Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Create or Delete Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Story Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Show On Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Define Elements Floor Plan Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 Show All in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Show Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Show Stored Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Show Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Default Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

11

Contents

Filter and Cut Elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Contents of 3D Window as a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Navigation Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Marker Reference for Source Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Section Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Display in the Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Section Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place an Unlinked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of Rebuild Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Section Lines and Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevations (IE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Interior Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Multiple IE Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevation IDs and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevations and Zone Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Elements in Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Document from 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Document from the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefine the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Display of the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

681 684 685 688 689 691 692 707 708 710 712 713 715 716 724 725 727 728 729 730 732 733 734 735 737 738 740 741 744 747 749 750 753 754 755 756 758 760 764 771

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 About Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .774 Contents of the Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 Place a Linked Detail Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Updating the Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782 Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 About Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Worksheet vs. Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 Contents of the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Editing in the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Place a Linked Worksheet Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Managing Markers in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 About Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 Display of Marker Range Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 Source Marker Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 Changing Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Transfer Marker Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797 Copying a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Navigation Using Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 Find Linked Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Check Markers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 Deleting a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806 About Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Open and View a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Editing and Updating Schedule Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825 Format a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 Schedule Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Add Annotations to Schedule Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928 Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

13

Contents

Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 About Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Index of Published Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 Home Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Define Top Link for Wall, Column or Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 About Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954 Create a Straight Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 Create a Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Create a Chain of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Create a Rectangle of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 Create a Trapezoid Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Create a Composite Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Create a Log Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Modify Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Invert Wall Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Creating Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Create a Slanted Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Column Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Columns and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Column Crossing Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Beam Reference Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990 Beam Display on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Create a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Create a Hole in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Beams and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 About Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 Graphical Editing of Complex Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 14
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 About Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019 Create a Single-plane Roof on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Create a Single-plane Roof in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Create a Multi-plane Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 Examples of Multi-plane Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 Editing Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084 Trim Elements to Roof or Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 Define Trimming Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093 Trim Particular Elements: Manual Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 Merge Trimming Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 Merge Elements: Roofs, Shells, Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 Managing Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 About Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113 Extruded Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 Revolved Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 Ruled Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131 Sample Workflows for Shell Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136 Graphical Editing of Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 Create Hole in Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 Edit Shell Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 Define Shell Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 Edit Shell Contour Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174 Customize Edge of Shell or Edge of Shell Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 About Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 Slab Reference Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 Creating Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187 Placing Holes in Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Edge Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 About Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Create a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196 Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 Add New Points to the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 Create a Hole in the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 Display of Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

15

Contents

Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Display of Zone Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Display of Zone Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crop Zone to Another Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall: A System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Curtain Walls: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System-Level Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-Rotate Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Morph Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 2D Morph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Box Morph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Revolved Morph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Morph from Existing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Morph Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Useful Commands for Transforming Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Type: Hard, Hidden, Soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1202 1203 1204 1207 1209 1210 1215 1217 1220 1222 1223 1225 1227 1232 1265 1267 1269 1270 1278 1283 1285 1288 1291 1294 1303 1309 1314 1317 1328 1330 1331 1332 1334 1337 1339 1340 1344 1346 1366 1379

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Boolean Operations with Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 Morph Texture Mapping and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 Fix Modeling Errors: Check and Solidify Morphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Model Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 Element Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 Basic Intersection Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 Specific Element Intersections and Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 How to Make Sure Elements Collide for Best Cleanup Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1401 Intersecting Elements That Dont Clean Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 Best Practices for Intersections: Conceptual Design Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 Fine-Tune Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 Legacy Intersection Mode for Older-Version Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 About Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 BIM Components Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414 Search for Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415 Placing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1429 2D and 3D Representation of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431 Selecting a Placed Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 Stretching Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434 Parameter Transfer Between Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 Create Patch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 About GDL Object Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440 Graphic Creation of Custom Library Parts and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 Saving 3D Elements as Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Saving 3D Model Elements as Rectangular Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 Saving Custom-Shape Doors or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451 Creating Custom Components for Doors, Windows, Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 Editing Custom Library Parts and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 Editing the Script of a GDL Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 Editing Script of Objects Placed from a BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 Scripting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 Further Resources on GDL Object Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1469 Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1471 Placing Doors or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

17

Contents

Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sill or Header Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sill Height Using Subfloor Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchor Reveal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Empty Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors/Windows in Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corner Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing and Moving a Skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylight Constraint Relative to Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stairs with StairMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . StairMaker Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure and Landing (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and Save Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Extras: TrussMaker, Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrussMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Solid Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1478 1480 1481 1483 1485 1487 1490 1491 1493 1495 1498 1499 1500 1501 1505 1506 1507 1510 1520 1525 1526 1531 1534 1535 1536 1540 1541 1542 1544 1545 1547 1548 1551 1552 1553 1559 1560 1561 1563 1566

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568 Applying Partial Structure Settings to Model Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571 Save Partial Structure Settings by View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572 How to Define Components as Core or Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574 Visualizing the Entire Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578 Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker . . . . . 1581 Renovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583 Assign Renovation Status to Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586 Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1589 About Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590 Apply Renovation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 Show an Element in a Single Renovation Filter Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592 Renovation Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 Examples of Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601 Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1605 Renovation Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 Examples of Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 Openings in Renovation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610 Best Practices for Creating Renovation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 Workflows for Tricky Renovation Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612 Adding Insulation to Walls: Renovation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613 Adding New Door Panel to Existing Door Frame: Renovation Workflow . . . . . . 1615 Zone Stamps for Renovated Rooms: Renovation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 Listing Material Quantities for Renovation Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617 Reset Renovation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618 Energy Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620 What is New in Energy Evaluation for ArchiCAD 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 Energy Evaluation Workflow: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Prepare the Architectural BIM for Energy Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623 Define Thermal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624 Automatic Model Geometry and Material Property Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1625 Assign and Input Additional Data to Complete the BEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Evaluate Building Energy Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1628 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1629 General Modeling Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630 Teamwork Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631 Customize Energy Model Review Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632 Direct BIM to BEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633 The Architectural BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

19

Contents

Internal Space Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Energy Model View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Model Geometry and Material Property Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Energy Model Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List and Tree Tab Page View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Blocks Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structures Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Openings Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Energy Model Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Data Assignment and Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Block Property Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Property Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Property Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Source Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Performance Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Energy Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advisory Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIP-Core Dynamic Simulation Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaluation Report Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Performance Evaluation - PDF Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Performance Evaluation - XLS Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Set of Project Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Fill Availability in Fill Pop-Ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a Cut Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw a Drafting Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Area Text to a Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Vectorial Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Orientation of Vectorial or Symbol Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Solid Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1635 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1645 1649 1655 1661 1663 1665 1670 1672 1676 1683 1689 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1704 1705 1710 1716 1720 1721 1723 1725 1726 1729 1731 1733 1734 1735 1736 1738 1747

Documentation ________________________________________________ 1719

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Create or Edit Symbol Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 Using Gradient Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 Create or Edit Image Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752 Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Line Categories in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 Stretching or Shrinking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 Drawing Arcs and Full Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761 Stretching Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762 Editing an Arc Using its Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764 Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765 Convert Ellipse to Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767 Drawing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768 Editing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770 Drawing Freehand Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 Decompose a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776 Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 Drawings in Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780 Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1783 Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785 Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 Glossary of Dimensioning Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Static Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789 Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790 Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796 Dimensioning Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Elevation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 Dimensioning Wall Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 Level Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 Angle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808 Editing a Dimension Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1811 Modify the Witness Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816 Edit Content of Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Dimension Text Type and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1823
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

21

Contents

Change Position of Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document . . . . . . . . Secondary Dimensions (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Exterior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Interior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Straight Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Curved Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Grids in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing Text Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Favorite Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Insert Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext Reference Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Independent Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Associative Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search for Elements by Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool-Specific Default Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Default Text Content of Text Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Select Text Blocks/Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Editing in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment for the Layout Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Book Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1824 1826 1827 1828 1831 1833 1834 1837 1838 1840 1841 1843 1844 1847 1851 1852 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1863 1867 1868 1870 1872 1873 1874 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1884 1885 1886 1887

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1890 Master Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893 Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1896 Drawings in the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 Placing Drawings Onto the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898 Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905 Importing PDF Files As Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 Modifying Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1907 Drawing Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908 Managing and Updating Placed Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912 Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 Layout and Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917 Simple Layout Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918 Automatic Layout ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1919 Custom Layout/Subset IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1923 Layout Workflow Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 Layout Workflow: Smaller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 Layout Workflow: Larger Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927 Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933 Publisher Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1935 The Publisher Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936 Defining a Publisher Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 Defining Output Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 Defining Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 Viewing and Redlining DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 Publishing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952 Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1954 Calculation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 Displaying Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1960 Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1963 ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1966

Collaboration _________________________________________________ 1971


Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974 Setup/Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1976
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

23

Contents

Modular BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Teamwork Project from Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Users on the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrator Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring BIM Server Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete BIM Server Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor User Activity by Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize User Roles for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Project Data Using Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Design Variations of Teamwork Projects: Suggested Workflow . . . . . . . Force User to Leave a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Join or Leave a Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Local Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Send/Receive Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Local Teamwork Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is Local Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Feedback on Local Project/Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Local Teamwork Data to a Different Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Local Data to a Different Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Local Teamwork Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1977 1983 1984 1988 1994 1995 1997 1999 2001 2002 2011 2013 2022 2026 2027 2033 2034 2040 2043 2044 2054 2057 2059 2062 2064 2065 2068 2076 2080 2081 2083 2086 2089 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2099 2100 2101

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Schedule Data Cleanup Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2102 Working Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2104 Working in Detached Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105 Remote Access to Teamwork Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2106 Accessing the BIM Server Over the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2107 Travel Pack: Move Your Project and Libraries to a Different Computer . . . . . . 2111 Working from Home and the Office: Suggested Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2123 Avoid Conflicting Work Sessions in Teamwork Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2124 Teamwork Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2125 Reserving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2127 Overview of Teamwork Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2128 Reserve Elements by Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2129 Reserve Elements by Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2131 Save Custom Criteria Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2137 Reserve Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2141 Feedback on Element Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2142 Reservation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2149 Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2152 List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2154 Feedback on Ownership of Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2155 Reservation in Attribute Manager; Reserve All Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2156 Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2158 Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2161 Reserve Publisher Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2164 Reserve and Delete Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2166 Reserve Find and Select Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2167 Reservation in Interactive Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2169 Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2174 Reserve Mark-up Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2175 Reserve All Elements and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2176 Review Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2178 Creating and Sending Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2179 Assign Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2181 Request Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2183 Release Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2186 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2188 Request Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2191 Create a New Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2192 Receive and Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2195 Ask for Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2196
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

25

Contents

Add Comment to Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Files Linked to Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Drawings in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module from Multistory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Module Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Order of Hotlinked Module Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules: Multiplatform Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Management with Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork and Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualization Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Align View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multidisciplinary Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Architectural-Structural Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Architectural-MEP Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2197 2199 2201 2202 2204 2205 2206 2211 2214 2217 2218 2219 2220 2224 2225 2233 2234 2235 2243 2244 2245 2249 2250 2251 2254 2256 2258 2261 2267 2273 2276 2277 2279 2282 2290 2291 2292 2296

Visualization __________________________________________________ 2253

Interoperability _______________________________________________ 2289

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Typical Architectural-Energy Analysis Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2297 Export Data from ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2298 Prepare Architectural Model for Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2299 Recommended Export Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2310 Import Data to ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2315 Merge vs. Link vs. Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2316 Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2318 Imported Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321 Managing Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2325 Collision Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2328 Detailed Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2329 Detailed Workflow: Architectural-Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2330 Detailed Workflow: Architectural - MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2347 Detailed Workflow: Architectural - Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2354 File Handling and Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2358 File Types Opened by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2359 File Types Saved by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2368 Merging Files to ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2381 Working with PDF Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2386 Create PDF Output Using the Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2387 Save Document in PDF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2391 3D Content in PDF (WIN only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2394 Working with DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2398 Opening DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2399 Saving DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2403 Merge a DXF/DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2406 XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2409 Working with IFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2416 Model View Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2417 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2419 IFC Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2420 IFC Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2433 IFC-Related Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2443 Working with IFC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2445 Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2490 Import Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2495 Change Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2501 IFC Translators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2507 Model Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2524

User Interface Reference ________________________________________ 2527


ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

27

Contents

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Book Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publisher Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizer Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinates Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace & Reference Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renovation Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Session Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Targets and Operators Palette (Solid Element Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheme Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes and Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection and Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracker and Coordinate Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imaging and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Redraw Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Safety & Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network And Update Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2535 2537 2539 2541 2542 2545 2549 2551 2553 2556 2560 2562 2567 2569 2570 2571 2572 2575 2577 2580 2581 2584 2587 2590 2592 2594 2595 2596 2598 2599 2602 2605 2607 2609

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Special Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2611 Shortcut Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2613 Toolbox Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2617 Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2619 Info Box Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2620 Toolbar Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2622 Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2625 Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2628 Project Preferences Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2630 Dimensions Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2631 Calculation Units and Rules Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2635 Zones Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2642 Construction Elements Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2644 Reference Levels Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2646 Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2649 Line Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2654 Building Materials Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2657 Fill Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2662 Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2665 Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2666 Fill Appearance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2667 Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2668 Fill Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2670 Composite Structures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671 Pens & Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2677 Surface Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2680 Surface Exposure to Light Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2683 Surface Vectorial Hatching Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2685 Surface Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2686 LightWorks Shader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2690 Zone Categories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2694 Profile Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2696 Add-On Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2700 Story Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2702 Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2704 Create New Story Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2707 Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2708 Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2710 Grids & Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2712 Linework Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2715
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

29

Contents

Fill Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options Combinations Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options for Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options Override Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options for GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Document Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter and Cut Elements in 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open GL Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perspective Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RoofMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrussMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDL (Geometric Description Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDL Object Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Options (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subset Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Views from ArchiCAD Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pasting Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paste Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header/Footer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2717 2719 2720 2722 2724 2727 2737 2739 2742 2743 2744 2747 2749 2751 2761 2763 2767 2768 2785 2787 2788 2792 2798 2800 2803 2804 2806 2807 2809 2813 2815 2816 2817 2820 2821 2822 2824 2825 2827 2828 2829

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Creating PDF Output in MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2830 Print Dialog Box (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2831 Page Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2832 Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2833 PhotoRendering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2834 LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2835 Internal Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2838 Z-Buffer Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2842 Sketch Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2843 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2846 Hotlink Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2847 Place Module Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2851 Module Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2854 XREF Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2855 Attach XREF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2858 DXF/DWG Translation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2861 Drawing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2864 Open Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2865 Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2868 Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2872 Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2874 Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2878 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2881 Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2882 Font-Style Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2884 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2885 Custom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2886 Merge DXF-DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2887 Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2888 Import Options for Elements on Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2890 Smart Merge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2892 Mark-Up Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2896 Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2900 Project Reviewer Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2901 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2905 Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2907 Wall Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2911 Roof Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2922 Shell Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2931 Beam Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2939
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

31

Contents

Column Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slab Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mesh Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Morph Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings of Library Part Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object/Lamp Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door/Window Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the Door/Window Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door/Window Preview and Positioning Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where to Set Door/Window Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Display of Door/Window: Symbolic vs. Projected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Floor Plan Attributes of Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Panels in Door/Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Interface Panel for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nominal Sizes and Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Style and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaf, Sash and Opening Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Leaf Type and Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sidelight and Transom Sash Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Type and Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Lines - Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Lines - Sidelight and Transom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and Handle Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reveal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Casing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Casing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sill Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2945 2953 2958 2962 2970 2971 2978 2982 2985 2989 2990 2991 2993 2995 3003 3007 3015 3016 3018 3023 3026 3028 3033 3036 3038 3041 3044 3045 3047 3048 3050 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3061 3062 3063 3064

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Contents

Board Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3065 Sunshade Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3067 Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3069 Masonry Arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3070 Minimal Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3072 Graphical Interface Panel for a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3073 Nominal Sizes and Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3075 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3077 Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3080 Frame and Sash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3081 Frame Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3082 Sash Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3083 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3085 Opening Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3086 Reveal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3087 Wall Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3088 Custom Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3091 Inside Casing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3092 Outside Casing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3094 Sill Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3096 Board Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3098 Wall Inset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3100 Sunshade Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3102 Masonry Arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3104 Skylight Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3106 Stair Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3112 StairMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3120 Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3132 Linear Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3133 Elevation Dimensioning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3136 Radial Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3138 Angle Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3140 Level Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3143 Dimension Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3145 Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3147 Text Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3148 Label Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3151 Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3156 Fill Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3166 Line Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3169
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

33

Contents

Arc/Circle Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall End Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspot Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3171 3172 3173 3185 3190 3197 3199 3201 3205 3206 3207 3208 3210 3213

License & Trademark Information _______________________________ 3215 Index ________________________________________________________ 3217

34

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo


Context-Sensitive Help Finding a Help Topic Navigating in Help For More Information Context-Sensitive Help
ArchiCAD is equipped with a context-sensitive Help system. To launch the Help: Press F1 Or right-click on any particular ArchiCAD user interface element and choose the Whats this command The Help will open to a topic relevant to the ArchiCAD interface item you have clicked. (In some cases, the Help will open to the ArchiCAD main page.) You can also select Help from the ArchiCAD Help menu to bring up the Help main page.

Finding a Help Topic


From the Help main page, you have several ways of navigating to the topic you need:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

35

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Use the Contents tab page in the left pane to browse the hierarchical list of topics. You can extend the tree-view by clicking on a topic to see sub-topics. Click on your topic of choice to open it in the right-hand pane. Click the book icon to close an open topic.

36

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Click the Index tab, then click the first letter of the topic you are interested in. The list of matching topics will be instantly displayed. Select from the list to access the topic you wish to open.

Click the Search tab, then enter your search term in the field. - Use the * key (asterisk) as a wildcard to denote any string of characters in the search. - Use the parentheses (...)to search for a particular phrase. Hit Enter or click the Go button to bring up search results. Click on a selected topic to display it in the right panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

37

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Navigating in Help
Use the buttons at the top of the Help page to navigate.

Go to the next page in the Help

Click the right-arrow button to move forward to the next topic in the hierarchy.

Go to the previous page in the Help

Click the left-arrow button to move backwards to the previous topic in the hierarchy. 38
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Go back to the Help page you were before


Use the Back button of your Internet browser application. (This button may vary depending on your browser.)

Locate the current Help topic in the Table of Contents

Click the circling arrows button to highlight the location of the currently open topic in the Contents hierarchy.

Print out the current Help topic

Click the print button to open the print dialog box to print the current topic from ArchiCAD Help. (Make sure you click with the cursor in the opened Help topic which you want to print.)

Access Drop-Down text


Some Help topics include drop-down subheadings: to display the text under the subheading, click the arrow.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

39

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Print PDF

Click the PDF icon to display the Help pages in PDF format and to access Adobes commands for printing the pages using PDF format. To return to viewing it in HTML format again, click anywhere in the Helps Table of Contents.

For More Information


To access additional sources of information about using ArchiCAD: See the links in the ArchiCAD Help menu. See the Getting Started booklet.

40

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide


Modeling Workflow Open BIM Energy Evaluation Library Enhancements ArchiCAD Performance Improvements Integrated ArchiCAD Help Center

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

41

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Modeling
Automatic Model-Based Junctions Link Element Height to Stories Core-Based Reference Line Curved Beam More Intuitive Element Creation in 3D Window Anchor Door/Window Reveal to Wall Core

42

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Automatic Model-Based Junctions


Ability to configure all construction elements so that when they intersect or collide, their display accurately and automatically reflects their construction - particularly in section views, used as the basis for detail drawings. Most of the junctions of a section will look correct up to 1:50 scale.

Priority-Based Connections Available for All Construction Elements


Extend priority-based connections (formerly available only for walls on the floor plan and to a limited degree in section) to all construction elements and composites, and column/beam profiles, in all model views, via the Building Material. Separate intersection priorities can be set for column veneer and core. A revised interface simplifies these priority settings to make their input easier and the results more predictable. See Element Intersections.

Other Improvements for Better Intersections


Eliminate common contour lines where construction elements meet, subject to Building Material Represent the T/L/X connections between walls based on their actual skin/component based connections. See Specific Element Intersections and Junctions. Symbolic representation of connections of any (normal/profiled) vertical columns and nonpolygon walls on Floor Plan Improved dimensioning of structural components in section view - e.g. place dimensions at contour lines or separator lines, or at boundaries of core/finish skins

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

43

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

More flexibility for displaying cut surfaces in Section views (consistent with 3D Document)

Snap to composite separator or any visible edge in 3D as well as Floor Plan View results of skin-based connections in 3D Helping modeling interactions for Junctions: better manual editing options and new automated junction command from the Edit menu: Adjust Elements to Slabs

44

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

See Adjust Elements to Slabs.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

45

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Link Element Height to Stories


Enable the height of walls, columns and zones to be linked to a particular story: when the story position changes, the heights of the linked elements are automatically adjusted. This way, you do not have to manually adjust element heights every time the story height changes. See Define Top Link for Wall, Column or Zone.

Use a built-in Find and Select criteria set to locate any inverted elements (e.g. with a negative height) with a single click. Such elements are also highlighted on the plan for easy locating. See Inverted Elements. You still have the option to input a fixed height, and to define a base elevation to a given reference level Option to retain or ignore toplinks in Hotlinked Modules Door/Window sills and headers can be linked to the top of the wall, not just to the bottom See Sill or Header Heights.

46

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Core-Based Reference Line


For walls and slabs: Option to assign a reference line-plane not just to either side of the wall, but also to either side of the walls core skin, or to the top/bottom of the slab core. This way, when the user edits the wall or slab (e.g. adds skins or changes the thickness), the wall/slab core connections remain constant, and the elements' positions relative to their reference line remain unchanged.

For example, walls can join slabs by connecting to the slab core, rather than the top of the slab finish. This feature is also useful when slabs are used for another purpose (such as a ceiling): the reference level can be placed at the slab bottom, rather than the top. See Wall Reference Line and Slab Reference Plane. Use the new Modify Wall Reference Line/Slab Reference Plane dialogs (replaces Wall Extras) to relocate reference line/plane without moving the geometry.

See Modify Wall Reference Line and Modify Slab Reference Plane.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

47

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Curved Beam
Use the Beam tool to create beams that are curved on a horizontal plane. Thus, beams can serve as support structures along curved walls. Such wall/beam intersections are automatically shown correctly in sections (no need for solid element operations to represent them).

48

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

More Intuitive Element Creation in 3D Window


In the 3D window, element input takes place at the elevation at which you click; the input plane snaps to the corresponding story level in space. (The current story option for defining element location in 3D is eliminated.) In 3D window and in Section, use graphic feedback and snap to story level when editing element elevation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

49

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Anchor Door/Window Reveal to Wall Core


Anchor the Door/Window reveal to either the Wall face or the Wall core. For example, you anchor a window to a composite Walls core. If you later make changes in the composite structure (e.g. thicker insulation), the reveal depth is automatically adjusted, to maintain the windows distance relative to the Walls core skin.

See Anchor Reveal.

50

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Workflow
Building Material Easily Editable 3D Cutting Plane Improved Door/Window Placement Enhanced Composite/Profile Workflow Floor Plan-Based 3D Document Improved Zone Creation and Editing Smarter Attribute Management Better Management of Hotlinked Modules PDF/A Support Export ArchiCAD Model to STL Format Integrated Connections with Google Earth, Sketchup One-Step Renovation Status Update for All Elements Conceptual Design Improved Tool Settings Interface Duplicate Elements in Section

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

51

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Building Material
The new Building Material attribute, which combines cut fill, surface material, priority, physical properties and pens, is defined globally, then applied to any construction element, simplifying the user interface and allowing the same cut fill to be used consistently throughout the model. See Building Materials.

At element level, pens and surfaces can be overridden as needed, including for Profiled elements.

52

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Improved visualization of Building Materials on Composite and Profiled Structures in 3D

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

53

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Easily Editable 3D Cutting Plane


Define 3D cutaway sections of the model graphically, using one or more cutting planes in any location. Instead of setting controls in a dialog box, simply drag an icon to create graphical cutting planes in the floor plan, Section or 3D window, then drag/rotate/move these planes into place to define and limit the 3D model view.

See 3D Cutting Planes.

54

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Improved Door/Window Placement


New intuitive feedback removes the guesswork when you are placing a new opening into a Wall. Ghost previews of each option let you know exactly what you are going to get in terms of: opening location anchor point reveal side opening direction Even while you are placing the opening, you can switch any of these options on the fly.

See Placing Doors or Windows.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

55

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Enhanced Composite/Profile Workflow


Select any Composite or Profile element in any view, then right-click to access the relevant Composite or Profile Settings directly.

In Composite Settings: Simplified UI consolidates all settings within a single table format Drag skins to change skin order New command creates a simple 1-skin composite All Line Types now available as separators, including Symbol line types Updated Preview shows Surface color as well as Cut Fill In Profile Manager: Simplified UI, smaller palette save screen real estate when fully open New and Duplicate commands require naming the profile before creating it Apply correctly applies the stored profile to selected element.

56

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Floor Plan-Based 3D Document


With a single click, create a 3D Document based on the Floor Plan: a section view, based on a horizontal cut plane in the Floor Plan window. Define the projection by setting a cut plane height and the projection direction either upwards (toward the ceiling) or downwards (to the floor). This type of 3D Document shows the cut part of the model, including sections of vertical structures (e.g. walls, openings). Interface and settings are based on the 3D Document. This is useful, for example, to display the load-bearing structures on a slab plan, or as a reflected ceiling plan. Use it also to create shaded Floor Plan views for presentation/interior design. Create 3D Floor Plan using single command Filter content by Marquee, cutting planes, and element type Save document as view; print or place on Layout Dimension 2D elements on ceiling plan Show hidden lines Option for Reflected ceiling-type view Model-based element display (including Solid Element Operations) Options for display include cut and uncut attributes, contours, true 3D vectorial hatching, shading, shadow and sun effects

See Create a 3D Document from the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

57

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Improved Zone Creation and Editing


New Zone input methods
New Rectangle/Rotated Rectangle options when drawing a manual zone.

Keep Zone Area Fixed while Editing


Use new Fixed Area option in pet palette to offset the Zone in a way that keeps its area unchanged.

58

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Smarter Attribute Management


After migration to ArchiCAD 17, using file merge or working with hotlinks, you may need to get rid of the unneeded attributes (e.g. layers, line types, fill types). A new workflow for attribute management helps save you time and prevent costly mistakes, allowing you to safely delete and replace attributes: Delete and Replace: When you delete an attribute, define which attribute should replace it throughout your model - in one step (available for Building Materials, Line Types, Fill Types, Composites, Profiles, Surfaces, Zone Categories)

Delete Layers and Move Elements: If you delete a layer, you now have the option to move its elements onto a different layer (instead of losing those elements forever)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

59

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Better Management of Hotlinked Modules


Note: Not available in ArchiCAD 17 Solo version. Now you can define a custom Master ID to every Hotlinked Module instance. For example, if your hotlinked module is a hotel room, then R213 would be the Master ID for the 13th room hotlink on the second floor. Once this instance is placed in the host file, its Master ID is assigned to every element of that Hotlinked Module, as an extension of their element ID: the original element ID is kept, but is extended based on the Master ID of the hotlink. For example, the element ID of the room sink (original element ID: SINK16) is now changed to R213 SINK 16. As a result, all elements have unique IDs, yet for Hotlinked Module elements, their IDs remain protected from editing in ID Manager. As an additional benefit, Zone handling is much easier. If you define your Zones in the source file of the hotlink, its Zone ID will be extended by the Master ID of the module instance they belong to: this way, Zones in a Hotlinked module can each have a unique ID. Thus, you can define Zones once in your source Hotlink module, rather than afterwards in the host file. Optionally, connect the Zone ID with its Zone Number to display this information in the Zone Stamp. For example, a Zone with an ID of Bathroom in the source file is placed into the host file as part of a HLM with a Master ID of R213. Its Zone Number will then be R213Bathroom.

60

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

PDF/A Support
As of ArchiCAD 17, it is possible to save or publish views, layouts, publisher sets or the entire project in PDF/A format, a standard format for archiving purposes. This feature uses PDF Technology powered by PDFTron. See PDF Options.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

61

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Export ArchiCAD Model to STL Format


Support for STL file format (Stereolithography) is built into ArchiCAD 17: you can directly save the ArchiCAD model as an STL file. An STL file carries only the surface geometry of a 3D model, divided into triangles, without any additional information (e.g. color, material). You can also open or merge an STL file directly to ArchiCAD. The format is usually used for rapid prototyping, 3D printing, and computer-aided manufacturing.

62

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Integrated Connections with Google Earth, Sketchup


Open or merge models from Google Earth (.kmz) or Sketchup (.skp) directly into ArchiCAD, or save the ArchiCAD models in either of those formats: the related add-ons are now fully integrated in ArchiCAD and require no extra downloads Use File > File Special > Send Model to Google Earth for a one-step viewing experience When merging a model to ArchiCAD, the user can choose between using the imported location coordinates, or retaining ArchiCADs Project Location data and placing the new data relative to these coordinates If you only need the location data, you can import the location data stored in the .kmz or .skp file straight into your ArchiCAD model by using the Project Location dialog box

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

63

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

One-Step Renovation Status Update for All Elements


When a renovation project is finished, you will need to update all elements renovation status: for example, those that were To be Demolished can now be deleted; those that were New are now Existing. In earlier versions, this process required several rounds of Find & Select, and 2D elements, such as annotations, had to be updated viewpoint by viewpoint. Now you can do all this with a onestep workflow that is intelligently and flexibly applied to all elements in all views, including your annotations. The Reset Renovation Status command (Document > Renovation menu) lets you globally update (or delete) elements by status, or leave them unchanged - speeding up your Renovation workflow, leaving no element forgotten.

64

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Conceptual Design
New Morph scheduling features support conceptual design and mass modeling. List the volume and area of Morphs separately by story (even as the multi-story Morph remains a single element). These data provide valuable input at the conceptual stage about the useful area of the planned project.

Bruttorauminhalt (GER, AUT versions only)


This feature enables the automatic generation of a building volume report which complies with the (German) DIN 277 and the (Austrian) NORM B 1800 standard. The workflow involves using Morphs to conceptually model the building as a whole. In Morph Settings, each Morph is assigned a category (A, B, C or undefined), which corresponds to a

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

65

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

building structure type, as defined in the standard specification. The user then runs the BRI command to generate the standard-compliant report.

66

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Improved Tool Settings Interface


Updated user interface for Geometry and Positioning panel of all construction element tool settings More descriptive graphics in Tool Settings, which change depending on top link and offset settings More consistent settings among all construction elements Coordinated and updated Info Box panels

Duplicate Elements in Section


The following element creation commands are available in section views, from the pet palette as well as the context menu: Drag a copy/Drag Multiple Copies Mirror/Mirror a copy (not available for Doors/Windows) Multiply Rotate/Rotate a copy (where applicable - for Morph, Shell, Curtain Wall)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

67

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Open BIM
IFC Improvements Saving Elements to Common DWG Blocks

68

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

IFC Improvements
Support for Multiple IFC Standards IFC Publishing Other IFC-related Improvements

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

69

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Support for Multiple IFC Standards


Coordination View 2.0
Complete the certification process of IFC 2x3 Coordination View version 2.0 (IFC2x3 CV 2.0) standard based on its export and import requirements. All other major applications, such as Revit Architecture/Structure/MEP, AutoCAD Architecture/MEP, Bentley Architecture, Tekla Structures, Vectorworks, Allplan, Scia Engineer, DDS-CAD MEP, Solibri Model Checker, are also working on this certification process. The result: improved model-based data exchange with these applications.

Other Model View Definitions


Expanded capabilities for defining new IFC data requested by other Model View Definitions such as Concept Design BIM 2010 (required by GSA (US), Statsbygg (Norway), Senate Properties (Finland) and FM Handover (required by COBie, for example) and others: IfcSystem assignment (especially for MEP elements): group project elements in system hierarchy manually, by using MEP Modeler defined systems, or by importing systems from MEP applications Define sub-system hierarchy (parent and child system): Group elevators in a vertical circulation system which can be a child system of a mechanical system Assign plumbing elements to cold water sub-system of a plumbing system. Multilevel (Sub) hierarchy available for IfcZone and IfcGroup assignments. Group some ArchiCAD Zones (IfcSpaces) in an IfcZone (Security Zones), which is a part of a higher level IfcZone group (Govermental Zones) IfcTimeSeriesSchedule assignment: occupancy, lighting and equipment schedule assignment to project elements such as ArchiCAD Zones. Calculation and export of special base-quantities of site/building/story defined in Concept Design BIM 2010 MVD (required by e.g. GSA). Support for all IFC Type Products, such as IfcSlabeType, IfcCurtainWallType etc. Editing of IFC data (renaming, new properties, classification etc.) on element types/styles (e.g. IfcDoorStyle) Lining and panel properties (including operation type) of doors and windows will be added automatically to their IfcDoorStyle/IfcWindowStyle. Assign elements directly to the IfcSite or IfcBuilding. Neighboring buildings and site context elements (trees, fences, roads, etc.) can be assigned to the site instead of the project building with its story system. Set and export currency and time units Support for calendar date-type IFC properties (for example WarrantyStartDate, etc.) New global and localized classification systems (e.g. Uniclass in UK)

70

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

IFC Publishing
Use the ArchiCAD Publisher interface to publish the model in IFC format with one click. You can publish the entire model or just floor plans by story, on a WYSIWYG basis. All IFC Translator options are available through the Publisher as well.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

71

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Other IFC-related Improvements


At IFC model import, a customizable folder-system of the library parts is generated (embedded library, linked library and .lcf) Reduces project file size and allows user to control location of the newly created objects The name of a custom IFC Property Set can be easily edited by just clicking on its name field and entering a new value. Find & Select and Interactive Element Schedule works for IFC Assignments and IFC Type Products Sophisticated automated junctions in the ArchiCAD model (new in 17) are supported in the context of IFC export: construction element connections are exported to IFC in WYSIWYG fashion 2D symbols of doors and windows can be exported within the IFC model

72

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Saving Elements to Common DWG Blocks


Until now, multiple instances of a single GDL Object - if they used varying parameters - were saved as separate DWG Blocks. As of ArchiCAD 17, such GDL objects will be saved as a single DWG Block. This way, you only have to edit a single block in AutoCAD, rather than multiple instances.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

73

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Energy Evaluation
By introducing multiple thermal blocks to the Building Energy Model, Energy Evaluation for ArchiCAD 17 produces an increasingly sophisticated and accurate report of the projects energy demand, using a standard-compliant engine. An expanded interface and new evaluation features take advantage of the more detailed data provided by multiple thermal blocks (instead of the single-block method used in ArchiCAD 16).

Easy Creation and Visualization of Thermal Blocks Streamlined Management of Structure/Opening Data Model-based Solar Irradiation Study Custom Operation Profiles More Detailed Energy Reports Assign Multiple Building Systems More Detailed Energy Reports

74

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Easy Creation and Visualization of Thermal Blocks


A projects Thermal Blocks are defined by the user; their geometry consists of one or more ArchiCAD zones. Each Thermal Block (e.g. Stairwell, Office, Basement, Technical Area) typically has its own energy characteristics and needs. Define thermal blocks by drag-and-dropping ArchiCAD zones from the model window into the Thermal Block list New Thermal Blocks page of the Model Review Palette lists thermal blocks with all their relevant properties Highlight the list entries to visualize Thermal Block geometry directly in the ArchiCAD model

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

75

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Streamlined Management of Structure/Opening Data


Use the Model Review Palettes new Tree View to browse, edit and visualize the Openings/ Structure data, organized by Thermal Block Properties panel provides editable list view Openings page provides individual analysis (listing, editing and visualization) of each opening More detailed parameter set allows for a more accurate energy simulation

76

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Model-based Solar Irradiation Study


Model-Based Solar Irradiation Study determines precise solar gain through each individual opening in the building envelope Graphical Solar Analysis feedback for each opening

Solar analysis also considers shading effects of building environment (e.g. adjacent objects, other buildings) ArchiCAD plant objects act as intelligent shading devices: their shading capacity is scheduled for the reference year, making it possible to factor in whether the plants used for shading are coniferous or deciduous

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

77

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Custom Operation Profiles


Define custom Operation Profiles (in addition to default profiles) to fine-tune occupancy according to local regulations or to match actual building usage Hourly scheduling for the entire reference year guarantees accurate input of occupancy patterns

78

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Assign Multiple Building Systems


In ArchiCAD 17, assignment of MEP systems is available for each thermal block separately - not just for the project as a whole. The resulting Energy Simulation thus presents a more realistic picture of the projects energy demand.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

79

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

More Detailed Energy Reports


More detailed energy reports in PDF and XLS formats New formatting options, including colors, font, add image as header

80

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Library Enhancements
Please note: Some new Library part developments are available in certain localized libraries only (where applicable, this is indicated in the descriptions below).

General Library Developments Objects Labels Zone stamps General door/window developments Doors Windows

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

81

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

General Library Developments


To speed navigation among objects, similar library parts have been merged, while retaining all their parameters. Some objects have been renamed to eliminate confusing abbreviations. A new criterion allows library parts to be scheduled based on the name of the subtype they originate from.

82

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Objects
Coordinate Dimension
The Coordinate Dimension object now has a 3D appearance, so that you can easily place it on the target point by using gravity.

Stairs and Railings


New 2D appearance for stairs and simple railings, similar to those created by Stair Maker: new options to show rail or carriage on Floor Plan.

RoofMaker Elements
Roof elements used by RoofMaker have a new graphical user interface for easier parameter setting. Story sensitive floor plan display is also available. Lumber Cut Size and Rounded Lumber Size values are calculated automatically and displayed in the parameters with the same names. They can be listed with the new schedule scheme called Roof Construction (included in the INT template and in selected local versions). Structural Length, Lumber Size and Lumber Size (rounded off) are displayed correctly and available for listing and schedules. Subtype-based schedule scheme for Roof construction elements can be created.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

83

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

New Object: Multileader Label Symbol


New multileader label object can be placed on the Floor Plan. Similar to the existing independent label, this one can have several leaders.

84

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Labels
Dimension Label Includes Elevation Data
The Dimension label can display an elements bottom and top elevation The label was improved with a user interface for better transparency

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

85

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Zone stamps
More Flexible Zone Stamp Data Display
For Zone Stamp 2 and local stamps: Customize display order of data within the Zone Stamp Show height values individually

86

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

General door/window developments


Improved Placement of Doors/Windows
As part of the improved workflow for Door/Window placement, the Opening Direction parameter has been eliminated: new feedback clarifies the inside/outside and reveal side parameters Door/Window Marker functions are more consistent Opening Orientation is shown correctly in schedules

New closure types


Predefined options for common closure types.

Note: Closures are displayed in Floor Plan. Closure types are generated correctly only if they are placed in a composite Wall with a proper skin composition. Variable Cavity Closure Plaster Reveal

Insulated Reveal

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

87

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Insulation Closure for Renovation

Finish Closure

Air Space Closure

Better Documentation of Openings


Doors and windows calculate and schedule their glazed surfaces (considering default material settings) Markers and stamps can read and display U-values defined by the openings listing parameters

88

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Sill and Threshold Improvements -> DACH only


New threshold types in doors: Normal

Up to Door Panel

Underneath Door Panel 1

Underneath Door Panel 2

Threshold Thickness = Wall Thickness

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

89

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Set gap between door leaf and threshold (gap affects door leaf height) Blind threshold available with each threshold type Flooring thickness can be defined in windows Sill is available in Terrace Doors

Casing representation -> NOR only


Casing is not shown in 1:50 or smaller scale

90

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Doors
New Doors
New Telescopic elevator doors -> DACH only Telescopic Door Telescopic Double Door

New Doors with one sidelight: door leaf is hinged on the sidelight side

New Door Leaf Types


25 new door leaf types:

All doors have an empty door panel option -> DACH only.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

91

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Double doors can be designed with two different door panels -> DACH only

Improvements for Doors with Sidelight


Set a casing for doors with one or two sidelights, even those with a raised sidelight parapet (Tshaped and P-shaped doors).

92

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Horizontal division is available for doors sidelights. Divided parts can be designed with different sash and opening types. New doors with one sidelight: door leaf is hinged on the sidelight side.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

93

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Improved 2D Representation of Doors


New opening line representation is available for doors: simple line, drawn at the axis of the door opening

94

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

New arrow symbol on sliding doors

Glazing of door leaves is shown on floor plan

More Parameters for Sliding Doors


Leaf overlapping and gap between door leaves can be set in sliding doors.

Garage Door Enhancements -> DACH only


A new motor position is available in Sectional Door Editable door frame sizes in Garage Door Type 2 Top Hung Sectional Door and Garage Door Type 2 Top Hung contain a threshold

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

95

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Windows
Basic Window improvements
Easier symmetric positioning of horizontal divisions

New Sash and Opening Types for Windows


Solid panel is available for window sashes New opening type for basic windows: Reversible Horizontally.

Better Opening Symbol for Elevation and 3D


Opening lines fit to sash contour instead of glass contour.

96

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Window Frame Improvements -> SWE, DACH only


Frame widths can be set one by one

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

97

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

ArchiCAD Performance Improvements


Faster Navigation with OpenGL
When navigating in large projects in the 3D window using Open GL, an improvement in 3D engine processes has speeded up navigation: up to ten times faster.

Improving SEO Performance


If your project contains a large number of Solid Element Operations, your performance will improve noticeably - due to more sophisticated data management, which avoids the need to recalculate Solid Operations that are used multiple times.

Double-Quick Library Loading Times


Library loading is now twice as fast! If you have loaded a library on this machine before, the next load will be much speedier, thanks to new caching processes. Works for any kind of library.

Better Performance with Older-Version Libraries


If you are using library parts from older-version libraries and older-version PLA files, the 2D rebuilds and 3D display of these library parts will speed up - thanks to improved management of archival library part data.

Faster Handling of Library Parts 3D models


The handling of library parts 3D models has been improved on a multicore processor: when you switch to a 3D view, the view can be generated up to 50 percent faster, depending on the number of library parts in the project.

Background Operations for Faster 3D


ArchiCAD uses background operations to calculate the precise geometry of construction elements which intersect or collide with each other. Background operations means that you can, for example, work on a floor plan view while the application calculates the geometry of elements not visible in the current view - without interrupting your workflow. Benefit: when you switch to another model view, the result will be displayed much faster.

98

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

Integrated ArchiCAD Help Center


Find the information you need faster! The new Help Center is a search site, accessible directly from ArchiCAD, that replaces the current offline Help. Type your query into the Search field: the ArchiCAD Help Center instantly pinpoints the material you need from the following resources: ArchiCAD Help documentation Training videos from GRAPHISOFTs Youtube site ArchicadWiki ArchiCAD-Talk Find a simple answer to a simple question, or watch a tutorial explain a complex feature: its all here. The content is specialized for your geographic location and may vary depending on your license type.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

99

ArchiCAD 17 Solo New Features Guide

100

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo


You can open older-version files (ArchiCAD 8.1 and up) in ArchiCAD 17. Since ArchiCAD features are developed and improved in each succeeding version, your olderversion project will, in some respects, work differently after you migrate it to ArchiCAD 17. This Migration Guide calls your attention to these changes. To use the Migration Guide, click on the link below that corresponds to the project version you wish to migrate. This will take you to a checklist of migration issues you should consider.

Migrating from ArchiCAD 16 Migrating from ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 14 Migrating from ArchiCAD 13 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 or 9

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

101

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 16


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating the BIM Server Back-Saving from ArchiCAD 17 to ArchiCAD 16

102

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 15


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17 Migrating the BIM Server

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

103

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 14


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Migrating Labels Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) Migrating the BIM Server Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17

104

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 13


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) Migrating the BIM Server Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17 Minimal Space Extended to Doors

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

105

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 12


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17 Lost Criteria Sets

106

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 11


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

107

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 10


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills

108

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 or 9


Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues Changed Intersection Function Link to Story Reveal Depth Core-Based Wall Reference Line Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab Migrating Labels Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 17

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

109

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Building Materials: Attribute Migration Issues


Building Material: The New Super-Attribute in ArchiCAD 17
ArchiCAD 17 introduces a new concept for assigning attributes to elements. In ArchiCAD 16 and before, individual attributes were assigned to an element. In ArchiCAD 17, many of these attributes have been merged into a new super attribute called the Building Material. Starting with ArchiCAD 17, all construction elements use Building Materials instead of Cut Fills. Editing the Building Material attribute makes changes throughout the model.

Building Materials Are Generated and Assigned Automatically


When opening an earlier-version file in ArchiCAD 17, the program automatically creates the required Building Materials and assigns them to all elements to maintain the models original graphical appearance in all model views. The migration algorithm searches through all of the projects model elements, defaults, favorites, unused composites/profiles, etc., with their Priorities, Cut Fill, Fill Orientation, Surfaces and Pen settings. Where the settings are identical, a new Building Material is generated. (Variations in Cut Fill Pen and Surfaces are handled as element-level overrides, to minimize the number of newly created attributes.) The names of the new Building Materials are generated from the original Cut Fills name and will be extended with a unique nine-digit identifier (explained below at: Working with Hotlinks: What Happens to the Attributes). This automatic generation is the best that can be created via the model analysis process when opening older files in ArchiCAD 17. This process results in a true representation of the settings used within the project, because it checks all elements in the model and creates all the necessary Building Materials. However, since the Building Material introduces a new logic into ArchiCAD, the generated set of attributes should be reviewed and finalized by the user. See What to Do About Attributes in a Migrated Project.

New Composites and Profiles Are Generated


Some element-level settings (including Cut Line, Cut Line Pen, Separator Line, Separator Line Pen and Enable Skin Priorities) that were previously available for Composite and Profiled Elements are no longer available at the element level in ArchiCAD 17. For Profile and Composite elements, these settings are defined in their structures. Thus, if a composite/profile element used the element-level settings in the older-version file (its Apply Structures Settings option was unchecked), a new Composite or Profile will be generated in ArchiCAD 17.

110

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

What to Do About Attributes in a Migrated Project


It is recommended that you spend the time to go through your attribute set manually, to ensure you keep what you need and discard what you dont.

Before Migration
1. Make a Backup Make a backup copy of your project. If you later inadvertently delete attributes, you can use Attribute Manager and append them again from the backup copy. 2. Remove Unnecessary Attributes Use the tab pages of the Attribute Manager to view the lists of each attribute type and delete the ones you do not use and will not need. Go through each attribute type (each tab page) one by one. For each attribute type, delete each unneeded attribute one by one (select it in Attribute Manager, then click Delete). If you are not sure about a particular attribute, you can rename it (e.g. append the tag _delete to its name), then review the project to see if it is in fact being used. Do not use the Purge Unused command unless you are confident that your project is not using any of the attributes to be purged. If any of your element defaults or Favorites uses a particular attribute, but has not been placed in the project, the Purge command will delete that attribute as unused. The Purge command will delete attributes that are used in GDL scripts of Library Parts. If you are migrating multiple projects: If you are migrating multiple similar project files to ArchiCAD 17, the Replace Attributes by File function can help you speed up the migration process: it automates the Delete and Replace attributes function, instead of you having to issue repetitive "Delete and Replace" commands in each attribute settings dialog.This requires generation of a text file in a particular format, and running a command that calls this file. See a description of this process at http://archicadwiki.com/AttributeMigration. 3. Review Element Defaults and Favorites When you migrate a project to ArchiCAD 17, Default and Favorite element settings will potentially generate new attributes when migrating. Before migrating, make sure your defaults/favorites are necessary and up to date, based on elements that are actually used in the Project. (ArchiCAD 17 will generate new attributes to correspond to defaults or favorites, even if they are not actually used in placed elements).

After Migration
1. Remove Unnecessary Attributes (Again) Review the Building Materials in Building Material Settings to determine which can be deleted and replaced with another.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

111

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

If you need Building Materials that are not part of the generated set, you can easily add them from another ArchiCAD 17 project via Attribute Manager or directly create them (click New) within Building Material Settings. Eliminate Duplicate Cut Fills: Many older-version projects contain multiple Cut Fills that use identical cut fill patterns; these duplicates were necessary to differentiate them by their other properties (e.g. Physical Properties). In ArchiCAD 17, a single Cut Fill pattern can be associated to many Building Materials: check your list of Cut Fills to eliminate unnecessary duplicates. See below for Workflow Tips for Reducing Generated Attributes. 2. Review and Modify Names of Building Materials Review and modify Building Material names as needed (a Building Material will inherit its name from the Cut Fill). Note: It is recommended that you do not change Building Material names in files that are to be used as or with hotlinks, until all of the participating files have been migrated. Such name changes should be made before the hotlinks are updated. See Recommendations for Hotlinked Files. 3. Review Intersection Priorities Some generated Building Materials may have an Intersection Priority of 0 (most likely from those imported elements, like Columns and Slabs, that had no intersection priority in earlier versions, as well as profiles imported with a default Intersection Priority of 0). Review these and assign Intersection Priorities as needed.

Workflow Tips for Reducing Generated Attributes


Use the new Delete and Replace feature (available after clicking Delete) within Attribute Settings: define which attribute should replace it throughout your model (available for Building Materials, Line Types, Fill Types, Composites, Profiles, Surfaces, Zone Categories) Use Find & Select to search for model elements with certain Attributes within the Project (it is recommend to use the 3D window, and to turn on and unlock all layers, and adjust the Filter Elements in 3D settings, to make sure all 3D elements are visible and will be found) Use the Interactive Schedule to find and list elements within the Project to easily modify them directly, using the Interactive Schedule environment.

Working with Hotlinks: What Happens to the Attributes


When you add or update a hotlinked file, if the attribute sets do not match, ArchiCAD automatically manages them as follows: Attributes from the hotlinked file (module .MOD or native ArchiCAD .PLN files) are associated to attributes in the host file, via their name within the same attribute type. For example: If the same name exists - Attribute A in the hotlink will link to Attribute A in the host. If the same name doesnt exist - Attribute A in the hotlink will create a new Attribute A in the host. If Attribute A is renamed to Attribute B in the host, and the hotlink file is updated, a new Attribute A will be created (see point 2) 112
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

When migrating hotlinked files, the same use attribute name logic described above still applies to maintain an accurate model appearance. As described above, in ArchiCAD 17, Building Material attributes generated from a migrated project will use the Cut Fill name and a unique nine-digit number. This identifier represents the contents and settings of the generated Building Material; therefore, attributes with the same unique number have identical settings. If you change Building Material names (including the ID number), such attributes will not be paired with their identical counterparts in hotlinked files, so new attributes will be created after the hotlink is updated.

Recommendations for Hotlinked Files


When working with hotlinked files in a Project, it is best to use the same set of attributes in both the host and hotlinked files. It is best to migrate all hotlinked files to the same version to maintain consistency between files. If you are migrating both the host and hotlinked files to ArchiCAD 17: First consolidate and update attributes in the host then do the same with all hotlinked files before updating any hotlinks - otherwise an update may cause unnecessary attributes to be generated It is recommended that you do not change Building Material names in files that are to be used as or with hotlinks, until all of the participating files have been migrated. Such name changes should be made before the hotlinks are updated If you do change Building Material names, make sure you do so consistently in all linked files In some instances, you may not want to migrate hotlinks to ArchiCAD 17 (perhaps they are still being used in older-version ArchiCAD version files). Due to automatic attribute generation and naming, again: it is recommended that you do not rename the Building Materials generated from these hotlinked files in the ArchiCAD 17 host. If you do rename them, this will cause new attributes to be generated the next time these older-version hotlink files are updated in the host.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

113

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Changed Intersection Function


Improved Intersections in ArchiCAD 17
A greatly improved Intersection method allows the intersection priority within the Building Material to work among all construction elements - including single-skin, Composite and Profiled elements. Benefits of the improved Intersections: Colliding elements, such as Walls and Slabs in Section and 3D, will automatically clean up based on skin priority from the Building Material Changing Partial Structure Display will correctly display Surfaces from the Building Material Using Marquee and 3D Cutting Planes can display the correct cut skins of Composites and Profiles

Migration Default: Your Intersections Are Preserved in Legacy Mode


If you migrate an older-version project to ArchiCAD 17, the Legacy Mode for element intersections is turned on by default to maintain the appearance of your model. This means that you will not see any changes in your element intersections. Note: When you create a new file from the template, this legacy checkbox is off by default and the new intersections method is enabled.

How to Keep Old Intersections: Legacy Mode for Migrated Files (Default)
After you migrate a project to ArchiCAD 17 and optimize the attributes, the project will still be using the legacy intersection method by default to maintain intersections as per ArchiCAD 16 and before. In Legacy Mode, the new Intersections logic in ArchiCAD 17 will not take effect in 3D. Intersection methods from ArchiCAD 16 and earlier versions will be used. You may prefer this when working on an older project, to ensure that your existing intersections remain intact.

114

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Legacy Mode is controlled in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.

Note that in Legacy Mode: the Building Material attribute is available, but the new priority-based connections will not take effect in 3D (except for Walls, where they will work as in ArchiCAD 16 and earlier versions) the Surfaces assigned to Building Materials are not displayed. Only element-level surfaces can be shown. For specifics on how this checkbox affects intersections of the different construction elements in Legacy Mode, click the Info button in the dialog box.

How to Enable New Intersections in ArchiCAD 17 (Turn off Legacy Mode)


The new Intersection method introduced in ArchiCAD 17 can be enabled by turning off the legacy intersection method found under Project Preferences > Construction Elements. After this legacy checkbox is turned off, your models intersections may appear different. It is advised to review the model, make necessary amendments to the model geometry and also check for previous workarounds that may no longer be necessary (for example 2D patching or SEO). Existing intersections that do not involve geometric element collision will not clean up automatically. If you want automatic intersections to take effect for these, a number of new

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

115

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

features in ArchiCAD 17 assist you in achieving collisions, thereby allowing the automatic intersection logic to take effect. See Tips for Better Intersections in Migrated Projects. Any newly placed elements whose collisions are modeled using the new modeling methods will clean up as expected for ArchiCAD 17.

Tips for Better Intersections in Migrated Projects


If you have migrated your project to ArchiCAD 17 and wish to use the new Intersections logic on your older-version model, see the following section for techniques and features to optimize your model intersections. See How to Make Sure Elements Collide for Best Cleanup Results. For more information, see also Element Intersections.

116

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Back-Saving from ArchiCAD 17 to ArchiCAD 16


Building Materials
When saving from ArchiCAD 17 back to ArchiCAD 16, Building Materials will be converted back to Cut Fills along with their Physical (Thermal) Properties. Other settings and changes to consider include: Surfaces on Basic and Composite Elements will be lost from the Building Material, and instead use the Element based settings (same result as when using legacy intersection method in AC17) Surfaces on Profiles will lose the Extrusion override Junction Order will be used as Element Priority where possibly Intersection Priority will convert the 999 positions into 16 (by an approximately equal division) Junctions will revert to ArchiCAD 16 intersection method (same result as when using legacy intersection method in AC17) Slab reference planes will revert to their tops, but the intersection geometry will remain intact. Wall reference line will remain in place, but will use an offset from the outside face (previously called reference line side)

Associative Dimensioning of Internal Core Structures in Section


Core component-based associative dimensions in section view (new in ArchiCAD 17) will revert to static dimensions when the project is back-saved to ArchiCAD 16.

Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab


All Slab reference planes will revert to Slab Top; physical model will not change.

Wall Reference Lines


Walls from ArchiCAD 17 projects that are back-saved to version 16 will have their reference lines redefined as follow (physical model will not change) AC17 Flip off Outside Face, Inside Face, Core Outside, Core Inside, Core center = AC16 Right with appropriate offset AC17 Flip on Outside Face, Inside Face, Core Outside, Core Inside, Core center = AC16 Left with appropriate offset AC17 Flip off Center = AC16 Center AC17 Flip on Center = AC16 Center + Mirror in place

Link to Story
Toplinked elements (Walls, Columns, Zones) will be redefined as Not Linked, fixed height elements in ArchiCAD 16. Their height value will correspond to their current height in ArchiCAD 17.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

117

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Curved Beam
Curved Beams (new in ArchiCAD 17) will be deleted from the project when saved to ArchiCAD 16.

Door/Window Reveal
All Doors and Windows in projects back-saved to ArchiCAD 17 will have their reveals anchored to the wall face. The Door/Window geometry position will not change.

118

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating Labels
When you open an older-version ArchiCAD project in ArchiCAD 17, all labels from the old version will be retained as-is, in appearance and function. The label options in ArchiCAD 17 have been streamlined, with some new functionality: to take advantage of this, you must replace your old labels with the new ones in ArchiCAD 17.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

119

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Link to Story
As of ArchiCAD 17, Walls, Zones and Columns can be toplinked to a particular story in the project. This means their height can vary as story heights change. Alternatively, they can be set as Not linked, so their height is fixed. Walls, Zones and Columns migrated to ArchiCAD 17 from earlier-version projects will all be Not linked.

120

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Reveal Depth
A new option in ArchiCAD 17 allows you to anchor a Door or Window reveal depth to the wall core (instead of the wall face). Doors and Windows migrated to ArchiCAD 17 from earlier-version projects will all be anchored to the wall face by default.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

121

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Core-Based Wall Reference Line


To support more consistent element positioning and intersection logic, Wall Reference Line options have been renamed and expanded for ArchiCAD 17. Instead of Left, Right and Center, they are known as Outside Face, Center and Inside Face. (New core-based reference line options are also available in ArchiCAD 17; these include Core Outside/Center/Inside). The flip status means that a selected Wall is flipped (or mirrored) along its reference line. The reference line stays in place, but the body of the Wall flips to the other side. When you migrate to ArchiCAD 17, Wall Reference lines will be redefined as follows: AC16 Left = AC17 Flip on + Outside Face AC16 Left + Positive Offset = AC17 Flip on + Outside Face + Positive Offset AC16 Center = AC17 Flip off + Center AC16 Center mirrored = AC17 Flip on + Center AC16 Right = AC17 Flip off + Outside Face AC16 Right + Positive Offset = AC17 Flip off + Outside Face + Positive Offset

122

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Core-Based Reference Plane for Slab


A new option in ArchiCAD 17 allows you to define a Slab core (top or bottom) as its reference plane, or the Slab top or bottom. Reference planes of Slabs migrated to ArchiCAD 17 from earlier-version projects will all have a Reference plane at the top of the Slab by default.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

123

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating EcoDesigner or Energy Evaluation Data


Migrating From Energy Evaluation for ArchiCAD 16
All of the data are retained accurately in Energy Evaluation for ArchiCAD 17.

Migrating Data from EcoDesigner Add-On


If you used the EcoDesigner add-on with an older-version ArchiCAD project (ArchiCAD 15), some EcoDesigner-specific settings were saved with that project. If you open that project in ArchiCAD 17 and start the Energy Evaluation function, you will find that some of your settings are retained, if the same options are also available in Energy Evaluation: Climate and Location settings are replicated in Energy Evaluation Data from EcoDesigners MEP Systems and Energy and Green Energy tab pages are retained as-is in Energy Evaluation. Thermal properties, defined in EcoDesigner in the old Model Review palette, are retained in Energy Evaluation (available in the Physical Properties panel of the Building Materials dialog box) EcoDesigners factory-default Activities profiles are interpreted in Energy Evaluation as Operation Profile attributes (user-defined Activities profiles are not converted into Operation Profiles)

Zone-Based Model Analysis in Energy Evaluation


Energy Evaluations model analysis, based on zones and the creation of differentiated space boundaries, is fundamentally different from EcoDesigner, which was element-based. Consequently, your results in Energy Evaluation will likely be different (and more accurate) than when using EcoDesigner, depending on how you modeled the building. Important: When migrating a project to ArchiCAD 17, the correct Energy Evaluation result depends on the accurate use of zones throughout the model. Review and correct your zones as necessary.

124

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating Roofs and Skylights


Roofs
Single-plane Roofs All Roofs, including dome and vaulted Roofs, will be turned into a set of Single-plane Roofs in ArchiCAD 17. In outward appearance, your Roofs will not change. Display Preference for Single-plane Roof/Skylight By default, all newly placed Roofs and Skylights in ArchiCAD 17 will be displayed on the Floor Plan showing all visible contours, as if projected from a 3D view (True 3D Projection). If you prefer to display Single-plane Roofs (and any Skylights they contain) in ArchiCAD 17 as they were in ArchiCAD 14 and earlier - that is, their top surface only (Symbolic) - you can switch this as a Project Preference: go to Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Under Legacy Options, choose Use Symbolic Display in Floor Plan for Single-plane Roofs and their Skylights, as your preferred display mode. Click the Info button at right for an illustration of the difference in displays.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

125

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Skylights
Skylights Placed using the Skylight Tool If you migrate an older-version project containing Skylights placed with the Skylight tool, they will be automatically converted into ArchiCAD 17 Skylights, with all their parameters preserved, and capable of all Skylight functionality that is available in ArchiCAD 17. However, their display on the Floor Plan will, by default, remain symbolic, as it was in the earlier project version. In outward appearance, your Skylights will not change, and their Floor Plan display parameters will be retained, although these are not available for Skylights in ArchiCAD 17. Skylights Placed using the Object Tool Skylights that were placed using the Object tool will remain objects, and will lack the full functionality of ArchiCAD 17 Skylights.

126

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17


The new version of ArchiCAD will work perfectly well with any older-version ArchiCAD libraries. However, if you stay with your older libraries, you will not get the full benefit of library improvements and fixes in ArchiCAD 17. We recommend that when you migrate a project to ArchiCAD 17, you also switch to the ArchiCAD 17 Library. The best way to do this is to go to Library Manager and add the ArchiCAD 17 Library; then use the Consolidate function described in the next section. Note: The consolidation process and Migration Libraries are available only for migrated projects that use ArchiCAD Libraries 10 and later.

Migrate to ArchiCAD 17 Library Automatically: Consolidate Libraries


Any time you add an additional ArchiCAD library to a project that already has one, ArchiCAD will recognize the presence of older-version ArchiCAD libraries (versions 10 and later). In this case, the yellow Consolidate button appears in Library Manager. Note: The Consolidate button appears in Library Manager any time that at least one outdated ArchiCAD Library - that is, a Library which is not the latest one - has been added to the project.

Consolidating ArchiCAD libraries is recommended, because it replaces the old ArchiCAD libraries with the latest library, but also loads the requisite Migration Libraries so that you still have access any now-obsolete library parts you may be using. Migration Libraries are much smaller than the full ArchiCAD libraries, so this consolidation process will save your project from a great many superfluous objects. The automatic consolidation process will load the new ArchiCAD library load all the relevant migration libraries you need. (These migration libraries will have already been installed on your computer, as part of ArchiCAD installation.)
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

127

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

remove ArchiCAD libraries with lower version numbers automatically replace placed objects from the older libraries (versions 13-16) with their latest compatible version in the ArchiCAD 17 library For example, if you are migrating an ArchiCAD 10 project to ArchiCAD 17, issuing the Consolidate command will automatically locate and load the Migration Libraries 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15and 16. Note: If you want to use your ArchiCAD Libraries from the BIM Server (rather than as linked libraries), ArchiCAD will not be able to locate the migration libraries automatically. In this case, you must upload the migration libraries from your hard drive to the BIM Server. The ArchiCAD Library migration is now complete.

Migrating Libraries in a Teamwork Project


To migrate a Teamwork project, use the Migrate Project process described here: Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17. During this process, make sure that the Migrate ArchiCAD Libraries checkbox is checked. This will ensure smooth migration of your ArchiCAD Libraries together with the Teamwork project. Note, however, that some objects in your migrated Teamwork project may be listed as Temporarily Missing in the Library Manager or in the Library Loading Report. As soon as other users do a Send and Receive, this problem will be solved automatically.

What is a Migration Library?


Each new version of the ArchiCAD Library contains many objects that have been updated since the previous version. For the most part, these updated objects are compatible with placed older versions of the same object, and will automatically replace the older versions. Some objects from older ArchiCAD libraries, however, have no counterpart in the new ArchiCAD 17 library (typically, these are discontinued objects deemed obsolete). But if your project uses such objects, you want them available even if after migrating to ArchiCAD 17. ArchiCAD Migration Libraries (generally available for versions 10 and up) serve this purpose: they contain only those objects from an earlier-version ArchiCAD Library that do not have counterparts in the latest-version ArchiCAD Library. A Migration Library is much smaller than full-version ArchiCAD Library. If you do not use the Migration Library, then some of your placed objects from older-version projects may not have a compatible corresponding object in ArchiCAD 17. In this case: those incompatible older objects will be Missing Objects in ArchiCAD 17 if you have removed your old libraries. In this case, you must replace these missing objects with new ones from the ArchiCAD 17 library, and reset their parameters as needed. Keeping your old libraries alongside your new libraries is not recommended, because a great many of the loaded objects will be duplicates and/or superfluous, and increase library loading time. The recommended solution, if you have placed objects from multiple ArchiCAD libraries and have loaded all the libraries, is to Consolidate your libraries. See Migrate to ArchiCAD 17 Library Automatically: Consolidate Libraries. 128
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Where to Find Migration Libraries


Migration libraries (generally available for ArchiCAD versions 10 and up) are installed on your machine when you install ArchiCAD 17. If you want to use your ArchiCAD libraries as Linked Libraries, then the automatic migration process and the Consolidate Libraries functions described above will locate and load the necessary migration libraries automatically; you do not need to find them. If your ArchiCAD Libraries are BIM Server Libraries (for example, for a Teamwork project) and you want to consolidate them, ArchiCAD will not be able to locate the migration libraries automatically. In this case, you must upload the migration libraries from your hard drive to the BIM Server. In this case, you should use the migration library corresponding to the version of the migrated project, plus every other available migration library upwards. For example, if you are migrating an ArchiCAD 10 project to ArchiCAD 17, you should use Migration Libraries 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16. You can also download Migration Libraries from the GRAPHISOFT website. Note: Available migration libraries may vary, depending on your localized version.

Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier


Note the additional Library-related changes when migrating projects from ArchiCAD 12 and earlier: Active Libraries - Linked Libraries The active libraries of older-version projects will be loaded in ArchiCAD 17 as linked libraries. (They will be listed in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager.) Other Objects - Embedded Objects Other Objects items in the older ArchiCAD projects will appear in the Embedded Objects folder of ArchiCAD 17. Other Objects in Hotlinked Modules If you place a hotlinked module from ArchiCAD 12, any objects placed from the source files Other Objects folder will be missing in ArchiCAD 17. The solution is to embed these objects in your host ArchiCAD 17 project, using Library Manager, or to place those objects in a library on the BIM Server, and add that library to the project. Missing Libraries - Unavailable Libraries Any library missing in the Library Manager of the older version will be listed as unavailable in the Library Manager of ArchiCAD 17. Locate these libraries and add them as linked libraries, using the Library Managers Add command. Missing Objects Missing objects in the older-version project are also listed as missing in ArchiCAD 17, both in the Library Manager as well as the Library Loading Report. To solve the problem, locate the source files of these missing objects and add them to the project, using Library Manager.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

129

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Changed Renovation Features


The Renovation feature (available since ArchiCAD 15) enables you to set a Renovation Status for each element, plus project-level Renovation Filters that show or hide elements by status.

Migrating Older-Version Renovation Projects


Older versions of ArchiCAD (pre-15) did not include a Renovation feature as such. If your olderversion project used a layer system to differentiate elements in the renovation process, but you want to use the Renovation function in ArchiCAD 17 instead, you should: 1. Make needed changes to the model: e.g. eliminate the unnecessary, renovation-specific layers and model duplicates 2. Use the new ArchiCAD Renovation feature to define the Renovation Status for each element as needed Note: When you first open a project ArchiCAD 17, all elements Renovation Statuses are set to existing by default, and the default Renovation Filter is set so that all existing elements are shown. Thus, even if you do not use any of the Renovation functions in ArchiCAD 17, all your elements will behave and be displayed as usual.

Changed Demolition Options for Door/Window Objects (GERMAN or NORWEGIAN library only) (ArchiCAD 14 or Earlier)
Your project from ArchiCAD 14 or earlier may use Door/Window objects that you flagged for demolition. (For example, doors/windows to be demolished are marked on the Floor Plan with an X, or are otherwise distinguished.) However, since ArchiCAD 17 provides dedicated options for displaying all elements by their Renovation status, these demolition options in Door/Window Settings are no longer necessary in the AC 17 Library and have been eliminated. After migrating your project to ArchiCAD 17, you should use the Renovation feature to select and assign a To Be Demolished Renovation status to the doors/windows in question. Note that you can then choose to display your To Be Demolished elements the same way as in earlier ArchiCAD, by choosing the Override Styles that correspond to your local standards.

130

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported


VR Scenes and VR Objects are not supported as of ArchiCAD 15. Any VR Scenes and VR Objects in earlier-version projects will disappear when you migrate these projects to ArchiCAD 17.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

131

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats


Image file formats created with QuickTime are being phased out, to ensure long-term compatibility for image files on both Windows and MacOS. ArchiCAD 17 will still read all Quick Time formats, but later versions may not. The image formats to be supported are: JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and BMP. You can save image files only to these formats. If you migrate an older-format ArchiCAD project that contains figures or drawings in a different file format than these: 1. Figures and embedded drawings: converted automatically. Any images placed with the Figure tool and any embedded drawings that are in QuickTime based formats are converted automatically into a supported image file format (e.g. png); no action is needed. 2. Linked Drawings: you can convert and re-link them. Any linked drawings that are in QuickTime based formats are still supported in ArchiCAD 17. However, to avoid problems in future versions of ArchiCAD, you can convert these images to other file formats. If you have such linked drawings in your migrated project, a warning appears when you open the project in ArchiCAD 17. You can manually convert these linked drawings into a supported image file format. To do this, go to Drawing Manager: these drawings icons are shown in red. It is recommended to convert these images to a supported file format (e.g. PNG or JPG), then re-link them.

Note: If you do not convert your linked QuickTime-format drawings, they will still work in ArchiCAD 17. However, if you should open the project in a later version of ArchiCAD, those image files will not be read. 132
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Recommendation
It is recommended to convert your QuickTime-format drawings to either PNG or JPG format. If you convert a drawing to PNG format, you will not lose any data from the drawing. If you convert a drawing to JPG, you will lose some data during the file compression process, but the file size will be smaller.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

133

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf)


You can export many types of customized project data from ArchiCAD in XML or other special file formats, and then re-use these data in other projects. These exportable data types include: Project Info Model View Options Combination Interactive Schedule (Scheme Settings) Project Index (Index Settings) Work Environment (Profile, Schemes) Attributes (.aat) Favorites (.prf) Find and Select Criteria Set (can be imported from ArchiCAD 13 or 14 only) DWG/DXF Translator In ArchiCAD 17, you can use these customized project data files even if they were created in an older-version project. To ensure that the project data is transferred smoothly, it is recommended that you open the older file (e.g. the ArchiCAD 13 project) in ArchiCAD 17, and save its project data using ArchiCAD 17. Then import those data files to the ArchiCAD 17 project you are working on. For example, if you have named and stored custom Find & Select Criteria Sets in an ArchiCAD 13 project and want to re-use them in an ArchiCAD 17 project, you should: 1. Open the AC 13 project in ArchiCAD 17. 2. Save the customized Criteria Sets to a file (Use the Export command from the pop-up in the Find & Select dialog box). 3. Open the ArchiCAD 17 project you want to work on. 4. Import the newly saved Criteria Sets (Use the Import command from the pop-up in the Find & Select dialog box).

134

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating the BIM Server


Migrating the BIM Server: Version 13-16 to Version 17
Note: If you are migrating BIM Server 13: You must run the latest available hotfix for BIM Server 13 before you begin the migration process. On the server machine that contains BIM Server 13-16 begin the installation of BIM Server version 17. The installer will recognize the presence of a previous BIM Server, and will upgrade your server to version 17. Once the installation process is complete, you will be running BIM Server version 17, which encompasses Module 17 and any modules installed earlier (e.g. Module 13, 14, 15 and/or 16). See also Modular BIM Server. In essence, this means that your BIM Server can now run Teamwork projects in ArchiCAD 17, as well as your old Teamwork Projects in ArchiCAD 13-16. The Users, Roles, Custom Properties and Library databases of all installed server modules are handled uniformly and are always in sync. No other server migration steps are necessary.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

135

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

The BIM Server Control Center lists all the installed modules on the server. Click on the info button to see additional data on each module. This information is view-only.

136

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13, 14, 15 or 16) to ArchiCAD 17


To migrate a Teamwork Project from ArchiCAD 13, 14, 15 or 16 (henceforth 13-16 in this document) to ArchiCAD 17, you will need: 1. Both ArchiCAD 13-16 and ArchiCAD 17 installed on your client machine. 2. Access to BIM Server version 13-16 and BIM Server version 17. This can take one of two forms: Either You have a BIM Server version 17 that also includes BIM Server version 13-16 as module(s). See Migrating the BIM Server. This setup - migrating the project from one server module to another - is the simplest way to migrate. Or You have BIM Server 13-16 on one machine and BIM Server 17 on another machine. This setup - migrating the project from one server machine to another - is the more labor-intensive method.

Important
Keep in mind that if you link a hotlinked module or a drawing from a Teamwork project, that source Teamwork project must have the same version number as the host project. This means that if you migrate a project (either solo or Teamwork) from ArchiCAD 13-16 to ArchiCAD 17, any Teamwork files that are linked to it (via hotlinked modules or drawings) must also be migrated.

Topics in this section: Migrate Project from one Server Module to Another Migrate Project from one Server Machine to Another Migrate Project from one Server Module to Another
In this scenario, you have a single BIM Server that has modules 13-16 and 17 installed. This migration process entails two phases: Prepare Project for Migration (you do this in ArchiCAD 13-16); and Migrate Prepared Project (you do this in ArchiCAD 17). Prepare Project for Migration 1. Start ArchiCAD 13-16. 2. Open your ArchiCAD 13-16 Teamwork project. 3. Make sure that all other users send in their changes and leave the project. (If they do not, they will lose any unsent changes.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

137

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

4. Issue the Prepare for Migration command at Teamwork > Project > Migrate Project > Prepare for Migration.

5. The Migrate Project dialog appears. Click Prepare.

6. The project is prepared for migration. 7. You now have two choices: If you do not want to prepare any more projects now, choose Finish Preparation from the next dialog box, then Close.

138

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

To migrate another project, choose Open and Prepare another Project. This is the recommended choice if you have several Teamwork projects to migrate. This way, you prepare all of them in ArchiCAD 13-16 before changing to ArchiCAD 17 and completing their migration there, instead of switching back and forth between ArchiCADs for each project.

8. Once you have prepared all the projects you need, move on to the next phase: Migrate Prepared Project 1. Start ArchiCAD 17. 2. Choose Teamwork > Project > Migrate Project > Migrate Prepared Projects.

3. The dialog box lists all the prepared projects: select one to migrate it. If the listed project is shown in grey, it means you cannot complete that projects migration now - for example, because the server is offline. If you have not prepared any projects, you are prompted to do so.

Optionally, check the Migrate ArchiCAD Libraries box: this will replace the projects currently used ArchiCAD libraries with ArchiCAD Library 17, plus the necessary migration libraries. (These libraries will be uploaded to the BIM Server if they are not there already.) If you do not check this box, you will continue using the migrated project with its current ArchiCAD libraries. 4. Click Migrate.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

139

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

5. The project content will be uploaded to the BIM Server. Users and their roles on this project will be unchanged. Note: The Project Log, Comments, messages and any reservations will be deleted during project migration. 6. Now that the original project is migrated, you can manually delete it from the old BIM Server module. 7. At this point, you can continue in one of three ways: Migrate another project Join the migrated project Leave the migration process 8. If the migrated project contains any hotlinked modules or drawings linked from AC 13-16 Teamwork projects, you must also migrate each of those Teamwork projects from ArchiCAD 13-16 to ArchiCAD 17, following the steps above. If those hotlink/drawing source projects were on the same BIM Server as the migrated host project, then the host project will automatically locate and link the source projects, once they are all migrated. If those hotlink/drawing source projects were on a different BIM Server than the migrated host project, you must re-link the hotlinked modules and drawings manually, once the source projects are all migrated.

Migrate Project from one Server Machine to Another


In this scenario, you have BIM Server 13-16 running on one server, and BIM Server 17 on another server. 1. Open your ArchiCAD 13-16 Teamwork project. 2. Make sure that all other users send in their changes and leave the project. (If they do not, they will lose any unsent changes.) Just in case, it is advisable to lock the project on the server to prevent other users from modifying it. 3. Save the project as a solo (.pln) ArchiCAD 13-16 project. 4. Start ArchiCAD 17. 5. Open the.pln file and share it as an ArchiCAD 17 Teamwork project to BIM Server 17. 6. You must also migrate any ArchiCAD 13-16 Teamwork projects that are the source projects for hotlinked modules or drawings in the migrated project. Each of these source projects must be saved as.pln in ArchiCAD 13-16, then opened in ArchiCAD 17 and shared to the BIM Server 17. 7. All hotlinks and drawings linked to Teamwork source projects must be re-linked manually, once those source projects are all migrated. 8. Once the original projects are all migrated, they can be manually deleted from the old BIM Server.

140

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Minimal Space Extended to Doors


If your ArchiCAD 13 project used the Model View Option to Show Minimal Space for furnishings, then the same project in ArchiCAD 17 will also show the Minimal Space parameter for all your doors (provided that you have loaded the ArchiCAD 17 Library). This is because the Model View Option (Document > Set Model View) is now extended to doors too:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

141

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

No Automatic Home Story Settings


There is no Automatic Home Story setting in ArchiCAD 17. Elements from older projects (older than AC13) whose Home Story was set to Automatic will now be assigned Home Stories that correspond to the story they were placed on. In ArchiCAD 17, during editing operations that affect the elements elevation (e.g. elevate, multiply with vertical displacement), you have the option to automatically re-assign those elements home stories accordingly.

142

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule


Interactive Schedule criteria from earlier versions (pre-15) may create unexpected results in ArchiCAD 17 if you are listing Object-type elements: The Object value in earlier versions listed objects from all Object subtypes. The Object value in ArchiCAD 17 lists only those objects that are placed using the Object tool. All other object subtypes are listed only if you add those subtypes as separate Element Type criteria.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

143

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 17


1. Open the Teamwork project in its original, older-version ArchiCAD. 2. After all changes have been sent, all users should sign out (except the Administrator). Then save the .plp file. 3. In ArchiCAD 17, go to File > Open > Open. 4. In the appearing file directory dialog box, select the .plp file you saved in Step 2. Click Open. 5. Share the project to a BIM Server. (Teamwork > Share). As part of the Share process: Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 17. You should upload the Linked Libraries to the BIM Server. See Upload a Library to BIM Server. Important: All users and workspaces will be lost! Users and roles must be created and assigned for this project on the BIM Server, using the GRAPHISOFT BIM Server Manager. If the older Teamwork project contained Hotlinks and Drawings referring to external content, these will function without any problems in ArchiCAD 17. However, if the older Teamwork project was created in ArchiCAD 11 or earlier, these Hotlinks and linked Drawings cannot be updated from their original sources. In this case, follow the migration procedure described here: Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks. If the older Teamwork project is the source project of Hotlinks and Drawings placed into other projects, then those links will be broken when the older Teamwork project is opened in ArchiCAD 17. Thus, these hotlinks and drawings must be relinked manually to the host project. (In the host projects, use the relink commands in the Hotlink Manager and Drawing Manager.)

144

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Lost Criteria Sets


Find & Select criteria sets from earlier (pre-13) versions will be lost when you open the olderversion projects in ArchiCAD 17.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

145

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks


Note: This process is applicable when migrating older-version projects (11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 17. When you open a project in ArchiCAD 17 which contains hotlinks to source files saved in versions 11 or earlier, you will see the following warning:

146

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Open Hotlink Manager to View Hierarchy of Projects Hotlink Sources


To get a list of all the files that are hotlinked to the current project, open the project in ArchiCAD 17. Go to Hotlink Manager (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager). The Hotlinked Modules list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules hotlinked into the current project. The Hotlink Sources list displays the sources of the hotlinked module files together with their status.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

147

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

For a more comprehensive and printable display of the hotlinked source files, click the Show hierarchy in browser button. This will open your default internet browser in a separate window, showing the hotlinked source files in a hierarchical format, together with file locations that are hyperlinked.

Conversion of a project with Hotlink Source files available in their original location
In this workflow, you will open the hotlinked source files one by one and save them in ArchiCAD 17. Suppose you have the following hotlinks linked into Project A:

1. Open the project (A.pln) 2. In the warning dialog which appears, choose the Open Hotlink Manager option.

148

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

3. The Hotlink Manager contains a list of Source files.

4. For each Source file shown as Legacy or Missing - B.pln, C.pln and D.pln in our example you must open the file in ArchiCAD 17, using the Open in Separate ArchiCAD button. Then save the opened file (File > Save.) We recommend that you save the files in this order: go through the hierarchy file by file from bottom to top in the hierarchy. (In our example, start with D.pln.) Note: It is possible that the opened source files contain other hotlinks that are not used in A.pln. (for example, if the module is placed on a story that is not shown in A.pln, or if B.pln contains nested modules, yet the Hotlink Manager for A.pln has checked the Skip Nested Modules box). If these nested modules are in legacy format, ArchiCAD will display a warning when they are opened. In this case, you should continue the conversion process, treating B.pln as a separate project that contains legacy hotlinks: you must save those hotlink sources in ArchiCAD 17 as described in this document - by resaving the files, locating missing sources, resaving nested legacy source files, etc. 5. In the Hotlink Manager, click the Refresh Status button. If you have successfully re-saved all the Legacy files from the Source list (as described in Step 4), then the Source list should not show any files in Legacy status.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

149

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

6. Click Update.

150

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display


Beginning with ArchiCAD 12, Door/Window objects have been reprogrammed to display correctly in light of the partial structure display feature. Doors and Windows migrated from older-version projects (version 11 and earlier) into ArchiCAD 17 will not be displayed properly if you use Partial Structure Display. These Door/ Window objects are incompatible for the purposes of Partial Structure Display. To address the issue of incompatible library parts, see Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

151

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display


For both Section and Elevation Markers, the Marker appearance is set in the Tool Settings Dialog Box for each individual Section and Elevation. (Place Marker at either or both ends of the S/E line, or place one Marker in the middle.) The Section/Elevation Marker display option is no longer a Model View Option, so a given S/E Markers appearance will be uniform throughout the project, regardless of which view it is saved in. When migrating an older-version file in which you used any Section/Elevation Marker Model View Option other than As in Settings, you should adjust individual Markers as needed.

152

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills


When saving an ArchiCAD 17 file to AutoCAD-compatible format, the results may vary from earlier version conversions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier). You should check these converted files and make any changes necessary. Possible Differences in Fill Conversion within ArchiCAD 17: When converting ArchiCAD fills, an option in the DXF/DWG Translator enables you to manually set up a custom Fill Conversion table. Also, Fill types in ArchiCAD 17 are converted by default as follows: - Image: converted to a solid fill (technically a background-color hatch) - Gradient: converted to a solid fill (technically a foreground-color hatch) - Symbol: if you chose Export all fills as Solid, symbol fills are converted into Blocks. If you chose Export Fill Backgrounds as Additional Solid Hatches, they are converted into Blocks plus a Background-color Solid fill.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

153

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

IFC Data
IFC data in ArchiCAD projects in versions 8.1 through 11 will be lost when you migrate the projects to ArchiCAD 17.

154

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Review New Model View Options for Fills


The Model View Options panel, formerly called Options for Fills and Zones, is now called Override Fill Display. As in earlier versions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier), this panel is used to globally define the Fill Backgrounds, the display of Cut, Cover, and Drafting Fills, and the display of Zone Fills in the project. The various options have changed somewhat, but when you migrate an older-version file to ArchiCAD 17, the program will assign corresponding Model View Options to ensure that fills are displayed correctly in ArchiCAD 17. However, you should double-check the fill display in ArchiCAD 17 and make any adjustments necessary.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

155

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 17


This chapter contains detailed information about how to migrate your ArchiCAD 8.1 or ArchiCAD 9 project files and PlotMaker 8.1 or PlotMaker 9 Layout Books into ArchiCAD 17. Note: In this description, version 9 should be understood as either version 8.1 or version 9. In version 9, the Project Model is always located in a PLN file, and the layouts in an LBK (Layout Book) file. ArchiCAD 17 (and every ArchiCAD version from 10 up) contains both Model Views and Layouts in an integrated environment in a single file. Since ArchiCAD 17 Projects can be divided among multiple ArchiCAD PLN files, there are two basic ways to migrate your ArchiCAD 9 Projects and PlotMaker 9 Layout Books to ArchiCAD 17: 1. Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 17: The ArchiCAD 9 Project file should be placed into its own Project File in ArchiCAD 17 (this file would contain only Model Views, plus the default Layout Book), and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book should be placed into a second, separate Project File in ArchiCAD 17 (this file would contain all Layouts with no Model information). 2. Create a Single File in ArchiCAD 17: If the Project is small enough, both the ArchiCAD 9 Project File (PLN) and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book (LBK) can be merged into a single file in ArchiCAD 17. The following sections outline how to carry out both options.

Option 1: Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 17


1. To migrate the ArchiCAD 9 Project File, simply open the PLN file in ArchiCAD 17 and save it. Although there are several settings which can affect how elements are displayed on the Floor Plan, these are all automatically set during the conversion so that the same look is preserved in ArchiCAD as far as possible. Because of new settings in ArchiCAD 17, it is possible that some elements will look slightly different than they did in ArchiCAD 9. For detailed information, see Converting Model Views to AC17: Floor Plan Display Issues for a detailed list.

156

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

2. To migrate the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book, use the File > Open command. In the Dialog, select PlotMaker Layout Book (*.lbk) as File Type and select the desired LBK file. Click the Open button to start opening it.

3. Since Title Types of PlotMaker 9 have become GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 17, the program will convert all Title Types defined in the Layout Book File into Library Objects (GSM Files). ArchiCAD will place these created Library Parts into its Embedded Library; they will be listed in the Library Manager. Please note that these generated Title Types have become non-parametric GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 17, displaying the same information as the source Title Type in PlotMaker 9. However, if you used default Title Types in PlotMaker 9, you will find the counterparts of these in the ArchiCAD 17 Library and you may change the generated Title Types into parametric ones shipped with ArchiCAD 17.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

157

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

4. When ArchiCAD is finished converting the Layout Book data, an Information Dialog will alert you to data that could not be converted because of essential differences between the features of ArchiCAD 17 and PlotMaker 9. For more detailed information, press Show Detailed Report in Browser to launch your default web browser containing a fuller explanation of what could not be converted and why, plus what you can do about it.

For example, in PlotMaker 9, you could define custom line weights for each individual drawing element (e.g. Lines, Fills, etc.). In ArchiCAD 17, you can define line weights only for Pens, and all elements using a certain Pen will be drawn using the line weight defined for that Pen. Because of this difference, specific line weights defined in PlotMaker 9 will be converted back to their line weights as specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog of ArchiCAD 17. Please see Conversion Warnings for a detailed list of conversion warnings. 5. Now your new ArchiCAD 17 Documentation Project File (a file containing only Layout Book information) is ready for use. One Story will be created as default, but no model data will exist in any Model Views. All Layouts will be displayed in the Navigators Layout Book.

Option 2: Create Single File in ArchiCAD 17


Use this option for relatively small projects, to merge both the Layout Book from PlotMaker and Project File from ArchiCAD 9 into a single project file in ArchiCAD 17. When creating a single PLN file in ArchiCAD 17, you will merge Layout Data into a Project File. In ArchiCAD 17, every Project File must contain both Model Views and a Layout Book as default. This means that the PLN file into which Layout Book data is merged will already contain one or more Layouts, with their own attributes and settings. For this reason, the procedure follows the usual rules of merging, which means that if a particular setting already exists in the receiving 158
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

file, existing data are used, and are not overwritten by merged data. Therefore, when merging Layout Book data into a PLN file, the following settings of the Layout Book are not merged: Book settings Project Info Grid settings Default Master Layout setting Also, Layout-specific settings in the Work Environment of ArchiCAD 17 will not be modified by data of the imported Layout Book. The program will compare the names of the Attributes and Master Layouts of the merged file and the host ArchiCAD 17 file. Please note that the program compares only the names (but not content or definition) when checking for matching Attributes/Master Layouts. If the Attribute or Master Layout names in both files are identical, they will be considered identical by the program, and the existing files in ArchiCAD 17, along with their settings, will be kept. The structure of the merged Layout Book (its Layouts, Subsets, Master Layouts and placed Drawings) is inserted into the existing Layout Book structure of the ArchiCAD 17 PLN file.

Follow these steps:


1. Open the PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 17 and save it as an AC 17 PLN file. 2. Open the ArchiCAD 9 PLN file in ArchiCAD 17 and save it as another AC 17 PLN file. You now have two new ArchiCAD 17 files; these two must now be merged. 3. In the latter active Project File (the one containing model data), use the File > File Special > Merge command to merge data from the other saved ArchiCAD 17 file (the one containing Layout Book data). In the appearing dialog box, choose Layout Book to merge Layout Book data of the file into your active Project File. Click the Merge button.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

159

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

If you open the Organizer from the Navigator, you will see that all Layout Book data has now been merged into the Project File.

Note: You should follow the route specified in this guide, that is, merge the PLN File containing Layout Book data into the PLN File containing Model data, and not the other way around. This is because of the rules of merging, and because Views and certain other data would not come through if you merged the Model data into the file containing Layout Book data. In case you do not wish to merge the Layout Book in its entirety, only some of its Layouts, do the following: 1. Open the ArchiCAD 17 PLN File containing the Model data. 2. Open the ArchiCAD 17 PLN File containing the Layout Book data.

160

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

3. In the PLN file containing Model data, open the Organizer in such a way that you see the Layout Book of both files. In the illustration below, the PLN File containing the Model data is on the right.

4. Using drag-and-drop, move the desired Layouts from the Layout Book PLN file (on the left) into the Model PLN file (on the right). If you have Drawings placed into the Layout Book PLN which point to the Model PLN as their source, then the Drawing references will automatically switch from external file references to internal references after the Layouts are merged. Note: Such drawing links will not be redefined as internal references if the name of the source project file has changed since the drawings were placed. In this case, you should select all such drawings in the Drawing Manager and use the Link To button to re-link these Drawings to their source PLN (the renamed project file).

Conversion Warnings
When you migrate a PlotMaker 9 Layout Book file, ArchiCAD 17 may warn you of some project elements that will not be reproduced in ArchiCAD 17, due to changed feature sets. The following is a list of all warnings that may be displayed by the program during conversion. The warnings displayed always apply to the file currently being converted. 1. Printing/Plotting Publisher sets should be reviewed Some Print/Plot Options in PlotMaker 9 have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so these settings need reviewing before Printing/Plotting them.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

161

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

2. Original output color of Elements drawn or pasted into Layouts has been restored In PlotMaker 9, in the Book Settings Dialog box, output color of elements on Layouts may be set to grayscale or black. This option has no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so elements will appear in their original color. 3. Fill-related display and output options could not be converted In PlotMaker 9 you may apply global settings to Fills. These options have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so they cannot be converted. Therefore, all fills are displayed as defined in the Fill Settings Dialog Box. 4. OLE Drawings could not be converted ArchiCAD does not support OLE technology, so OLE drawings within the LBK file cannot be converted properly. (If the OLE drawing was embedded in the LBK file, with no live link to the source application, you will see the drawing, but you cannot update it.) You can identify OLE drawings using the Drawing Manager palette: look for the OLE icon in the Type column. It is recommended to replace these OLE Drawings with PDF files in ArchiCAD 17. 5. Edited drawing Layers are restored In PlotMaker you could modify the show/hide status of Drawing Layers. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so these drawing Layers will be displayed according to their original show/hide status. 6. Text and Markers size changes In PlotMaker, you could set the size of Texts and Markers to retain their original size even after the Output Scale was modified. (You checked the Fix Size option for Text and Markers in the Drawing Settings dialog box.) This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so Text and Markers will be resized according to the scale change, just like any other element in the drawing. 7. Custom line weight is restored to pen line weight In PlotMaker you could assign a custom line weight to lines, circles and splines. In this case the color of the line came from the assigned pen, but the weight was custom set in the elements settings dialog box. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so the line weights of lines, circles or splines will be set to values specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog.

Conversion of Other Attributes/Settings


Layers, Pens, Fills: The ArchiCAD 17 PLN file will inherit the Layers of the LBK Layout Book. The PlotMaker Layer will be renamed to ArchiCAD Layer. Pens and Fills come through unaltered. Autotext items: All Autotext entries are converted. The name of some of these items will change. The following Autotext items (located in PlotMaker 9s Book Info Dialog) are now found in the Project Info Dialog of ArchiCAD 17: Client Project Name Street City State/Country Postal Code 162
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Company Project Number Architect Draftsman (CAD Technician in ArchiCAD 17) Project Status Date of Issue Custom1 Custom2 Custom3 The following Autotext items are also converted. They are available in ArchiCAD 17 while editing a Text Block in either a Model View or on a Layout. Some names have changed. Some no longer apply, so these are converted into their closest match: Layout Name Layout Number (Layout ID in ArchiCAD 17) Subset Name Subset Number (Subset ID in ArchiCAD 17) Page Number (Layout Number in ArchiCAD 17) Number of Pages (Number of Layouts in ArchiCAD 17) Book Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 17) Book Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 17) Drawing Name Drawing Name with Extension (Drawing Name in ArchiCAD 17) Drawing Number (Drawing ID in ArchiCAD 17) Drawing Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 17) Drawing Scale (Original Scale in ArchiCAD 17) Output Scale (Drawing Scale in ArchiCAD 17) AC File Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 17) AC File Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 17) Last saved at Last saved by Long Date Short Date Time Master Layout: Layout size is defined differently in ArchiCAD 17. In PlotMaker 9 and earlier versions, the size of the Layout means the printable area of the page (the full size of the paper minus margins on all four sides). In ArchiCAD 17, the size of a Layout means the full size of the paper. This change does not affect either the full size of the Layout (printable area + Margins on all four sides) or the sizes of the printable area or any of the Margins. They will be the same as in previous versions; only the names have changed to better approximate real-world practice, where a Layout is the whole paper used for printing/plotting. So Master Layout sizes are converted

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

163

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

accordingly. The Grid for Drawing Numbering and Master Layout default come through unaltered. Layout settings: comes through unaltered. Subset settings: comes through unaltered. Book settings: comes through unaltered, except Output Color settings, which does not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 17 - see Warning 2 above). Drawing settings: all settings come through (Title is converted into GDL Object), except for Attributes Update Rules, which have no equivalent in ArchiCAD 17. Layer changes are not carried through (see Warning 5 above). If the Text and Markers option in PlotMaker has been set to Fix Size, Warning 6 above is displayed. If a placed Drawing had its own Pen Set, the same Pen Set will be created in ArchiCAD 17 and the Drawing will continue using it. The Output Scale setting will be converted into Drawing Scale. Note: In ArchiCAD 17, Drawing Scale is the scale of the Drawing on the Layout, which will be output, while Original Scale is that of the Drawings source view. If several Drawings in PlotMaker 9 used the same Pen Set, ArchiCAD 17 will create only one Pen Set for all the Drawings. This Pen Set will have the same name as the first converted Drawing which uses this Pen Set, but all the converted Drawings which used it in PlotMaker 9 will use it in ArchiCAD 17. Grids: come through unaltered. Project Preferences: Working Units, Mouse Constraints, Publisher preferences, Uniform Pens and Colors setting, Miscellaneous settings come through. (Since there is no Uniform Pens and Color settings checkbox in ArchiCAD 17, this means in effect that all Drawings will refer to the same Pen Set). If cache data was stored in the Layout File in PlotMaker 9 (the option is in Preferences > Cache Folder), the Drawings will be stored in the Project File in ArchiCAD 17 (see Drawings placed on Layout below). Custom line weights do not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 17 - see Warning 7 above). Drawings placed on Layouts: In PlotMaker 9, Project links are saved with the Layout Book File (Preferences > Cache Folder > Include Cache in Layout Book). By default, external links (e.g. PMK files, bitmap files) are not saved with the Layout Book File. If a Drawing was saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 17 will be set to be a manual-update Drawing, and will be saved with the ArchiCAD 17 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog). If a Drawing was not saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is not checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 17 will be set to be an auto-update Drawing, and will not be saved with the ArchiCAD 17 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will not be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog).

Drawing Status
It is recommended that you perform an update of all placed Drawings after opening or merging a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 17. 164
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Background: The modification status checking of Drawings is significantly enhanced in ArchiCAD 17, compared to PlotMaker 9. In PlotMaker 9, the program monitored the last modification date of the Drawings source files. If the last modification date of the file had changed, the program assumed that all Drawings coming from that file would need updating. In contrast, ArchiCAD 17 can monitor the modification status of each Drawing with a PLN source separately. When opening a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 17, a transitional state exists: the LBK file does not contain all information necessary for ArchiCAD 17 to decide the modification status of Drawings in the Layout Book file. (This transition state can cause Drawings with OK status in PlotMaker to have Modified status in ArchiCAD.) In this case, the status checking will be performed according to the old method (which assumes all drawings from a modified PLN source require updating). Only after the first update performed in ArchiCAD 17 will the status checking mechanism run on the drawing level instead of the file level.

Drawing Name and Drawing ID


Not all Drawing Names and Drawing IDs coming from a PlotMaker 9 LBK file will have their exact equivalent when opened in ArchiCAD 17. Therefore it is recommended to review Drawing Names and Drawing IDs to make sure everything came through correctly. For checking Drawing Names/IDs and updating Drawings, it is highly recommended to use the Drawing Manager of ArchiCAD 17, which has many customizable columns listing information about Drawings. Background: In PlotMaker 9, the Drawing Name was always the same as the name of the View from which it was created. In ArchiCAD 17, a View Name consists of two parts: View Name and View ID. For this reason, Drawing Name can be either View Name or View Name + View ID (or Custom). In PlotMaker 9, the value of Drawing ID (which was called Drawing Number in PlotMaker 9), could come from the Layout or from the ArchiCAD Viewpoint, or it could be set to a custom value. In ArchiCAD 17, the ArchiCAD Viewpoint option is not available. Instead, the View ID value is used.

Library Objects
When merging an LBK file into ArchiCAD 17, all elements placed on Layouts, including library parts, are merged. However, the libraries used by the merged project are not automatically loaded into the ArchiCAD 17 project. Thus, if after a merge you find that any library parts (such as Drawing Titles) are missing, you should load any missing libraries to resolve the problem.

Converting Model Views to AC17: Floor Plan Display Issues


ArchiCAD 17 offers more sophisticated Display Options for elements than ArchiCAD 9, but predefined settings will ensure that files migrated from ArchiCAD 9 will have compatible displays in ArchiCAD 17.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

165

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

While display options have changed since ArchiCAD 9 (they are now called Model View Options), the following information should help you recreate the same display in ArchiCAD 17 for migrated projects. In ArchiCAD 17, options for Doors and Windows are set separately in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options, Options for Construction Elements Panel, giving you more flexibility in applying model views: If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, but leave the with Markers checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Show on Plans option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, and check the with Markers checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Show with Dim. option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, but leave the with Contours checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Hide on Plan options in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, and check the with Contours checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Reflected Ceiling options in ArchiCAD 9. The Hide on Floor Plan radio button is a new choice: it means that Doors/Windows will not be shown on the Floor Plan at all, just as if there were no Doors/Windows in Walls. In Section, Elevation, and Interior Elevation, the Door/Window hole will be visible. Regarding the display of Cut Fills (Document > Set Model Display > Model View Options > Override Fill Display), you will notice that there is no option to set Bitmap Patterns. A bitmap display is available for on-screen display only: Bitmap or Vectorial is set globally using the Vectorial Hatching option of On-Screen View Options.

When you check Override Cut Fills and the Show Skin Separator Lines box, you will achieve the same result as the Separators Only option in ArchiCAD 9. If you check Override Cut Fills and click Solid Foreground, it will achieve the same result as the Solid w/o Separation Lines option in ArchiCAD 9.

166

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

Also, the Show Skin Separator Lines checkbox is enabled. Check this to achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the lower left corner is for Drafting Fills. If you check Override Drafting Fills and click the Solid Foreground option, you will achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the upper right corner is for Cover Fills. To adjust Cover Fill display, check the Override Cover Fills box and choose one of the following options: Solid Foreground: This replicates the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: A new option; this creates a cover fill over the element, displayed in the background color defined for the elements cover fill. No Fill: A new option; this draws no fills at all, and displays only the contour if any. The last area is for Zone Fills and Zone Stamps. The options in this area achieve the same as the Zone Polygons Display Options and Zone Stamps fields achieved in ArchiCAD 9. Zone Stamp: Check Hide Zone Stamp to hide it. If you leave the Override Zone Fills box unchecked, this corresponds to the Cover Fill Display Option for Zone Polygons from ArchiCAD 9. To adjust Zone Fill display, check the Override Zone Fills box and choose one of the following options: No Fill: This replicates the None option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Category: This replicates the Category Color option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: This replicates the Solid Background Colored Fill option in ArchiCAD 9. Category Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern on Category option in ArchiCAD 9. Hide Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern Only option in ArchiCAD 9.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

167

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo

168

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Configuration
Start ArchiCAD Create New Solo Project Open a Solo Project Close a Solo Project Saving from ArchiCAD File Compression Template Files Backup Files Archive Files License Borrowing Opening Projects through a Network Add-Ons and Goodies Working Units Project Location and Project North Project Preferences Troubleshooting Problem Files Scale Attributes Libraries Favorites The ArchiCAD User Interface Customizing your Work Environment

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

169

Configuration

Start ArchiCAD
Double-click on the ArchiCAD icon in your program folder to start the program. The Start ArchiCAD dialog box appears.

In the top section, What would you like to do?, choose either:

Create a New Project


or

Open a Project Create a New Project


Creates a new blank project in ArchiCAD. If you choose this option, the Set up Project Settings section below offers two choices for the new Projects settings.

170

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

1. Use a Template: Click the pop-up to choose a template.

At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location. 2. Use Latest Project Settings Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

171

Configuration

Open a Project
If you choose Open a Project, the You can section below gives you three choices:

1. Browse for a Solo Project. Choose this button, then click the Browse button at bottom left to bring up a file directory dialog box. 2. Browse for a Teamwork Project See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project. Note: If you want to open a Teamwork project from ArchiCAD 12 or earlier (file extension .plp, .bpn, .plc), you must first open it as a solo project. Thus, use the first radio button above, Browse for a Solo Project, for if you are opening an older Teamwork Project. See the Migration Guide for more information on converting older Teamwork projects.

172

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

3. Select a Recent Project. Choose this button, then select a recent project from the list below and click the Open button at bottom left to open it. Note: Another way to open a recent project is by selecting from the list at the bottom of the File > Open submenu.

Set up Work Environment


Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD and Customizing your Work Environment.

Do not Display this Dialog Next Time


If you dont want to see the Start ArchiCAD dialog box every time you start the program, disable it by checking this box. To enable it again, use the File > New & Reset All command.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

173

Configuration

Create New Solo Project


Use File > New > New to create a new solo project (file extension.pln).

Note: If you press Alt (Opt) key when choosing the New command, its name changes to New and Reset All, and ArchiCAD will automatically use the default project settings. The New Project dialog box appears. Click either Use a Template, or Use Latest Project Settings.

Use a Template
Click the pop-up to choose a template. At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled).

174

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location.

Use Latest Project Settings


Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.

Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD


Use File > New to create a new project. From the New Project dialog box, check the Launch a new instance box if you want to open an additional ArchiCAD in addition to the currently running program, if any.

Setup Work Environment


Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD and Customizing your Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

175

Configuration

Open a Solo Project


Use File > Open > Open... to open a solo project.

This command is not available if the active window belongs to an open GDL Object. See also File Types Opened by ArchiCAD. The Open file directory dialog box appears. Browse for the project you need.

176

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

To open a recent project, select from the list at the bottom of the File > Open command.

Join or Leave a Teamwork Project

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

177

Configuration

Close a Solo Project


If you use File > Close to close the Floor Plan, you close the entire Project. You will be prompted to save recent changes, if any. External files (GDL Object windows, pictures) will remain open. When you save and close a project with many windows open simultaneously, ArchiCAD will reopen these windows the next time you open the project. Re-opening all these windows may take time, especially if they must be rebuilt. If the number of windows to be re-opened exceeds 20 (not including PhotoRendering windows, which are not saved with the project), then ArchiCAD will show a warning dialog in which you can opt to re-open just the frontmost window (plus the Floor Plan), instead of all of the previously open windows.

Close Teamwork Project

178

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Saving from ArchiCAD


Use File > Save to save your project. Choosing File > Save as allows you to save the Project under a new name, archive it or save the current windows contents in a variety of file formats. Some of the available options may depend on the set of currently loaded Add-Ons. Some file formats are 2D-only or 3D-only formats. See File Types Saved by ArchiCAD.

Saving From a List Window


Basic Element, Component and Zone Lists can be saved as Plain Text, Tabulated Text, HTML tables or PDF. Click either radio button to include the files Used Column only or All Columns in the file. Formatted lists including graphic information can be saved in.rtf (Rich Text Format), ArchiCAD Project format, or PDF.

Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule)


Schedules can be saved in the following formats: Tabbed text, DWF, .xls and PDF. From a PC, with MS Office, you can also save in.doc format.

File Types Saved by ArchiCAD Close a Solo Project Close Teamwork Project

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

179

Configuration

File Compression
When saving certain file types from ArchiCAD (.pln, .tpl, .pla, .mod), the Options button in the Save dialog box presents you with the option to Compress file. This option is enabled by default, and is recommended in most cases, since file compression reduces file size considerably (by 60-70%). Using this option also increases download speed if you are working from a slow network, because the files are smaller. However, note that using the Compress file option means increased file saving time (about 30% longer), as a consequence of increased calculation needs. If the saving procedure takes too long, try turning this option off. Note: If you are using a computer with dual processors, file saving time should increase by only 5-10%.

180

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Template Files
A template is a read-only project file with extension tpl. It contains all project preferences settings, placed elements and tool default settings of the project. ArchiCAD 17 is shipped with a default template file together with the default library. Upon installation, the default template is located in the Defaults folder. Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 17\Defaults\ArchiCAD When you create a new project in ArchiCAD using a template file, this default template is at the top of the pop-up list when you choose a template:

See also Create New Solo Project.

To create a customized template:


1. Open a new empty project file. 2. Edit your project preferences, set up the project structure and/or place elements. 3. Save this project file as a template: use File > Save as, and choose ArchiCAD Project Template (*.tpl) as the file type. These files are saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

181

Configuration

To open a template:
1. Choose the File > New command 2. Select the Use a Template option 3. Select the desired template file. When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled. Note: Settings of the Work Environment Profile used to open your project will override Template file settings.

182

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Backup Files
Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the latest backup copy of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety & Integrity.

Data Safety & Integrity Backup Options

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

183

Configuration

Archive Files
Documents saved as Archives are stored together with their Library Parts (in a Library Container File, with extension.lcf), and properties contained in and defined with the Project. The Archive format is recommended if you want all files referenced in the Project to be included, as when: Moving a Project to another computer Storing a completed Project

To save a Project in the Archive format:


1. Use the File > Save as command. 2. From the appearing Save dialog box, choose ArchiCAD Archive Project (*.pla) from the Save as type drop-down. 3. Click the Options button to access the Archive Options dialog box to choose which library parts to include in the Archive file.

Include All Drawings: This will include all drawings placed on layouts, even those which are NOT marked as Store Drawing in the Project file in its Drawing Settings dialog box.

Important Notes about Archive Files:


If any Library Parts are missing from your Project at the time you save the Project as an Archive, these missing parts will not be included in the Archive document either. If you add a.pla file to your Linked Libraries folder using Library Manager, make sure you add the explicit.pla file itself, not a folder that contains the.pla. Otherwise the parts located within the.pla will not be read. See Library Manager. Because of the larger volume of information it stores, an Archive file size is somewhat larger than the corresponding Project document. Archives store the font information used in the project, but not the fonts themselves. This means that if you wish to display textual information the same way as it appears in the original environment, you have to install the appropriate fonts.

184

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Archive files do not store Add-Ons. Therefore, if your project contains elements affected by Add-Ons, these elements may lose certain features or behavior if these Add-Ons are not present.

To Open a File in Archive format:


When you open an Archive type document, the Open Archive Project dialog box appears.

Choose one of the three options: Read elements directly from archive: this means that the library parts will not be extracted from the archive file. You can place Objects referring to the elements in the Archive file, but you cannot edit the Library parts themselves (unlike the elements in an.lcf file). This also applies to list schemes used in calculations. This method saves a lot of disk space, but limits the modification possibilities. Extract elements to a new folder: the external library parts required for the project will be extracted from the archive and placed in a new folder that you can name. This solution is recommended if you need to actually work on the project objects. (You cannot extract objects to the Embedded Library.) Select a library: instead of extracting the library parts saved with the project, you can indicate a folder that houses the required elements. This solution is recommended if you wish to update the Projects objects with their latest versions.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

185

Configuration

Troubleshooting Problem Files


If you encounter an error in a project that requires technical support, the problem can be resolved much more efficiently if the support personnel can view the problematic project files. The relevant files might be located on a BIM Server as well as on client machines, in various folders. The Support Package function is a utility that automatically gathers the necessary data and stores it in a single file (.support for solo projects or.twsupport for Teamwork projects) that you can easily send to GRAPHISOFT for troubleshooting. In the case of Teamwork projects, certain problems - errors during Send, Receive, or Saving the local copy - will automatically bring up the Support Package interface. (At this point, you can proceed or cancel as you prefer.) To create a Support Package: 1. From the ArchiCAD Help menu, select Create Support Package.

2. You are prompted to close any open projects. (You will also be prompted to Save or Send and Receive changes, where applicable.)

186

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

3. The Create Support Package dialog box appears:

Choose either Solo Project or Teamwork Project. Your most recently closed project is shown in the Project field. To choose a different project, click the Browse (...) button. For a Teamwork project: You must select a BIM Server, then select the Teamwork Project whose files you want to send. If you are not a Project Administrator, you are prompted to provide a Project Administrators user name and password in order to access the projects on the server. (This account will not be stored on your computer.) 4. Select the package content to be sent. Default content is recommended. For a solo project, the Default content includes log files and crash info files. For a Teamwork project, the Default content includes log files, crash info files, and your local copy of the project. To include other items as well, choose Custom, then Package Content. In the appearing dialog box, check the boxes of the items to include. (The Default content is included automatically; here, choose any additional items to include in the package.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

187

Configuration

The optional content differs for solo and for Teamwork projects:

5. Enter any comments that could be helpful to support staff. For example, describe what happened; list the last few actions you took. 6. Click OK to return to the Create Support Package dialog box. 7. Click Create. 8. Select a destination folder for the Support Package file.

9. Click OK to start the file creation process. 10. Send the file to your local GRAPHISOFT Technical Support.

188

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

License Borrowing
Note: Not available in ArchiCAD 17 Solo version. If your firm has multiple (network) licenses to use ArchiCAD or other GRAPHISOFT programs, the License Borrowing feature allows individual users to borrow a license key temporarily if they will be going offsite, to enable use of the software even without being connected to the network. License borrowing is available if your firm uses the CodeMeter network protection. To access this feature, ArchiCAD 17 must be running on your machine with a network license. Do one of the following: Click on Help > License Information From the Help > About ArchiCAD Dialog, click on License Information In the License Information dialog box, the Available Products section lists the relevant installed GRAPHISOFT products, by Product Name and License.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

189

Configuration

Note: It is possible that you have installed MEP Modeler on your machine without a license key. (This means that you can view MEP elements correctly in ArchiCAD, but you cannot create or modify them.) In this case, the License Information dialog box lists MEP Modeler product as Disabled. You can click Enable Product here to start using a license for MEP Modeler: this way, you will have full access to MEP functions.

Below, the Product Information section displays language version and other license information, including expiration date if you have borrowed a license. In any case, borrowing is available only if the selected products License is Network (CodeMeter). Click Borrow to borrow a license for that product.

If the process is successful, the program lets you know that you have borrowed a license for the product, with a particular expiration date. In the License Information dialog box: The selected products License information is listed as either Borrowed (CodeMeter Stick) or Borrowed (License file), depending on the form of protection used. (This can vary by country.) The selected product is now shown with a Return button: click here when you are ready to return the license. The expiration date of the borrowed license is shown in the Product Information section. If your license expires before you return it, the program will automatically return it for you, even if you are not online.

190

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Opening Projects through a Network


If the file that you wish to open is already in use by someone else on the local network, ArchiCAD will warn you about this and let you know the name of the user, that is, the name defined in the Sharing Setup Control Panel (MacOS) or as the User Name (Windows).

You have the following choices: Open the file as read-only Open the file with exclusive access Cancel opening the file If you choose to open the file as read-only, you can see and modify the whole file, but you can only save it under a different name or into another location. If you try to overwrite the original file, you will again be notified that it is in use and that you cannot replace it with your modified Project. You can also choose to open the file with exclusive access. However, you should be very careful about using this option. There are a number of reasons why ArchiCAD may state that a file is in use although it actually is not: The person who last used the file did not properly open and close the file in ArchiCAD, e.g., because of a system crash. You have made a copy of a file that was in use at the moment, and the copy of the file also includes the name of the person who was using it during the copying operation. Note: If you do open a file with full access while another person is using it, you will both overwrite each others work without getting any further warning message from ArchiCAD. Therefore, be extremely careful when opening a file with exclusive access in any situation other than the emergencies mentioned above.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

191

Configuration

Add-Ons and Goodies


Add-Ons are small applications that extend ArchiCADs core functionality. Many add-ons are integrated as ArchiCAD menu commands. Goodies are other Add-Ons that are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface. See Goodies.

Managing Add-Ons
Open the Add-On Manager using Options > Add-On Manager command.

See Add-On Manager. Use the Add-On Manager to Load Add-Ons from any location. They will be loaded after the next startup of ArchiCAD Permanently remove Add-Ons while ArchiCAD is running 192
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Control which Add-Ons should load automatically when ArchiCAD is started Show information about the loaded Add-Ons

Menu Location of Add-On Functions


You can freely customize visibility and the menu and toolbar location of these integrated add-ons in the settings dialogs of Options > Work Environment > Menus/Toolbars. The location of these additional add-ons in the menu structure depends on where the Add-On Anchor Point is located for that menu. You can move this Add-On Anchor Point to any menu location, again using the controls in Options > Work Environment > Menus and Toolbars.

If the Add-On Anchor Point is not part of your customized menu structure, then the additionally loaded Add-Ons will not be displayed in the menu either.

Goodies
Goodies are another source of ArchiCAD Add-Ons. They are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface. To access them, go to ArchiCADs Help menu and choose the ArchiCAD 17 Downloads command, from which you can access a web page containing information on available add-ons and how to install them. Once you have installed a Goody into the program, you can then customize the location of the associated menu commands as described above, and manage it with the Add-On Manager. See Add-On Manager.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

193

Configuration

Working Units
To set working units for the current project, use the dialog box at Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.

If you open a Teamwork project from the server, its Working Units will have default values based on the template used to create the Teamwork project. However, you are free to change these Working Units while you work on the Teamwork project. Your Working Units preferences specific to each user, and are not saved to the server when you Send or Receive changes. For details on each of these controls, see: Working Units.

194

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Project Location and Project North


Use the Project Location dialog box to identify the geographical location of your project. Location Settings are significant for: Running the Energy Evaluation function Calculating Sun position for 3D views, camera views, photorenderings, and Sun Studies ArchiCAD Library parts which refer to the Project North value you set here. See Project North. The Google Earth Connection add-on, which considers the Altitude

The Project Location dialog box is available: from Options > Project Preferences > Project Location from the context menu of the Project Name in the Navigator

from the Sun dialog box See Sun.


ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

195

Configuration

Project Name and Address


The data for Project Name and Site Address are taken from the Project Info dialog box. See Project Info. Click Edit to modify these data by opening the Project Info dialog box.

Enter Location Data


Enter the Latitude and Longitude of the Project Location. For maximum accuracy (e.g. for Energy Evaluation purposes), you should identify and fill in precise latitude/longitude data for the location of your project. Click the pop-ups to switch between Latitude North and South, and Longitude East and West. Choose your preferred unit of measure from the fly-out menu.

Altitude: Enter the altitude of the project location in the desired units. (Altitude data is used when you export the project to SketchUp and Google Earth formats.) See SketchUp (.skp) and Google Earth (.kmz). Time Zone: Choose a time zone at the Project Location, expressed as a positive or negative offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time), together with the name of the corresponding time zone.

Use Predefined City as Location Data


As a quick way to enter Location data, you can choose a predefined city: click Cities at the right side of the Project Location dialog box. Note: To edit the list of predefined cities and associated data, go to Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager. See Attribute Manager.

196

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Choosing a predefined city will fill out the Latitude, Longitude and Time Zone fields. Note: However, for maximum accuracy, you should prefer precise latitude/longitude data for the location of your project, rather than a predefined city.

Use Google Maps to View and Query Location Data


Provided you have an internet connection: click on Show in Google Maps to view the project location as defined by your latitude/longitude data. To query precise data using Google Maps, zoom in to the desired location. Right-click to bring up the context menu, then choose Whats Here? to view (and copy, as needed) latitude/longitude data.

Project North
Enter an Azimuth (compass) angle value here to orient the Project North direction in the Floor Plan window, or drag the compass pointer to orient the Project North Azimuth graphically.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

197

Configuration

From the pop-up, choose the display unit for Project North.

Note that the accuracy of these units depends on the accuracy set for Angle Unit in Options > Working Units. Another way to set Project North is graphically, right in the project: Click Options > Project Preferences > Set Project North, or Use the same command from the context menu of the Project Name in the Navigator (provided that the Floor Plan or 3D Window is open).

In either Floor Plan or the 3D window, move the pointer to match the projects North orientation.

The Project North value affects the following: The calculations of the Energy Evaluation function. Some Interior Elevation Markers include text which display the Project North value. The North Symbol object (in the ArchiCAD Library), when placed in the project, reflects the Project North value. (You must check the Follow Project North box in the objects Settings.) When using surveyors units (Options > Project Preferences > Working Units), the North of the Coordinates Palette and the Tracker will be the same as the one set here. The Sun azimuth will be calculated with respect to Project North (where East is at 0.00 degrees). See details on sun position at Sun.

198

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Manage Location Data (XML, SketchUp, Google Earth)


Use the Import and Export buttons to manage the information displayed in this dialog box. There are three possible formats: XML, Google Earth (.kmz) and SketchUp (.skp). All three formats can be used to transfer information between ArchiCAD projects. The Google Earth and SketchUp formats also allow users to align their ArchiCAD models with SketchUp and Google Earth models. The XML format stores and reads longitude & latitude, angle display format, time zone, altitude & altitude unit, north direction and display format. The Google Earth (.kmz) format stores longitude, latitude & altitude as a single place mark. The import function will also read longitude and latiude data from .kmz files containing a single place mark. The altitude will also be imported if it is expressed in absolute mode (not relative or clamped). The SketchUp (.skp) format exports and imports longitude, latitude, altitude, North direction and time zone. The Site Address:-city and Site Address:-country data are exported but NOT imported). For further information on SketchUp: import: see SketchUp (.skp) merge: see Merge SketchUp (.skp) File export: see SketchUp (.skp) For further information on Google Earth: import: see Google Earth (.kmz) merge: see Merge Google Earth (.kmz) File export: see Google Earth (.kmz)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

199

Configuration

Project Preferences
The Options > Project Preferences menu contains the Project Preferences tab pages where you set standards and working methods specific to the project you are working on, and which are saved along with the project. Note: Working Units and Teamwork Project Settings are separate dialog boxes, also opened from the Options > Project Preferences menu. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. In Teamwork, you must have access rights and must reserve the Project Preference dialog box in order to change these preferences. The Project Preferences dialog box contains a pop-up menu at top left listing each preference category (which you can also access directly from Options > Project Preferences). Clicking the Next and Previous buttons allows you to go from one screen to the other

For details on each of these controls, see:

Dimensions Preferences Calculation Units and Rules Preferences Zones Preferences Construction Elements Preferences Reference Levels Preferences Related Topics: Working Units Teamwork Project Settings

200

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Scale
To set the scale of the currently active window, choose the Document > Floor Plan Scale command. (The name of the command varies depending on which window is active.) You can have a separate scale in effect for each window.

Select either a standard scale from the pop-up list or type a nonstandard scale into the input field. The name of the given window is displayed in the caption of the dialog box.

Standard scales are shown according to either metric or US standards, depending on the Length Unit setting made in the Working Units dialog box. See Working Units.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

201

Configuration

You can also use the Scale pop-up from the Quick Options Palette to reset the scale of the current window. See Quick Options Palette. After setting a scale, what you see is a preview of the Project if it were printed or plotted at that scale. To make a zoomed view match the view at the currently set scale, choose View > Zoom > Actual Size (or click the zoom button) after setting the scale.

Actual Size is the equivalent of the 100% scale value. The 2D Symbol of some GDL Objects (see the parameter) can be set to be sensitive to the current scale: the symbol varies depending on the current scale. See 2D Detail Level.

Model Size vs. Paper Size Elements


Model Size elements are rescaled along with the model whenever you change the project scale. Model size elements include all construction elements such as walls, objects, slabs etc. Paper Size elements are printed or displayed on the screen at the size you specify, regardless of the scale selected for the Project. For elements that do not have any real size, such as dimensions and arrowheads, you can specify a fixed size defined in either points or millimeters. Either Model Size or Paper Size: The following elements may be either model size (scaled with the plan) or paper size (scale independent): Text Blocks created with the Text tool: Choose Model or Paper size. See Text Tool Settings. Dashed and symbol line types: Choose Model or Paper size. See Line Types Dialog Box. Vectorial, symbol and image fill types: Choose Model or Paper size. See Fill Types Dialog Box.

Set a Different Scale for Each View


As you save views of your project, the scale is saved along with the view. Naturally, you will vary the scale as your project develops and you save multiple views at different scales for different purposes, using the Scale option. See View Settings.

Set a Separate Printing Scale for 2D Document


The Scale options in the Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document dialog boxes allow you to specify a Custom printing scale each time you print or plot your work from a Floor Plan or other 2D window. See Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document.

202

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

The Text and Markers options enable you to reduce/enlarge text and markers as the printing scale is changed, or keep them at a fixed (paper) size.

Drawing Scale
Drawings based on an ArchiCAD view have a Drawing Scale. By default, this Drawing Scale is the same as the Original Scale (the scale of the Drawings source view), but you can customize the Drawing Scale in Drawing Settings. See Drawing Settings.

Customizing the Drawing scale has no effect on the scale of objects within the drawing; it is equivalent to a graphical resizing of the Drawing, like the effect of magnifying a document with a copy machine.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

203

Configuration

Attributes
ArchiCAD Attributes are groups of defined settings available to your project. For example, Line Types and Surfaces are Attributes which you can apply to many project elements as you create them. You will access these attributes in the appropriate dialog boxes. What you see in these popup menus are defined in Options > Element Attributes.

ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Attributes. For most users, these default attribute sets are amply suited to their design needs. Note: If you have installed MEP Modeler, the MEP Systems attributes are also available. See the MEP Modeler User Guide for more information on this add-on. If you wish, you can customize Attributes or create new ones. For example, you can draw a new fill type, or customize a default surface to give it a new look. Attributes are saved with your project, so if you open the project on a different computer, your customized Attributes are available. See also Missing Attributes. To open and (if needed) edit Attribute sets, use the commands from Options > Element Attributes. Each attribute type is described in detail here:

Layers Line Types Fill Types Building Materials Composite Structures Pens & Colors
204
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Surfaces Zone Categories Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box Profile Manager Dialog Box Renovation Override Styles Attribute Manager Custom Attributes of GDL Objects Attributes of XREF Files

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

205

Configuration

Layers
About Layers Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Layers Layer Combinations Use Layers to Prevent Intersections Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate AutoCAD Work Methods) Show/Hide Layers of Imported DWG/DXF/DWF Files Attributes of XREF Files

206

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

About Layers
Layers are used to separate elements logically. Related groups of elements, such as dimensions, furniture, electrical symbols and so on, are placed on common Layers. An element can only belong to a single layer. For each layer, you can define the following settings: lock/unlock show/hide 3D view mode layer intersection group ArchiCAD comes with a predefined set of layers. Each tool has a default Layer assignment, so if you place an element using that tool, the new element is automatically placed on the corresponding layer (e.g. External Wall, Column, Beam). Note: Doors, Windows, Wall Ends and Corner Windows do not have separate layers; they are handled together with the layers of the wall into which they are placed. Cameras do not have layers. Layers can be deleted; in this case, you will delete all the elements on it. However, the ArchiCAD Layer is a special layer that cannot be deleted, hidden or locked, since an ArchiCAD project must always contain at least one layer. In case of a file error, any elements that may have lost their layer definitions will be placed on the ArchiCAD layer. Each ArchiCAD project has a single layer set, managed in the Layer Settings Dialog Box, which is accessible from: Options > Element Attributes > Layer Settings Document > Layers > Layer Settings (shortcut: Ctrl+L) Layer Settings icon in the Info Box of any ArchiCAD tool

See Layer Settings Dialog Box. The Quick Layers palette contains shortcuts for changing layer states for multiple layers quickly and easily. See Quick Layers. Layers are global, which means that the same layers are available on all stories and in all windows. However, layers used in the Layout book can have different settings than those used in Model views. (The title bar of the Layer Settings dialog box reflects which type of window is active in ArchiCAD - a Model View or the Layout Book.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

207

Configuration

See Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book.

Use Layers to Lock Elements to Prevent Editing


Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the lock icon to toggle between locked/unlocked status for the selected layer.

If a layer status is locked, then elements on that layer cannot be edited - this is useful if you want to prevent unintended changes.

208

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Use Layers to Show/Hide Elements


Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. To show/hide a layer, toggle the eye icon open or shut for the selected layer. If a layer is in hidden status, elements on that layer are not displayed on your plan.

Note: If you hide an elements layer, any associated label is also hidden - even if the label is located on a different layer.

Use Layers to Show 3D Elements in Wireframe Mode

Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the shaded/wireframe icon for the selected layer to toggle between these display mode options for 3D. This setting is independent of the current 3D mode set in the View > 3D View Options menu. See 3D View Options.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

209

Configuration

Quick Layers
The Quick Layers palette lets you quickly change the state of the Layers in your Project without having to open the Layer Settings dialog box. To display this palette, choose the Window > Palettes > Quick Layers command. Select the element(s) whose layers you wish to manage. (You can select elements using both explicit selection and Marquee areas.) The toggle buttons, from left to right:

Show/Hide Toggle: inverts the visibility of all layers. Lock/Unlock Toggle: inverts the state of all protected and unprotected layers. Hide Selections Layer: Hides the layer of the selected elements. Lock Selections Layers: Locks layer of the selected elements. Unlock Selections Layers: Unlocks layer of the selected elements. Hide Others Layers: Hides the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be hidden.) Lock Others Layers: Locks the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be locked.) The Undo Quick Layer Actions command undoes the last Quick Layer action (up to 10 actions). The Redo Quick Layer Actions command redoes the last undone QuickLayer action (up to 10 actions).

210

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Quick Layers Example


Suppose you want to edit this roof in the Floor Plan:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

211

Configuration

You dont need the Section and Elevation markers; to temporarily hide them, select all the Section/Elevation markers...

... then click the Hide Selections Layers command.

Now the unneeded markers and lines are hidden.

212

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Once you are done working on the roof and want to show the hidden layers again, click the Undo Quick Layers button.

All Section and Elevation markers are now shown again.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

213

Configuration

Layer Combinations
Layer Combinations are named sets of Layer settings. For example, you can set up a Show All, Lock 3D Elements Layer Combination, in which all the layers are visible, yet all Layers assigned to 3D model elements are locked, making those elements uneditable. You might use this Layer Combination when working with 2D only functions, such as dimensioning, to prevent inadvertent modifications to the building elements. Each view can have a different Layer Combination, set in View Settings. See View Settings Dialog Box. ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Layer Combinations. Layer Combinations are listed on the left panel of the Layer Settings Dialog Box; individual Layers are listed on the right. The currently active Layer Combination is shown as selected.

Apply a Layer Combination


To apply a Layer Combination to the project, do one of the following: Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Select a Layer Combination from the list in the left panel, then click OK to close the dialog box. Use the Layer Combination pop-up control in the Quick Options Palette.

214

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

See Quick Options Palette.

Go to Document > Layers and click on any of the Layer Combinations listed there.

Create New Layer Combination


To create a new Layer Combination: 1. Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. 2. As needed, set the state (locked/unlocked, shown/hidden, solid/wireframe) of the individual layers, listed on the right. Use the sorting and selection controls to set the state of several layer at the same time. See Layer Settings Dialog Box for details on these controls. 3. Click the New button (below the list of Layer Combinations) and give the new set a unique name in the appearing dialog box.

Modify Layer Combination


To modify an existing layer combination: 1. Select the Layer Combination from the list on the left 2. Make the necessary adjustments to individual layers on the right

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

215

Configuration

3. Click the Update button.

Modify Layers Status in Multiple Layer Combinations


By selecting an individual Layer from the Layer list (on the right side of the Layer Settings dialog box), you can modify its state in the various defined Layer Combinations (on the left).

216

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

For example, below we selected the Foundation Layer on the right. In the left, you can now see the layer states for the Foundation Layer as defined for each Layer Combination.

On the Layer Combination side, you can directly change the Foundation layers state (e.g. from Show to Hide) in any or all Layer Combinations: just go down the list of Layer Combinations one after the other, and click the Foundation Layers status icons as necessary. The Layer Combinations are now redefined accordingly. (You dont have to click Update.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

217

Configuration

Find and Select Elements based on Layer Combination


The Find and Select function (Edit > Find and Select) enables you to set up criteria by which to find and select elements in the project. See Find and Select Elements. One such criterion you may use is Layer Combination. In the Find and Select dialog box, add the criterion Layer Combination and then choose one of the defined Layer Combinations of your project. This means the program will find and select the elements which are visible according to the Layer Combination you have chosen.

218

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Use Layers to Prevent Intersections


You can work with Layer states to control element intersection display in 2D. To do this, you can vary their Layer Intersection Group numbers. Intersecting elements that belong to the same Layer Intersection Group will be joined to each other, provided they are drawn correctly. Elements on different Layer Intersection Groups will not be joined. Note: Layer Intersection numbers have nothing to do with element priorities; they serve merely as tags or labels (e.g. 1 or 2) for grouping elements. Note: Two elements that are both set to intersection group 0 will NOT intersect.

The numbers under the intersection icon in the Layers panel (Document > Layers > Layer Settings) indicate the number of the intersection group the elements on that layer belong to.

Only elements on the same intersection group will connect to each other. By default, every layer is set to Group 1, so all intersecting elements will be joined according to the regular connection rules for ArchiCAD. You may want to prevent this connection - for example, to show the details of composite walls that have not been connected. In this case, place the connecting walls on different layers, and then give one of these a layers a different Layer Intersection Group number.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

219

Configuration

Wall Layers Have Identical Intersection Group Numbers:

Wall Layers Have Different Intersection Group Numbers:

Note on Intersection with Hidden Layer: Elements having identical intersection groups will intersect even if one of the layers is hidden. This may result in missing lines, indicating an intersection with an element on a hidden layer. To avoid this, go to Layer Settings, select one of the layers, and assign it any different intersection group. Exception for Level 0: Elements which are both on intersection group 0 (whether on the same or different layers) will NOT intersect.

220

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book


While each ArchiCAD project has only one Layer set, the settings of any particular layer (for example its show/hide or locked/unlocked status) can be different in the Layout Book and in Model Views. The settings variation you see in the Layer Settings Dialog Box (either Layout Book or Model Views) depends on which window is active when you open Layer Settings. Both the Layer Settings command and the dialog box are labeled accordingly.

See Layer Settings Dialog Box. Important: Layer settings for the Layout Book serve to show/hide elements directly placed on layouts, such as lines, texts and drawings as a whole. Layout Book layers do not affect the drawing content, which is determined by the layers of its associated view.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

221

Configuration

Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate AutoCAD Work Methods)
If you wish to simulate AutoCAD work methods, the Active Layer command is an easy way of assigning a single default layer to all tools, instead of than using ArchiCADs default layer set-up. Choose Document > Layers > Layer Extras > Active Layer from the menu and choose the One Active Layer for all Element Types option from the appearing palette.

This will set the default layer of all element types to the layer of the currently active tool (regardless of any selection). All Tool Settings dialog boxes will now use the same default Layer definition and successive elements will all be placed on that layer, regardless of type. You can override this setting manually for selected elements. If you wish to return to the previous layer state, choose the Individually Set Layers option. The last set of manually defined layers will be used.

222

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Line Types
Line types are assigned to each ArchiCAD construction element in its own Tool Settings dialog box, depending on the element type. For example, when defining how a Column should be displayed in a 2D window, you will apply different line types for its core outline, for its overhead display and for its crossing symbol.

The line types available in the element Settings dialog boxes are defined and managed as the projects Line Type attributes, in Options > Element Attributes > Line Types. Use the Line Types Dialog Box to modify the standard line types (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) and define customized line types.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

223

Configuration

See Line Types Dialog Box.

Line Weight Display


By default, all lines will be displayed at Hairline width, at one pixel wide. In addition, you can enable Bold Cut Lines (View > On-Screen View Options); this will show all Cut lines as bold (two pixels wide, regardless of the lines true pen weight). All other lines will be shown at Hairline width. The alternative to Hairline weight is display each pens True Line Weight: enable Line True Weight in View > On-Screen View Options. Each lines pen weight (depending on its pen weight value as defined in the Pens and Colors dialog box) will be displayed accurately. See On-Screen View Options.

224

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Fill Types
ArchiCAD includes a predefined set of default fill patterns, or fill types. You can access them from Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types where you can define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete them.

Related Topics: Fill Types Dialog Box Fills

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

225

Configuration

Building Materials
A Building Material is a super attribute, a combination of multiple attributes having defined properties. Starting with ArchiCAD 17, all model elements use Building Materials instead of Cut Fills. Building Materials are defined globally, in the Building Materials dialog box, then applied to construction elements in their own Settings dialog boxes, or used as components of Composite Structures and Complex Profiles. Editing the Building Material attribute makes changes throughout the model. Note: Building Materials are not used for GDL elements (e.g. Doors, Windows, Objects, Stairs.) A number of Element-level overrides are available to allow for flexibility in the display of individual Elements, including: Element Cut Fill Pen overrides, including background, foreground or both Surface overrides on each face (including an extrusion override for Profiled elements)

The Building Material combines the following: 226

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Cut fill Cut fill pens (foreground/background) Intersection Priority Fill orientation (if used for a composite or complex element) Surface (known as Material in previous ArchiCAD versions) Physical properties Use Options > Element Attributes > Building Materials to define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete Building Materials. See Building Materials Dialog Box for details on these settings. See also Line Elimination Between Building Materials.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

227

Configuration

Composite Structures
Walls, Slabs, Roofs and Shells can be defined as composite structures.

Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Slab, Roof or Shell


1. Open the Element Settings dialog box for the element type. 2. In the Geometry and Positioning Panel, define the elements structure as a composite by clicking on the Composite icon.

3. Use the pop-up below to choose a composite structure. Note: Composite Structures are defined for specific element types: Wall, Slab, Roof, and/or Shell, by the Use With control, in the Options > Element Attributes > Composites. The composite structure pop-up in element Settings shows only those Composite Structures whose Use With control includes the element type you are defining. Composites are defined at Options > Element Attributes > Composites See Composite Structures Dialog Box. You can also edit a selected composite by accessing its settings from its context menu:

4. The chosen composite structure is applied to the currently selected or created element.

228

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Components of Composite Structures


The layers of the composite element are called skins; a composite structure can have up to 48 skins. The skins are separated by separator lines; and the outline of the composite is the contour line. All composite elements include at least one structural skin called Core. The skins you define as Core or Finish will also affect views in Partial Structure Display. See Partial Structure Display. Assign these definitions in the Options > Element Attributes > Composites.

See Composite Structures Dialog Box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

229

Configuration

Pens & Colors


Each Pen has a specific color and line weight. You assign pens to ArchiCAD elements in their own tool settings dialog box. Note: Your current On-Screen View Options (Bold Cut Lines, True Line Weight) may affect the on-screen display of your lines. See On-Screen View Options. To assign a pen to an element, open the pencolor pop-up (in the element settings dialog box or in the Info Box of a selected element) and choose the desired pen for the element or one of its components - such as the cut line pen assigned to the slab in the following image:

The available pens in these pop-ups are derived from the Pen Set currently applied for this project. See Pen Sets.

230

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Pen Sets
ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. These are listed and managed Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. You can just use the default pen set, or you can apply a different Pen Set for your project, depending on the purpose of the current output.

Apply a Pen Set Redefine a Pen Set Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions Pens & Colors Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

231

Configuration

Apply a Pen Set


To choose and apply a pen set, use: Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. Both commands open the identical dialog box: See Pens & Colors Dialog Box.

Select a pen set from the Available Pen Set list and click OK. For a quick way to change the pen set of your model view, use the Pen Set pop-up in the Quick Options Palette. See Quick Options Palette.

232

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Apply a Separate Pen Set for the Layout Book


You can use a separate pen set for your Model Views and your Layout Book: the name of the dialog box includes either Model Views or Layout Book, depending on which type of window is active.

The Pens & Colors (Layout Book) settings are applied only to items placed onto the Layout (such as Autotext and Master Layout items), but not to the content of placed Drawings.

Apply a Pen Set to a Drawing


When you place a view onto a Layout, it becomes a Drawing. By default, the Drawing placed in the Layout Book uses its own pen set (the one saved in the source views View Settings - by default, the pen set defined for the projects Model Views). However, you can override this pen set in the Drawing Properties Panel of Drawing Settings. Click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only.

See Drawing Properties Panel. Drawings that have their source in external files - such as DWG/DXF/PDF files placed using ArchiCADs Drawing tool - can be assigned pen sets the same way: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only. Alternatively, you can change the source views pen set: go to its View Settings Dialog Box and choose a different Pen Set from the pop-up.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

233

Configuration

See View Settings Dialog Box.

234

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Redefine a Pen Set


The predefined Pen Sets shipped with ArchiCAD are based on common workflows. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. However, you can use the Pens & Colors Dialog Box to redefine or rename any pen set together with its description redefine any pens line weight or color, using the Edit Color control

See Pens & Colors Dialog Box. Pen numbers remain constant even if you change pen sets. After redefining a color or changing the Pen Set, the ArchiCAD construction elements immediately change to the new colors on the Floor Plan. The 3D window, 3D Document and Section/Elevation/IE/Worksheet windows may require that you rebuild the view.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

235

Configuration

Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project


Pen Sets are attributes, and can be transferred among different ArchiCAD projects using the Pen Sets tab page of the Attribute Manager (Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager). Similarly, each pen sets individual definitions can be copied among projects in the Attribute Manager (Pens and Colors tab page).

See Attribute Manager.

236

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views


When the luminance value of a particular background color falls below a threshold value - that is, if your background is sufficiently dark - black pens will be shown as white on your ArchiCAD screen. (This is useful if you use a dark or black background to imitate AutoCAD methods.)

However, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. Non-black pens that would be difficult to see against a particular background will automatically shift to a similar, but more easily visible color. On a white background, elements in white pens are adjusted to a light gray to enhance visibility. Again, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. To disable this automatic color adjustment, uncheck the Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. See On-Screen Options.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

237

Configuration

Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions


Architects often wish to output the same model in several versions, using different pen colors or pen weights each time to meet different requirements for scale, color or emphasis. To aid users in this effort, ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. This way, you can switch pen sets for the entire project with a single click: you might prefer to use the architectural plans pen set when outputting plans for approval, then switch to the electrical pen set to output layouts for a subcontractor. When you change the pen set of a given project, the pen index numbers assigned to individual elements remain the same, but the colors and line weights associated with those pen indexes may change in accordance with the definitions in the new pen set, and your display and output will get a whole different look. When you assign a pen to an element, you are assigning a pen index number to that element. ArchiCADs default pen indexes assigned to element parameters correspond to the element function. For example, slabs are assigned a default cut line pen with index 29, which corresponds to the function Slabs - Cut Structural. Note: Depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD, your default pen sets and pen index assignments may vary. See also Pen Sets. For more information on pen sets in ArchiCAD, see http://www.archicadwiki.com/Pen_Sets. Since each pen index number has a distinct function definition, it is worth paying attention to the pen function when assigning a pen to an element. (Or you can simply use the default element pens that are shipped with ArchiCAD.) If you assign pen index numbers consistent with the function of the element, then switching from one pen set to the other will ensure a consistent display that is in line with the purpose of your output.

238

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Surfaces
About Surfaces Display of Vectorial Hatching and Textures in 3D Window Display of Surfaces in Section/Elevation/IE Window Display of Surfaces in the 3D Document Display of Surfaces in Renderings Surface Settings Dialog Box LightWorks Shader Settings

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

239

Configuration

About Surfaces
To display your plan realistically, you can apply surfaces to your elements. Surfaces contain color, texture and light effects. Surfaces can be displayed in the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and in PhotoRenderings.

Surfaces can be created or modified in the Surface Settings Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Surfaces). Surfaces defined here are then assigned to construction elements through Building Materials (which include a Fill and a Surface). Once you assign a Building Material to an element, the element will use the Surface of the Building Material. You can, however, override the Surface at the element level (use the Override Surface controls in the Model panel of element settings). See Element-Level Surface Override. 240
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Some surfaces have vectorial hatching and/or textures as part of their definition, as indicated by icons. This surface, for example, can display either a vectorial hatching or a texture:

Assign a Vectorial Hatching to a Surface


Vectorial Hatching is a vectorial fill pattern used with a Surface. In the Vectorial Hatching panel of Surface Settings, choose a vectorial hatching from one of the projects defined vectorial fill types. See Surface Vectorial Hatching Panel. Note: When assigning a 3D Vectorial Hatching in the Surfaces dialog box, you can access only fills defined as Cover Fills.

Assign a Texture to a Surface


Textures are image files that can be assigned to surfaces to give them a more realistic look and feel. They are displayed in PhotoRenderings, and in the 3D window using the OpenGL 3D engine. By default, many ArchiCAD surfaces have textures assigned to them (such surfaces will have a texture icon next to their name.) You can load additional textures from the ArchiCAD library, or load other custom images. Textures are assigned and edited in the Texture Panel of Surface Settings. See Surface Texture Panel.

Display of Vectorial Hatching and Textures in 3D Window


To display Vectorial Hatching: use the Internal 3D engine (View > 3D View Options) the Vectorial 3D Hatching control in 3D Window Settings must be On To display Textures: use the OpenGL 3D engine (View > 3D View Options)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

241

Configuration

make sure the Textures box is checked in OpenGL options as in the image below:

Note: You can customize the orientation and origin of textures in 3D views. See Align 3D Texture.

Note on the GENERAL Surface


The GENERAL Surface is only available for Building Materials, Element Surfaces and GDL. When a Surface is defined as GENERAL, it will display a solid color based on an Elements Uncut Line Pen. By default, this General Surface will be assigned to new Building Materials and to new Surface parameters added within GDL. It is used to avoid assigning to an incorrect Surface or creating a missing attribute. It is hard coded into ArchiCAD and is not available in the Surface Settings dialogue or Attribute Manager.

242

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Element-Level Surface Override


An elements surface setting depends on its Building Material, which includes a surface. See Building Materials. However, for any particular element or element type, you can override the Building Material surface definition, and assign a different surface (or several different surfaces, depending on the element). 1. Select a placed element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2. In the Model panel, under Override Surfaces, click the toggle button of any or all of the surface pop-ups. Each pop-up corresponds to a face or edge of the element.

Note: Clicking the Chain icon (Link Surfaces) means that all of faces/edges will use a single surface override. To set a separate surface for any single face/edge, unlink the surface definitions by clicking the chain again.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

243

Configuration

Align 3D Texture
Use the commands at Design > Align 3D Texture to set the orientation and origin of construction element textures in 3D views. These commands are only available in the 3D Window on selected construction elements whose Surface attribute includes a Texture assignment (Options > Element Attributes > Surfaces). For extra texture editing options on Morph faces, see Morph Texture Mapping and Alignment.

Set Texture Origin


Use Set Origin, the first command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to define the origin of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1. Select one or several elements. 2. Enter a 3D location by clicking on an element hotspots, or typing coordinates into the Tracker. In this example, the brick wall texture originally looks like this:

244

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

To reset the texture origin to the corner of the wall - so that the brick pattern starts from the corner - select the wall; then use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Origin. Click on the corner and view the result.

The texture origin will affect all of the elements surfaces. You cannot, for example, use a different origin for the inside and outside surfaces of a wall.

Set Texture Direction


Use Set Direction, the second command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to change the orientation of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1. Select one or several elements. 2. Use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Direction. 3. Click on a surface of a selected element. You must click a surface. (Clicking a Wall, Slab or Roof edge will cancel the action.) 4. In the dialog box that opens, choose to either define the textures angle graphically or numerically. Then click OK.

5. If you chose to define the angle graphically, draw the desired vector for the texture orientation. You can snap to element hotspots.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

245

Configuration

6. If you define the angle numerically, it will be applied relative to the default orientation of the Texture and measured counterclockwise.

Reset Texture
To return to the default Texture settings, select the element, open its Settings dialog box and go to the Model panel. The Custom Texture information text is active. Click the Reset Texture button to discard the customization. You can also select several elements and choose the Reset command in the Design > Align 3D Texture hierarchical menu. To remove all customization of the elements of the 3D Window, do not select any of them and choose Reset All.

246

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Display of Surfaces in Section/Elevation/IE Window


The Section/Elevation/IE window can display an elements surfaces colors and/or vectorial hatching on the elements uncut portion. To display surface colors: 1. Open the Model Display panel of the Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog box. 2. Choose Fill Uncut Surfaces and activate one of these two options. Elements Own Surface Colors (Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own surface colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects, as in the image below.

Elements Own Surface Colors (Non-Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own surface colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each surface color will be uniform over the whole surface.

3. Check Vectorial 3D Hatching to display the surfaces vectorial hatching, if any. Surface colors and vectorial hatching can be displayed only on uncut surfaces of elements in the Section/Elevation/IE windows.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

247

Configuration

Display of Surfaces in the 3D Document


A 3D Document has its own Settings dialog box. Use the Model Display Panel to define how surfaces will be displayed. See 3D Document Model Display Panel. Unlike for a Section-type window, the 3D Documents Model Display settings enable you to choose surfaces, element-specific fills and shaded or non-shaded colors to display cut surfaces, for the current 3D Document only.

The Vectorial Hatching in 3D and Transparency options for the 3D Document are specific to the 3D Document, and are not connected to the same options set for the 3D Window.

248

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Display of Surfaces in Renderings


Different Rendering Engines have different capabilities for displaying surfaces. Thus, when editing a Surface in the Surface Settings dialog box, some of the available controls may not have any effect on the surfaces rendered appearance. To streamline the process, choose your intended Rendering Engine as the Preview Engine in the Surface Settings dialog box and check the Disable unrelated Controls box. See Surface Settings Dialog Box.

This way, only those controls will be available in Surface Settings that will actually affect the final rendered appearance. If you intend to render with LightWorks, choose the LightWorks Rendering Engine in Surface Settings, and check Disable unrelated controls. The LightWorks Shader Settings panel is now the only one you need to edit in Surface Settings. See LightWorks Shader Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

249

Configuration

Renderings display all surface characteristics except vectorial hatching. The general appearance of your renderings is defined in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, whose settings apply to all surfaces in the rendering. See PhotoRendering Settings.

250

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Attribute Manager
Open the Attribute Manager from Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager. Displaying the dialog box might take some time, since it has to list all the attributes of the project. This dialog box allows you to copy (append, overwrite) attributes (Layers, Layer Combinations, Pens & Colors, Pen Sets, Line Types, Fill Types, Composite Structures, Profiles, Surfaces, Building Materials, Zone Categories and Cities) between two opened files. It can also duplicate or delete attributes in either of the two files. Note: If you have installed MEP Modeler, the MEP Systems tab page appears too. On top of the dialog box, the attribute types icons represent tab pages that display one type of attribute at a time. The last tab shows all types of attributes in a single list. On the left, the attributes of the currently opened ArchiCAD file are shown by their index number and name. Note: Be aware that ArchiCAD stores attributes by their index numbers and not by their names. This rule has to be considered when you import or export attributes between two files. You have to be extremely cautious when you want to overwrite attributes with similar names but different indexes. On the right you can either open a second ArchiCAD file (Project, Archive or Module) or an attribute file in a special format that belongs to Attribute Manager. (Use the Open command at the bottom right of the dialog box.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

251

Configuration

Here, the Fill attributes of two projects are shown. For the current project (whose attributes are listed on the left side), a checkmark means that the attribute is used in the project.

The buttons between the two parts of the dialog box: Allow you to copy attributes in either direction, and delete, append or overwrite them - Appending an attribute will add it to the list of the other file under a new index. - Overwriting an attribute will replace it with another attribute from the other file that has the same index number. For the Building Material attribute (which includes Cut Fill and Surface attributes), checkboxes are available to include or exclude the Building Materials Cut Fill and/or Surface definitions. You can select any single attribute from the right-hand list and save it as a separate file to any location, using the Print to File... button. On the Pen Set page of Attribute Manager: Use the Save as STB button to save any single selected pen set in the format of AutoCAD Plot Style Table (*.stb). The Plot Style Table is used by AutoCAD to map each color in your drawing to line widths on printed/plotted output.

252

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

At the bottom of the dialog box a number of buttons allow you to perform different operations on the files: Purge Unused: You have the option of purging the unused attributes from your project: click Purge Unused from the bottom of the current projects attribute list. Those attributes used in default element settings will not be purged. Note, however, that an attribute shown here as unused (it is listed without a checkmark) may in fact be referred by the GDL script of a placed object. The Revert button restores the attributes to their previous state. (The Cancel button has the same effect, but also closes the dialog box.) The Apply button applies the changes you have made without closing the dialog box. To sort an attribute list by a particular criterion, click the top of the desired column. For example, you can display pens by line width or cities by latitude. In the row below the list of the current project attributes, you can edit individual attribute names and some of their properties. For example, for fill attributes you can define its type as Drafting, Cover and/or a Cut Fill. See Fill Categories. Layers: You can modify the visibility and locking state as well as the name of the selected layer. Layer Combinations: You can rename the selected layer combination. Pen Tables: You can copy, delete, append or overwrite pen tables among the selected projects. Pens & Colors: You can modify the color, the RGB components and the line width of the selected pen. Line Types: You can modify the name and the scale factor of the selected line type. Fill Types: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for the various fill categories. Composite Structures: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for different element types. Profiles: You can modify the name of the selected profile as well as its availability for different element types. Surfaces: You can modify the color, name and texture assignment of the selected surface. Building Materials: You can modify the name, cut fill, surface and intersection priority. Zone Categories: You can modify the code, color, name and zone stamp assignment of the selected item. Cities: You can modify the name, latitude and longitude values and time zone settings of the selected location. MEP Systems: These attributes are available only if you have installed the MEP Modeler program. See the MEP Modeler User Guide for information. Operation Profiles: These attributes are created with the Energy Evaluation function. All: You can display all the attribute types of the current project and sort them by types, numbers and names, or edit the attribute that is selected in the list.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

253

Configuration

For Teamwork users: see also Reservation in Attribute Manager; Reserve All Attributes. See also Missing Attributes.

254

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Missing Attributes
Although attributes are saved with the project, it can still happen that your project contains elements which refer to missing attributes. You will notice this in the elements Settings dialog box, as in the case of the missing line type referenced by this door:

Missing attributes may occur: if you have copy-pasted elements from a different project using a different set of attributes if you have placed objects whose GDL script refers to attributes missing from your project if you have removed used attributes from your project via Attribute Manager To locate elements referring to missing attributes, use Find and Select. See Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

255

Configuration

Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes


Although attributes are saved with the project, it can still happen that your project contains elements which refer to missing attributes. See also Missing Attributes. To locate such elements easily, use Find and Select. See also Find and Select Elements. 1. In the Criteria field of the Find and Select dialog box, choose a specific element type, or All Types. 2. Add Attributes as the next criterion, and set its value to Missing.

3. Click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. In this example, a slab has been identified and selected as using one or more missing attributes. In that Slabs Settings dialog box, it becomes clear that the missing attribute is a cover fill.

256

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

The easiest solution is to assign a different cover fill, from the fills that are available to the project, by clicking the Cover Fill attribute pop-up. Here we have chosen to use the Carpet fill.

Alternatively, if you know the location of the missing attribute you need (e.g. if it is part of another ArchiCAD project), you can use Attribute Manager to transfer the needed attribute from the other project to the current one. See Attribute Manager.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

257

Configuration

Custom Attributes of GDL Objects


Some GDL object scripts include custom attributes. These attributes may be defined either as part of their individual object scripts or defined in the MASTER_GDL script. When you load such objects into a project, their custom attributes are automatically merged into the projects attribute set as follows: If the Attribute definition is contained in the MASTER_GDL script, then once the library containing the MASTER_GDL script is loaded, the attributes are merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes. Attributes with the same names are not replaced. If the Attribute definition is contained in the individual library part scripts, then - Fills and Line types are merged into the ArchiCAD project. - Surface and Texture attributes are not merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes.

258

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Libraries
About Libraries Library Manager Recommendations for Using Libraries Embedded Library Linked Libraries BIM Server Libraries Reload/Refresh Libraries Remove Library from Project Troubleshooting Library Issues Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Library Container File Library Updates

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

259

Configuration

About Libraries
Libraries contain the external or embedded files of geometric library parts, or Parametric Objects. Each version of ArchiCAD is shipped with a standard object library containing hundreds of preconfigured, editable objects (also known as GDL objects or Library parts). For the most part, you will use ArchiCAD tools to place objects from this standard library. Each subsequent version of ArchiCAD comes with an updated ArchiCAD Library. See Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 17 Solo for recommendations on migration issues. See also Parametric Objects. When creating a new project, ArchiCAD will load the library contained in the template used for the new project. Your project can use additional, specialized Libraries for different applications (e.g., residential Projects and industrial building design). There are different Libraries corresponding to different national standards. In addition to objects, a Library can also contain files of different formats that are referred to by ArchiCAD elements: Listing Templates are plain text files that are used to customize the content and the look of quantity calculations. Textures are picture files that can be attached to Surfaces to provide added realism in rendered views, and in the 3D Window when using the OpenGL engine. Background images are additional picture files used to provide the 3D model with a lifelike environment. Macros, Zone stamps, Property Objects View and manage your projects libraries in the Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). See Library Manager.

260

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Library Manager
The Library Manager displays the projects libraries and objects.

Open Library Manager


Do one of the following: Use the File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager command Go to Library Manager from the Info Box pop-up of any Library Part

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

261

Configuration

Use the Library Manager icon at the bottom of any Library Part Settings dialog box

Note for Teamwork users


In Teamwork, you cannot reserve the Library Manager as a whole, only certain of its listed items (such as Embedded Objects and all BIM Server Libraries). If you click on a reservable item in Library Manager, the control lights appear.

Topics in this Section:


For any selected item in Library Manager, view the Properties tab for specific information on the item. Additional information is available for some items by clicking on the blue Info icon. For details on each type of item listed in Library Manager, see the links below:

Embedded Library Linked Libraries BIM Server Libraries Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Libraries with Duplicate Objects Substituted Objects Troubleshooting Library Issues

262

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Recommendations for Using Libraries


It is recommended to organize your libraries as follows: The Embedded Library should serve as your project library, containing project-specific objects that are always available and editable, and saved with the project. Any project-specific object that you modify frequently should be placed in the Embedded Library. Only embed those objects that are project-specific. Try to keep the Embedded Library small. Company Libraries and other standard libraries should be located on a dedicated BIM Server, to enable one-step updates which are then available to all users, including solo and Teamwork project users. When you archive a project, use the PLA file format. It is NOT recommended to save all objects in the Embedded Library. See also Troubleshooting Library Issues.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

263

Configuration

Embedded Library
The Embedded Library stores custom, project-specific objects in the project itself (rather than in your file system), to ensure that they are always available and editable.

The Embedded Library may contain: Object files you create and save yourself (e.g. Patch, Stair, Trusses, Custom Object, Custom Door/Window components) Image files loaded for use as Surface textures or other purposes Any object file that you browse for, choose and add to this library, including Web Objects downloaded through GDL Web Control Loaded.txt files that function as macros Note: List Schemes (from the Calculation function) will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the Embedded Library. If you want to use a custom object in several projects, it is better to place it into a Company Library stored on a BIM Server that is accessible to all users, rather than save it to an Embedded Library.

264

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Embedded objects exist only in that particular project and can be used only in that project. (In contrast, objects of a linked library can exist in several projects.) If you delete an object from the Embedded Library, it is gone. If you edit the script of an embedded object, that modification will occur right there, in the Embedded Library of that particular project. See Editing the Script of a GDL Object. For any selected object listed in the Embedded Library, you can view its properties below. If the object also exists in a linked library, that information is also shown.

Related Topics: Add Objects to Embedded Library Manage Embedded Objects Embedded Objects in Teamwork

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

265

Configuration

Add Objects to Embedded Library


From Library Manager Embed Placed Objects from a Library By creating a custom Object By loading an object file By Creating a Hotlinked Module From Library Manager
To add any object file to your Embedded Library, go to Library Manager and do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired object file, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) The chosen object file will now appear in the Embedded Library in Library Manager. Click Browse for Embedded Objects from the Add buttons pop-up list.

Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the file into the Embedded Objects folder of Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.

Embed Placed Objects from a Library


Use this feature to embed all the objects placed from a linked library or BIM Server Library into the project. (In Teamwork, only objects that are in your current local copy of the project will be embedded.) This function is useful to ensure that the objects you need will always be available in this project, because they will be embedded. Note: Embedding an object will also automatically load any needed macros along with it.

266

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

If you use this command, the original linked library or BIM Server Library will be removed from the project. Important: Embedding a library does not embed the entire contents of the library; it will only embed those objects which have been placed into the project. If you are in Teamwork: It is possible that other users have placed objects from a BIM Server library that you want to embed. If the other users have not yet sent these changes to the server, those placed objects will not be embedded, because they are not available to your local copy of the project. But since the source library will be removed as part of the embed process, those objects will consequently be shown as Missing. To avoid this situation, ensure that all users have sent in their changes before you embed a BIM Server Library of a Teamwork Project. To embed a librarys placed objects into your project: 1. Select the library folder from the Library Manager. 2. Click the Embed icon. (If no objects from the selected library have been placed, this icon is grey, since there is nothing to embed.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

267

Configuration

3. The appearing dialog box gives you two options associated with the embedding process:

Also embed surfaces, zone stamps and property objects. This is usually relevant only if you are trying to embed objects from an ArchiCAD library. Surfaces, zone stamps and property objects are accessory GDL library parts that have been written into certain objects. Check this box to embed these parts as well. Note: It is usually unnecessary to embed objects from an ArchiCAD library; the Consolidate function is a better technique for streamlining your ArchiCAD libraries. See Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries. Do Not Embed Duplicates: Click this to avoid duplicates when embedding objects. Any objects that already exist in other linked libraries will not be embedded. 4. Click Embed.

By creating a custom Object


Most objects created by you (e.g. using StairMaker, TrussMaker, RoofMaker) will be added to your projects Embedded library automatically. For example, if you create a custom Stair with StairMaker and click OK to place it, the Save Library Part dialog box appears automatically and prompts you to save the new stair to the Embedded Library:

268

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Similarly, objects saved with the Save Selection as GDL Object will save the resulting files as embedded objects. With custom-created objects drawn by you and saved from the 3D window, you can either save the object to the Embedded library or to a folder of your choice.

By loading an object file


Individual objects not part of the project libraries can be used in your projects via the Load Other Object commands in the corresponding tool settings dialog boxes. Such objects are automatically stored as Embedded Objects.

By Creating a Hotlinked Module


Placing a module will add the source files entire Embedded library to your host files embedded library. The newly added Embedded library can be seen in your Library Manager, inside the automatically created Hotlinks folder of your Embedded library. See Embedded Library Parts under Source File Data Interpretation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

269

Configuration

Manage Embedded Objects


Select any object file from the Embedded Library folder of Library Manager.

Use the icons to: Duplicate the object. The new object, with a new name and assigned a separate GUID, appears alongside the original object in the Embedded Library folder. Export the object. Browse a folder location on your machine to which to save the object. Add new folder to the Embedded Library folder. Delete the object. Important: Deleting an object from the Embedded Library folder deletes that object file for good; you cannot retrieve it unless you earlier saved it to another location (in that case, you can Add it again to the Embedded Library). Deleting an object from the Embedded Library means that all placed instances of that object file will disappear from your project and be replaced by an orange-colored dot.

The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if an Embedded object is selected, gives you feedback on the file name, the object type, file size, and number of placed instances. If desired, change the file name by typing into the Name field.

270

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Linked Libraries
Linked Libraries include the standard ArchiCAD library loaded by default, as well as any other libraries you add. In contrast to the objects of the Embedded Library, these libraries are linked folders, or.lcf or.pla files. In Teamwork mode, there are no linked libraries - only an Embedded Library and BIM Server Libraries.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

271

Configuration

Add a Linked Library


To add a linked library to your solo ArchiCAD project, go to Library Manager and do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired library file or folder, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) Click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, to narrow the available files to Library files. Library files include.pla, .lcf, and any folder. Note: If you add a folder containing a.pla file to your Linked Libraries folder, be aware that the library parts in the.pla file at the top of the hierarchy will be read. However, if the folder contains additional.pla files at a deeper level of the hierarchy, those.pla files will not be read. The solution is to add these .pla file to your project as separate files, rather than adding the folder that contains them.

Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the library file into the Linked Libraries folder of Library Manager. The chosen library file or folder will now appear in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager. When you are finished, click OK to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. Alternatively, you can reload libraries without closing Library manager: from the green Refresh/ Reload icon in Library Manager, choose Reload libraries and apply all changes.

The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if a Linked Library (file or folder) is selected, gives you feedback on items Path and (in case it is a file) its Last Modified date. This panel also displays the number of placed objects from this library, with the number of placed instances of each, as well as any libraries that contain duplicate objects. If the selected linked library is unavailable, the number of the projects missing objects and instances which originate from this unavailable library are also listed.

272

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

See also Unavailable Libraries.

See also Embed Placed Objects from a Library.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

273

Configuration

BIM Server Libraries


BIM Server Libraries are libraries located on a server, but added to your project. You can add a BIM Server Library to any project, either solo or Teamwork (provided that you can access the BIM Server). The advantage of using server libraries over linked libraries is that whenever a company library is updated and refreshed on the BIM Server, this library is updated for all users, both solo (after reloading the library) and Teamwork (after doing a Send and Receive). In Teamwork, the BIM Server Libraries ensure that all users have access to libraries, even when they are working remotely over the internet. To use a BIM Server Library in either a Teamwork project or a solo project, the library must first be uploaded to a BIM Server; and then it must be added to the project using ArchiCADs Library Manager.

Related Topics: Add BIM Server Library Manage BIM Server Libraries Upload a Library to BIM Server Upload Individual Objects to BIM Server Embed Placed Objects from a Library Libraries in Teamwork

274

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Add BIM Server Library


Once it has been uploaded to a BIM Server, a library can be added to any ArchiCAD project, whether solo or Teamwork. For information on uploading to the server, see Upload a Library to BIM Server. You can access libraries on BIM Servers even if you are currently working on a solo project, as long as you have a valid user name and password enabling access to the server. Note: In a Teamwork project, you must also have the access right of Libraries - Add/ Remove in order to add or remove BIM Server Libraries from the project. To add a BIM Server Library to your project, do the following: 1. Open Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). 2. Select BIM Server Libraries (either this item or any of the loaded BIM server libraries) from the hierarchy. In a Teamwork project, the control lights appear. Click Reserve. 3. From the pop-up alongside the Add button, choose Use BIM Server Library. Note: If you are in a Teamwork project, this command appears only after you click Reserve, as directed above. 4. Choose a BIM Server (enter user name and password as necessary). The list of libraries uploaded to that server appears. 5. The Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box appears.

6. Choose a library and click Add. The chosen library will now appear in the BIM Server Libraries folder of the Library Manager. 7. When you are finished, click OK to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

275

Configuration

Alternatively, you can reload libraries without closing Library Manager: from the green Refresh/ Reload icon in Library Manager, choose Reload libraries and apply all changes.

Synchronizing with the Server Library


When you add a library to the BIM Server Libraries folder, a local copy of the library will be created on your machine (regardless of whether you are working in solo or Teamwork mode). If you are working in Teamwork mode, this copy is synchronized with the server data every time you Send or Receive changes. If you are working in solo mode, this copy is refreshed every time you click Reload libraries and apply all changes in the Library Manager. This reloading also occurs if you have made modifications in the Library Manager, then click OK to close the Library Manager. Note: The operating system has a limit of 256 on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. Consequently, you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM server library, because the library path is too long.

For details, see Library Path Too Long. See also Libraries in Teamwork.

276

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Manage BIM Server Libraries


To use a BIM Server Library in a project (either solo or Teamwork), that library must first be uploaded to the BIM Server, using the Manage BIM Server Libraries dialog box. Use this dialog box to view, upload and otherwise manage the libraries on any BIM Server. Note: In a Teamwork project, you must be an Administrator (either Project or Server Administrator) to use this dialog box.

Manage BIM Server Libraries Dialog Box


This dialog box is available: from File > Libraries and Objects > Manage BIM Server Libraries from the Library Manager: open the Add buttons pop-up list; click Use BIM Server Libraries to open the Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box; click Manage BIM Server Libraries

Click Upload to add another library to this server (see details below) or Remove to remove it.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

277

Configuration

Source Libraries
Whenever you upload a library to the BIM Server, a link to its Source Library is established. Click Relocate to link a selected library on the BIM Server to a new source library path location. You cannot edit the contents of a library via the BIM Server management controls. However, if changes are made in a Source library (e.g. new parts added to the Company Library), click Refresh to ensure that these changes are also made on this server. Extract will extract the contents of the selected library to the location of your choice. This can be useful if the source library has for some reason become unavailable, or if you do not have the access right needed to edit the content of the Source library, yet you need a copy of the Source library. Tip: It is recommended to upload all your companys libraries to a dedicated GRAPHISOFT BIM Server.

Upload a Library to BIM Server


Note: In a Teamwork Project, only a Server Administrator or Project Administrator can upload libraries to a BIM Server. 1. Go to File > Libraries and Objects > Manage Server Libraries. 2. Choose the BIM Server to which you want to upload a library. 3. Click Upload. 4. Browse for the Source library you need. Uploaded libraries can include PLA or LCF files, or any folders. You cannot upload individual gsm files, just lcf, pla, and regular folders. For each selected library in the list, information is displayed on its source path, the date of upload and the last time it was refreshed from its Source library. 5. Click Choose. The library is uploaded and a link to its Source library is established. See Source Libraries, above. 6. Close the dialog box. Once libraries are uploaded, individual users can add these BIM Server Libraries to projects, either solo or Teamwork. See also Add BIM Server Library.

Upload Individual Objects to BIM Server


To upload individual objects to the BIM Server, first place them into a folder, then upload the folder.

278

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

BIM Server Library Management Workflow:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

279

Configuration

Reload/Refresh Libraries
Reload Libraries
Changes made via Library Manager will take place when you click OK to close the Library Manager. For example, if you add a library to the project, clicking OK will reload your libraries (and load the newly added one) and close the Library Manager. You can also reload libraries without closing Library Manager: from the green Refresh/Reload icon in Library Manager, choose Reload libraries and apply all changes. All libraries will be reloaded, provided that you have made modifications that necessitate a library reload.

Refresh Status of Placed Objects


From the green Refresh/Reload icon in Library Manager, choose Refresh status of placed objects: this will refresh the list of missing and substituted objects in the Library Manager tree structure.

280

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Remove Library from Project


Select any Linked Library or BIM Server Library from the Library Manager. (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). Click the Remove icon to remove the library.

If you place objects into the project from a library, and then remove the library, then the placed objects will be listed in the Missing Objects folder of Library Manager. In the project model, they will be represented by fuzzy dots.

Removed libraries can be re-linked to your project at any time; then the missing objects will be found. Note: The number of missing objects is minimized in the following situation: if both ArchiCAD Libraries 16 and 17 are loaded, and ArchiCAD Library 16 is then removed, then the ArchiCAD 17 Library will automatically replace the missing placed objects from the AC Library 16 with their updated counterparts from AC Library 17. If you subsequently re-link AC Library 16, the placed instances which were automatically replaced with AC 17 counterparts will remain as-is.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

281

Configuration

Troubleshooting Library Issues


Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Find and Select Missing Library Parts Unavailable Libraries Libraries with Duplicate Objects Substituted Objects Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries Delete Unused Linked Libraries Library Path Too Long Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report
Items in the Missing Objects folder of the Library Manager are missing from the project either because they were embedded objects, and have been deleted (you cannot retrieve them, since they no longer exist) or because they were located in libraries that have been deleted from the project or moved to a different location (to retrieve these objects, re-Add the unavailable libraries to Library Manager, then click refresh. See Refresh Status of Placed Objects.

Missing objects are listed in the Library Manager together with: the name of the source library if any, with its last known location, from which the missing objects originate. number of missing object, plus the number of placed instances of each missing object. For each missing object, the number of its placed instances is shown in parentheses.

282

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Objects listed under Missing from unknown library are missing objects about which no other information is available - their source library (or libraries) are not known.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

283

Configuration

The Library Loading Report appears if the project is missing any objects or if objects are duplicated in different libraries. In the Library Loading Report, the red folder at the top shows the total number of missing objects, followed by the total number of their placed instances in parentheses.

The Library Loading Report gives you an overview of problematic libraries (those containing duplicates) and problematic objects (those that are missing or which have several possible substitutes), with the number placed instances of each shown in parentheses.

284

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

In both the Library Manager and the Library Loading Report, click on any library about which you need more information, then click the Info button.

The appearing Information dialog summarizes all available data about the selected library: the total number of objects contained in the library; the list of placed or missing objects; the number of placed instances; lists of placed duplicates. The missing items cannot be displayed on the plan. (The place of missing library parts is indicated by fuzzy dots.)

Objects Temporarily Missing


In a Teamwork project, you may encounter a category in the Library Manager or Library Loading Report entitled Temporarily Missing. This may occur when a user makes changes in a BIM Server Library that result in placed objects being updated in some way. If those objects are reserved by any user, then all users joined in to the project will encounter the Temporarily Missing category. This will be resolved as soon as the user(s) who have reserved the objects do a Send & Receive; then the objects will no longer be missing.

Find and Select Missing Library Parts


To find and select missing library parts in the active window, use the Find & Select function. See also Find and Select Elements.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

285

Configuration

1. In the first Criteria row in the Find and Select dialog box, choose a GDL object type element. 2. In the next row, for the next criterion, choose Library Part. 3. As the value, select Is Missing. Note: You can also choose Is Not Missing as the value; this will select all instances of the defined GDL Object types, except for the ones whose library object is missing.

4. Click the Plus button to execute the Find & Select function.

Note: You may wish to zoom to the selection: right-click in the window, then choose Zoom to Selection from the context menu.

286

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Unavailable Libraries
If you have modified the name of a library folder, or changed its location in the file hierarchy, then the next time you open ArchiCAD, the library folder listed in the Library Manager dialog box will be shown as Unavailable. (An unavailable source library and its last known path is listed only if it was available to the project at an earlier time.) Placed objects from unavailable libraries are listed in the Missing Objects folder; in the project model, they are represented by fuzzy green dots.

The solution is to click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, and browse for the library file under its new name or location.

Libraries with Duplicate Objects


This section of Library Manager is visible if any two project libraries contain one or more of the same objects; these libraries are listed in pairs. For each such pair of libraries, the following information is listed: Number of duplicate objects Number of placed duplicate objects Number of placed duplicate instances
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

287

Configuration

Select any library pair and click the Info icon for more information.

In the Information box, click the black arrow to choose the list format you need: List placed duplicates List all duplicates List all placeable duplicates List all non-placeable duplicates The problem with having a lot of duplicate objects in your projects is twofold: every time you load your libraries, you will be loading many superfluous objects and/or libraries, causing unnecessary slowdowns; and the presence of duplicates can lead to further ambiguities if you should modify a duplicate library object or save it under a new name. See Substituted Objects. There are several possible strategies to resolve the issue of duplicates: If the Libraries with Duplicate Objects are ArchiCAD Libraries, it is best to Consolidate. See Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries. If all the placed objects from one of the libraries are duplicates (i.e. these objects also exist in the other library), you can remove the first library altogether. If the duplicated libraries are not ArchiCAD libraries, you might consider comparing the two libraries contents manually (open the library folder at its source and view the objects), and then delete the duplicates from one of the libraries. If the duplicate placed objects are project-specific, you should embed them into the project. This will also eliminate the library from the project. See Embed Placed Objects from a Library.

288

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Substituted Objects
An object in this category has been placed in the project, but several possible substitutes for this object (that is, objects with the same ID as the placed object, though they may be named differently) exist in at least two linked libraries. ArchiCAD randomly uses one or the other source for the objects placed instances.

To avoid this situation, you should manually replace the instances of the substituted object with a single one of its possible duplicates from the loaded libraries. (To do this, you can use Find & Select to locate the placed instances of the substituted object. Then choose a specific library object from the loaded libraries to replace it.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

289

Configuration

Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries


The yellow Consolidate Libraries icon in the Library Manager should be used if you have loaded multiple ArchiCAD libraries, or if the loaded ArchiCAD library is not the latest version.

Consolidating ArchiCAD libraries is recommended, because it replaces the old ArchiCAD libraries with the latest library, but also loads the requisite Migration Libraries to make sure that older library parts will be compatible and available. Migration Libraries are much smaller than the full ArchiCAD libraries, so this consolidation process will save you from a great many superfluous objects. Click the Consolidate icon to bring up the following dialog box:

Clicking the Consolidate command will: load the newest-version ArchiCAD library, if it is not yet loaded remove ArchiCAD libraries with lower version numbers load the relevant migration libraries (These migration libraries will have already been installed on the computer, as part of ArchiCAD installation.) automatically replace placed objects from the older libraries (13-16 only) with their latest compatible version in the ArchiCAD 17 library See also Migrating Libraries to ArchiCAD 17.

290

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Delete Unused Linked Libraries


Library Manager tells you whether you have actually placed any objects from your linked libraries. If not, you dont need that library and you can remove it from the project. In this example, there are no objects placed from the ArchiCAD 10 library; you can remove it.

To remove a library folder, select it from Library Manager and click the blue X Remove icon.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

291

Configuration

Library Path Too Long


The Windows operating system has a limit of 256 on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. Consequently, you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM Server library, because the library path is too long. To resolve this problem, try one of these solutions: Simplify the librarys file structure at its source. This solution requires that you have Server Administrator rights. Go to the source file of the BIM Server Library, and do one of the following: - Create a container file (.lcf) out of the library folder, using File > Libraries and Objects > Create Container. Next, go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Relocate command to browse the location of server librarys new.lcf source file. - Alternatively, create a different, simplified folder structure for the library (e.g. move the library folder to a higher position in the folder hierarchy so that the file path becomes shorter). Next, go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Refresh command to update the server library with its newly restructured source. Modify the destination of the local library copy. Go to Options > Work Environment > Special Folders, and enter a different location for your Teamwork Local Data folder, which is the destination of your local copies of BIM Server libraries. The new location should be at a higher level of the folder hierarchy, thus making the path shorter.

292

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Library Container File


The extension.lcf identifies a Library Container file. The default ArchiCAD 17 Library is stored in an.lcf, but you can also create your own Library Container file, or extract its contents, using the File > Libraries and Objects > Create/Extract a Container command. Since the Library Container file is a single file, yet contains all the objects used in your project, it lets you keep all the objects used in your projects in one place, while keeping hierarchies intact within the.lcf.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

293

Configuration

Library Updates
GRAPHISOFT updates its standard library parts on a regular basis. To check for the latest library updates, you should enable the Check for Updates option in Options > Work Environment > Network and Update Options. This means you will be notified, upon starting ArchiCAD, if a new library version matching your ArchiCAD language version is available, which you can then choose to download if needed. See Network And Update Options.

294

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Favorites
The Favorites feature allows you to save sets of configured tool settings by name. Load these Favorite settings as the current default for the active tool to recreate a specific element at any time. Favorites are saved with your Project file. A Favorites stored settings include: The elements attributes, including the line type, fill pattern and pen color, as well as surface choices In the case of Library Parts, the name of the Library Part All of the elements dimensions that can be entered in the settings dialog boxes for the element, e.g., wall thickness and height (but not length) If the Favorites refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, those attributes will be missing. If the Favorites refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project.

Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

295

Configuration

Load Favorite Settings as Default


1. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). The Favorites Palette lists the Favorites for the active tool only, as for the Column tool shown here:

Note: If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. 2. Double-click the Favorite name to load its settings as default tool settings. The Default Settings now shown in the Info Box are those of the Favorite you just loaded. Note: You can opt to exclude certain Favorite parameters from being loaded. See Customize Favorite Parameters.

Favorites Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette
296
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Save Favorite Settings


Save Favorite Settings by using either the Favorites Palette, or the Tool Settings dialog boxes.

Save Favorite Settings using the Favorites Palette:


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. Use the Info Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. Optionally, place element(s) in the project using these settings. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). Click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.

6. Choose Save Current Default Settings to store these settings as a Favorite. (Alternatively, select the placed element and choose the Save Last Selections command from this pop-up.) 7. Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette. See also Favorites Palette.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

297

Configuration

Save Favorite Settings using the Tool Settings dialog box:


1. Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. 2. Use the Tool Settings Dialog Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. 3. Click the Favorites button, at the top of the Settings dialog box, to open the Apply Favorites dialog box.

4. Click the Save Current Settings as Favorite button. 5. Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette.

Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

298

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Customize Favorite Parameters


Use the Favorites Preferences dialog box to if you want to ignore certain parameters when loading Favorite Settings. The Favorites Preferences dialog box controls which of the different element types parameters are NOT to be saved with Favorites. 1. Choose Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

2. Use the Parameter Exclusion list (in the bottom half of the dialog box) to check the names of the parameters that you DO NOT want to apply with Favorites.

For example, if you check the Height parameter for Walls in the Parameter Exclusion list, then every time you load a Wall Favorite as the default settings, the saved Height of the Favorite Wall will be disregarded, and the default Wall Height will remain unaffected, even after you load the Favorite Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

299

Configuration

Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

300

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Apply Favorite to Placed Element


To apply Favorite settings to a placed element: 1. Select the element. 2. Open its Settings dialog box. 3. Click the Favorites button to display the Apply Favorites dialog box.

4. Choose the Favorite you need, then click Apply. 5. Click OK to close the Settings dialog box and apply the Favorite settings.

Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Favorites Palette

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

301

Configuration

Favorites Palette
Access this palette from Window > Palettes > Favorites. The Favorites Palette lists the favorites for the active tool only, by default. (If the Arrow or Marquee tool is active, then all favorites are listed.) If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. Sort Favorites by Name or Type: Click the corresponding caption to sort the list of favorites. To save and manage Favorites, click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.

Delete the selected Favorite (one at a time). Rename the selected Favorite (enter a new name in the appearing Rename Favorite dialog box). Save Current Default Settings: Saves the currently loaded default settings as a Favorite (regardless of the currently selected Favorite in the Favorites Palette). This command is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. Save Last Selection: Stores the settings of the last selected elements current settings as a new Favorite. If nothing is selected, this command is inactive. Redefine with current Default: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the default settings of that tool. This item is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

302

Configuration

Redefine with Last Selection: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the settings of the last selected element. Save Favorites: Exports the whole set of Favorites in a separate file. The file will be saved with the *.prf extension. Load Favorites: Load or merge a saved Favorites file. You can either merge it, or replace the current Favorites list.

When merging the two sets, if any Favorites have identical names, you will be prompted to skip or overwrite the original definition. Favorites Preferences. Use this dialog box to define the exclusion of parameters. See Customize Favorite Parameters.

Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Customize Favorite Parameters

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

303

Configuration

The ArchiCAD User Interface


This section introduces the main customizable palettes and menus in ArchiCAD.

Toolbox Info Box Menus Toolbars Shortcuts Palettes Pet Palettes

304

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Toolbox
The Toolbox shows a variety of tools for selection, 3D construction, 2D drawing and visualization. By default, the Toolbox is divided into Tool Groups -Select, Design, Document and More - to make it easier to locate the tool you need. Besides the standard set of tools, additional tools can appear in the Toolbox depending on the installation and the available Add-Ons.

Display the Toolbox


If the Toolbox is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Toolbox command.

Customizing the Toolbox


Use the controls of the Options > Work Environment > Toolbox page to customize the contents and arrangement of your toolbox. See Toolbox Customization Dialog Box. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Toolbox context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Toolbox, then click the icon representing the Toolbox customization page.

. Specifically, you can customize your toolbox by organizing the tools into groups. Then store your customized Toolbox settings as part of a Tool Scheme in your Work Environment. (A Tool Scheme includes your work environment settings for the Toolbox, Info Box and Tool Settings dialog boxes.) See Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

305

Configuration

How to Open and Close Tool Groups Within the Toolbox


By default, the Toolbox shows all tools in all Tool Groups simultaneously. If the Toolbox becomes too unwieldy, use the open/close arrows at the top of each Tool Group to temporarily open and close these groups as needed. If the open/close arrows are not displayed, go to Options > Work Environment > Toolbox. Click on Tool Group Options, then uncheck the Always Keep Tool Groups Open option.

Now you will be able to open or close each Tool Group in the Toolbox separately.

306

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Info Box
An Info Box is available for each tool in the toolbox. When you activate a tool or select a placed element, its Info Box palette will display current settings for that tool/element. If several elements are selected, the Info Box displays the controls for the last selected element. The Info Box contains a condensed collection of input and parameter controls that are specific to the selected tool/element. While some of these controls are also available in the Tool Settings dialog box, the Info Box is a quicker way to access these controls, because it stays on screen while you work. By default, the Info Box is docked at the top of your workspace in a horizontal position. To show it vertically, dock it at either side of your screen. Let your cursor hover over an Info Box item to provide a Tool Tip if you are not sure what the icon represents.

You can use a scroll-mouse or the scrollbar to scroll through the contents of your Info Box. Selected/Editable: The current Info Box gives you feedback on the number of Selected Elements, as well as how many of those are Editable. Changes made to Info Box settings will affect the Editable elements. On the Floor Plan below, all Walls are selected; four of them have been locked for editing, as reflected in the Info Box:

Default Settings. If there is no selection, the Info Box displays the active tools Default Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

307

Configuration

Displaying the Info Box


If the Info Box is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Info Box command. The Info Box will show controls specific to the active tool or the selected element.

Customizing the Info Box


You can customize the order and visibility of panels in each Tools Info Box: go to Options > Work Environment and open the Info Box Customization Dialog Box. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Info Box context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Info Box, then click the icon representing the Info Box customization page:

Also available from this Info Box context menu: click a display preference for the Info Box Header location: at the left edge of the palette, or on top. See Info Box Customization Dialog Box.

308

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Menus
About Menus Menu Customization Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

309

Configuration

About Menus
When starting ArchiCAD with default settings, you will load the Standard Profile, which - along with other Work Environment settings - defines the default menu structure.

See Default Profiles in ArchiCAD. However, there are some commands and menus in ArchiCAD which are not displayed as part of this standard profile. Use the settings in the Options > Work Environment > Menus dialog box to customize the content of your menus.

Customizing Menus
Use the Menu Customization dialog box to customize any ArchiCAD menu. Any command or menu can be placed into or removed from any menu; the order of the commands within any menu is entirely customizable. Exception: Context menus are not customizable. You can store your customized menu command settings as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment and Menu Customization Dialog Box.

310

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Toolbars
About Toolbars Toolbar Customization Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

311

Configuration

About Toolbars
A toolbar is a collection of commands and/or menus displayed in icon or text form and grouped by topic.

Displaying Toolbars
To display a toolbar, choose its name from Window > Toolbars; or right-click the title bar of any toolbar on screen to display the list of defined toolbars. Click any toolbar in the list to display it.

Creating or Customizing Toolbars


Use the Toolbar Customization dialog box, accessed from Options > Work Environment > Toolbars, to create a new toolbar, or customize any of the available ones. You can also set whether a given command is represented on a toolbar by its name, its icon, or both. See Toolbar Customization Dialog Box.

312

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

An easy way to access this dialog box is to open any Toolbars context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the Toolbar, then click on Toolbars...:

You can store your customized toolbars as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment. The content of named toolbars are saved as part of a Command Layout Scheme. The on-screen display of toolbars is saved in a Palette Scheme.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

313

Configuration

Shortcuts
ArchiCAD is shipped with several predefined shortcut schemes. To view or print out a list of the shortcuts of the Work Environment, go to Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts, and click the Show Shortcut List in Browser button at the bottom of the Keyboard Shortcut Preview Panel.

To customize a shortcut command, use the Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts: choose a command from the list on the left, then enter the desired shortcut combination in the field at the right, then click Assign. For details, see Shortcut Customization Dialog Box. Apart from a few non-customizable shortcuts (listed at the bottom of the Show Shortcut list), all shortcuts in any scheme are customizable. Changes to the selected Shortcut scheme are applied when you press OK and close the dialog box. You can store your customized Shortcut settings as part of a Shortcut Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

314

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Palettes
ArchiCADs palettes help you construct, modify and locate elements. Each palette can be shown or hidden separately using the Window > Palettes command. The main palettes (Toolbox, Info Box, Quick Options and Navigator) can be enabled all at once, using the Window > Palettes > Show Main Palettes Only command. Each of these palettes is described in detail in the ArchiCAD documentation:

Toolbox Info Box Quick Options Palette Navigator Palette Control Box Coordinates Palette
Two of these palettes - the Control Box and Coordinates - may be familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD. They are not displayed by default, because their commands are available from other parts of the interface. To display either of these palettes, go to Window > Palettes and choose the desired palette(s).

Customizing Palette Schemes


To customize your palette scheme (a saved configuration of palettes), set up your palettes manually in the ArchiCAD workspace by doing any or all of the following: Show or hide palettes as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Palettes) Show or hide toolbars as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Toolbars) Change the shape of a palette by choosing a shape option from its context menu. The Info Box, Coordinates Palette and Control Box palettes have shape options - for example, extended or compact - that you can set using the context menu opened by right-clicking the palette on screen.

Change the position and size of a palette by dragging the palettes to a desired position. Dock palettes as needed (Windows only) Use the Scheme Options page of Palette Schemes to manage (Store, Rename, Delete, Redefine, Export, Import) and apply Palette Schemes: go to Options > Work Environment > Palette Schemes.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

315

Configuration

See Scheme Options. Palette Schemes differ from the rest of the Work Environment schemes: the settings they contain are defined not in the Work Environment dialog box; instead, Palette Schemes settings reflect the way you manually set up your palettes in your workspace. Note: While the show/hide status of a toolbar is saved in a palette scheme, its content is defined as part of a Command Layout Scheme.

Docking Palettes (Windows Only)


Palettes can float over your workspace, and if a floating palette is in the way, you can either close it or drag it away. However, many ArchiCAD palettes can also be docked (in Windows only) at an edge of the workspace. A docked palette is fixed at the edge of your screen, with no workspace underneath it: this way, if you maximize the active window, the entire workspace is visible. A docked palette can be made to float again at any time. To dock a palette, click on its title bar (the drag symbol will appear) and drag it to one side or the top or bottom of the screen until the drag symbol hits either the side or the top/bottom limit.

Release the cursor to dock the palette. Note: When dragging a palette in Windows, its anchor point is the drag symbol (not a palette edge).

How to Un-Dock a Palette


To pop a palette out of its dock and into a free-floating position, just click and drag on its header. Alternatively, double-click the palette; double-click it again to re-dock.

Docking Groups of Palettes


You can dock several palettes at either side of the screen and snap them to each other, forming a palette group. Click and drag to dock the first palette. To insert a second palette above the first, click and drag the second palette onto the title bar of the first. To insert a second palette below the first, click and drag the second palette to the line at the bottom of the first one. You can also place two (or more) palettes side by side, sitting atop a single palette (or vice versa), as part of the same group. If you resize any palette that is part of a palette group, the rest of the palettes in the group will be resized automatically.

316

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

The width of all palettes in the group are resized simultaneously (by dragging the edge to the right or left).

To set how much of each palette should be visible on screen, drag the splitter bars up or down, for palettes stacked on top of each other, or right/left, for palettes grouped next to each other. (The splitter bars are the lines which divide each palette from the others.)

Limitations on Docking Palettes


Not every palette can be docked to all sides of the screen. The following palettes/dialog boxes cannot be docked: Mark-Up Tools; Selections; Library Loading Report; Pet Palettes; Element Information; Find and Select; RoofMaker; Solid Element Operations; Sign in; Text Formatting; Profile Manager; Quick Layers.

Suspend Docking Function


To suspend the docking function while dragging a palette, press Ctrl (Windows).

Snapping Palettes (MacOS Only)


On a MacOS, you can snap ArchiCAD floating palettes to each other, to the edge of the screen. Palettes will snap to each other if you pull them within a given range of each other. The palette edge (not the cursor) is the docking anchor. If a palette is snapped to the bottom or to the right of another, then both palettes can be dragged as a single object. If a palette is snapped onto the top or to the left of another palette, then they will not stick together when you move them.

Suspend Snapping Function


To suspend the snapping function while dragging a palette, press Cmd (MacOS).
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

317

Configuration

Pet Palettes
A pet palette is a collection of icons (representing commands and relevant options) which pops up during graphical input and editing operations. In some cases, the pet palette appears during input (as when inputting a polyline), but in most cases the pet palette appears after you have placed an element, then selected the element for further editing. To access the pet palette, place your cursor on an editable edge, node, or surface, and left-click. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge, node or surface) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need. Use the shortcuts F and Shift+F (Opt+F) to move to the next/previous icon in the current pet palette.

You cannot customize the contents of a pet palette. You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. The pet palette will either follow your cursor around on screen as you work (like a pet on a leash), or be placed in a preferred spot (and told to stay), depending on which pet palette movement option you specify. To set these preferences, use the Pet Palette movement controls at Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes.

318

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

See Dialog Boxes and Palettes.

You can store these Pet Palette settings as part of a User Preference Scheme in your Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

319

Configuration

Customizing your Work Environment


As you get used to working with ArchiCAD, you will develop personal preferences for using the programs features and arranging the various palettes, toolbars and menus on screen. You will set most of these options using the Options > Work Environment dialog box. For a brief description of every available setting in the Work Environment Dialog Box, see Work Environment Dialog Box.

You can customize any of these settings while you work: just open the Work Environment dialog box, change the setting you need, and press OK. The setting will take effect.

320

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Use the splitter bars within each page to display the text as needed.

Work Environment settings are saved not as part of the project, but in a local folder on your computer.

Menu Customization Dialog Box Shortcut Customization Dialog Box Toolbox Customization Dialog Box Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization Info Box Customization Dialog Box Work Environment Schemes Saving Your Customized Work Environment Profiles How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

321

Configuration

Work Environment Schemes


Work Environment settings (Options > Work Environment) are divided into six self-contained schemes. Each scheme is a thematic collection of settings.

1. User Preference Schemes. These include a wide variety of your preferences for functions such as Guide Line functions, coordinate input, and how certain dialog boxes should appear. 2. Company Standard Schemes. These settings are typically standardized within a firm. See details at: Data Safety & Integrity Network And Update Options Special Folders See also Creating a Custom Install Package in Getting Started, accessible from ArchiCADs Help menu. 3. Shortcut Schemes For more information, see Shortcuts. 4. Tool Schemes. A tool scheme includes settings for the Toolbox, the Info Box and the Tool Settings dialog boxes. 5. Palette Schemes. These settings are defined outside the Work Environment dialog box; a palette scheme saves the current on-screen status of your Palettes. See Palettes. 322
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

6. Command Layout Schemes. Command Layout Schemes include settings for your Toolbars and Menus. See Toolbars and Menus. Click on the name of the settings you wish to alter (for example, Selection and Element Information). As soon as you make a change to any Work Environment setting, the scheme name at the top of the settings page changes to Custom:

When you finish making changes, press OK to close the dialog box and apply current settings. The latest Custom settings will remain intact even after you close and restart ArchiCAD. However, every new settings change redefines the Custom scheme according to your latest change. If you want to keep your modifications saved on the long term, it is advisable to store the settings of your Custom scheme in a named scheme. For more information, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

323

Configuration

Saving Your Customized Work Environment


If you have customized a number of settings in Options > Work Environment, you may wish to save them for future use in other projects, so that your personalized Work Environment is ready for you when you start to work. Individual settings are organized into six Schemes; saving your settings occurs at the Scheme level. Unlike Project settings, which are saved with the project file, Work Environment Schemes are saved in a local folder on your computer. The Scheme Options screen appears in the Work Environment dialog box if you have selected one of the six scheme sets from the tree structure at the left side of the dialog box. There is one Scheme Options page for each of the six schemes.

See Scheme Options. You can store any or all of the schemes by name; you can also combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface (Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles), you can export and import Schemes and Profiles: this enables you to transport your favorite settings to other computers, or to keep them after installing a new version of ArchiCAD. See Profiles for more information. It is entirely possible to use ArchiCAD successfully without saving schemes and profiles; you can just adjust settings as you work. However, the option to save settings according to named schemes, and then to combine schemes into profiles, is useful for CAD managers, for offices working in teams, and for individual users who might want to alternate among several different sets of customized settings.

Store a Customized Scheme


To store the settings of a Scheme, choose the scheme set whose settings you want to store, using the left-hand tree structure of the Work Environment Dialog Box. (For example, if you have 324

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

changed shortcuts and want to save them, click on Shortcut Schemes.) This brings up Scheme Options, where you can store, rename, delete, redefine, export, or import schemes. See Scheme Options.

Apply a Scheme
To apply a stored scheme, choose the desired scheme from the Apply Scheme pop-up at the top of any of Work Environments settings pages.

You can also apply a scheme using the Scheme Options page of Work Environment: choose one of the defined schemes, then either double-click it, or click the Apply Scheme button.

Once you apply the scheme and press OK to close the Work Environment dialog box, your ArchiCAD program will adjust itself to reflect the settings you have stored in that scheme.

Creating an Office-Standard Work Environment


The ability to save and rename any combination of Work Environment Settings can be useful not only for the individual user, but also for encouraging consistency among multiple users on a particular project. CAD managers can create office-standard Work Environment Profiles and install them as defaults when installing the ArchiCAD program at multiple workstations. For more information, see the Getting Started booklet, available from the ArchiCAD Help menu.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

325

Configuration

Profiles
If you have customized and saved multiple schemes, you may want to store and apply them together: in this case, combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface, you can export and import Profiles to use on other computers. For details on configuring and applying profiles, see Profile Options. Notes about Profiles: Profiles themselves do not contain settings; they are just a collection of schemes. A profile does not have to contain all six scheme possibilities. Once you start working, you dont have to apply entire profiles at once; you can apply schemes one by one. You can save a Custom scheme as part of a profile, but the Custom scheme will be given a name when the profile is created. Schemes named Custom cannot be exported.

Define and Store a New Profile


To assemble any combination of schemes into a profile, go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page. See Profile Options for details.

Apply a Profile
1. Go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page.

2. From the list of Stored Profiles, choose the desired Profile. Double-click to apply the profile, or click the Apply Schemes of Profile button. 3. Click OK to close the Work Environment dialog box.

326

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Configuration

Default Profiles in ArchiCAD


ArchiCAD is shipped with three default Profiles: Standard, Visualization and Layouting. When you first start ArchiCAD, the default Work Environment Profile is set to Standard. These predefined profiles are designed to get you up and running with ArchiCAD. Naturally, you or your office CAD manager can reconfigure these profiles as needed. The Standard profile is designed to reflect the workflow in common architectural practice. Menus, commands, palette layout, and toolbar visibility are optimized to give you easy access to the tools and functions you need to build up your Virtual Building. The Standard toolbar and Mini-Navigator toolbar (for easy switching between windows) are visible, and your Toolbox displays each tool individually. The Layouting Profile places commonly used layout-related and publishing commands within reach. The Layout Book menu now appears, the Toolbox is minimized to show only the Documenting tools, and the Navigator/Organizer is located at the left edge of the screen. Two specialized toolbars are now visible: Layouts & Drawings, and Standard for Layouting. The Visualization Profile is useful when you reach the stage of setting up and creating output from 3D images, such as Fly-Throughs and PhotoRenderings. The 3D Visualization menu now appears, so that all commands related to the 3D window, 3D navigation and 3D output are collected in a single menu. The 3D Visualization toolbar provides quick access to many of these same commands. In this profile, the Navigator is not displayed, and the Toolbox displays only Selection and Design tools.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

327

Configuration

How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer


To make your schemes or profiles available to a network or other users, or to transfer them to another computer, you can export them. Use Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles to export and import profiles to/from folders of your choice. In this operation, profiles are.xml files which refer to the schemes (also.xml files) contained within them. For details, see Profile Options. Use Options > Work Environment > Scheme Options to export and import schemes (as.xml files) to/from folders of your choice. See Scheme Options. Please note: While you can import/export Work Environment schemes among computers using varying operating systems, this is not recommended, because - due to the differences between Windows and MacOS - some of the imported shortcuts, menus and palette schemes may not correspond to your system standards.

328

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Interaction
Navigation Origins Elevation Selection On-Screen Input Aids Editing Elements Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

329

Interaction

Navigation
How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows Zoom Oriented View Fit in Window Pan Navigator Preview (2D) Navigation in the 3D Window Navigator Palette Organizer Palette

330

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows


1. The easiest way to switch among the different windows is to use the maps in the Navigator Palette. Just double-click on the item you want to see. See Navigator Palette. 2. The predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar (available from Windows > Toolbars) is another way to quickly switch windows

3. Or use the View > Navigate hierarchical menu.

Navigation Shortcuts
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to navigate among windows: go to Floor Plan Window: F2 go to 3D Window: F3 go to 3D Window (Perspective): Shift+F3 go to 3D Window (Axonometry): Ctrl+F3 go to last Section window: F6 go to last opened Layout: F7

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

331

Interaction

Zoom
In 2D and 3D windows, you can zoom in on details, or use zoom out to display more elements. The Zoom control on the bottom scrollbar gives you feedback on the current zoom.

To return to Actual Size (zoom at 100%), double-click the Zoom button. When you save the current contents of the screen as a view, you can opt to save either the current Zoom value in View Settings, or else the Fit in Window zoom level. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) For more information, see: View Settings, Pan, Oriented View. There are several techniques you can use to achieve Zoom effects:

Zoom with Mouse Scroll Button


If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, use it for zooming in on (or out of) the area where the cursor is located. If you dont have a scrolling button on your mouse, you can still emulate its operation: First click the Scroll-Zoom button on the bottom scrollbar.

Then click anywhere in the window; move the cursor upwards to zoom in, downwards to zoom out. The greater distance you move the cursor, the greater the scope of the zoom. Click again to activate the zoom.

Zoom with Keyboard


You can use numeric keypad shortcuts to achieve the scrolling zoom effect: press the + key for zooming in and the - key for zooming out.

Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons


Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window to activate the corresponding shortcut.

Draw a rectangle around the detail you want to enlarge with the Zoom In cursor. The area enclosed by the rectangle is enlarged to the size of the current window. With Zoom Out, the entire current view is squeezed into the rectangle that you have defined. The operation is optimized so that no distortion will result. To rotate the current view in addition to zooming in/out, click Ctrl + Zoom In or Ctrl + Zoom Out. Draw a rotated rectangle at the desired angle. When you click again to complete the rectangle, the program will not only zoom in/out according to this rectangle, but will also rotate the view to reflect the rectangles rotation angle. 332
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

See also Oriented View. Note: To double the current magnification or reduction level, double-click the appropriate icon.

Zoom with Menu Commands


Choose View > Zoom > Zoom In or Zoom Out. Note: If these commands are not available in the View menu, you can use Options > Work Environment > Menus to add them.

For more information, see Customizing Menus. Zoom to Selection: Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements. (This is also available from the context menu, if you right-click in an empty space on the screen.) Previous/Next Zoom: If you wish to move one step back from your previous Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Home Zoom or Fit in Window operations, you can click its shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window.

Up to 20 previous steps are stored. To go to the next zoom, use the Next Zoom command or shortcut button.

Home Zoom
If you need to return frequently to a part of your project, you can define it as the home zoom by choosing the View > Zoom > Set Home Zoom command. You can return easily to this view by choosing the View > Zoom > Home Zoom command. This home zoom is saved with the project.

Predefined Zooms
Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose one of the predefined zoom values.

The pop-up menu commands allows you to save, access, rename and delete predefined zooms. Home Zooms are not included in the list of saved zooms.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

333

Interaction

See Home Zoom.

Save Zooms
You can save different zooms for future use: Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose Save Current Zoom.

In the appearing dialog box, give the saved zoom a name.

By default, this zoom will be available only for the current story (here, 1. Story). To have this zoom available in all stories, click Across All Stories. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) See: Pan and Oriented View. Custom-saved zooms you name here can be applied to any view, from the Zooming pop-up list in the 2D/3D Documents Panel of View Settings.

334

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

335

Interaction

Oriented View
Use the Oriented View function to rotate the entire view on your screen to a preferred position. For example, if you are working on the wing of a building that is at an angle to another one, you can orient the view so that the wing you are working on lines up with your screen, rather than at an angle.

Orienting the view does not rotate the project as such; the project coordinates remain unchanged. It just turns the window contents so that they are displayed at a more convenient angle on your monitor. (You get the same effect if you rotate your monitor.) 336
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Oriented View (Rotation) in View Settings


Rotation is included in a views Zoom data. Thus, when saving View Settings, you save its zoom, including its rotation. There is a checkbox in View Settings: Ignore zoom when opening this view. If this is checked, then the displayed view will not use the saved zoom value, but rather the windows last-used zoom value. Consequently, the rotation will not be seen either. Uncheck the box if you wish to see the saved zoom value in the window, together with the rotation. (Views placed on layouts will always display their saved zoom/rotation.)

How to Rotate Window Contents Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position Zoom and Rotate Grids in Oriented View Text in Oriented View How to Rotate Window Contents
1. Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen.

2. On screen, draw a rotation vector with two clicks.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

337

Interaction

3. Drag your mouse to rotate the screen contents to the desired angle, or enter a numerical rotation angle into the Tracker. Click a third time to complete. See also Tracker.

4. The degree of rotation is shown on the Reset Orientation button at the bottom of your screen, next to the Rotate Orientation control. To reset the rotation degree to zero, click this button.

The pair of arrows in the lower left corner also indicates the rotation.

338

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

In the Navigator Preview, only the frame representing the monitor rotates; the preview itself does not.

Oriented View is available in the Floor Plan, Worksheet, Detail and 3D Document windows. The rotated orientation value is saved as part of the Zoom value of every saved view, and on the published output created from that view.

Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position


1. Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen.

2. Move the cursor to the edge of a project element, such as a slab, which you want to rotate to an orthogonal (horizontal or vertical) position on the screen. (The cursor will change to a Mercedes to indicate you have located the edge.) 3. Ctrl+click on the edge. 4. The window contents will rotate so that the clicked edge moves to either at 0 degrees or 90 degrees, whichever is nearer.

Zoom and Rotate


To rotate the view and zoom in or out at the same time: 1. Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button from the bottom of your screen. See also Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons. 2. Press Ctrl.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

339

Interaction

3. Using three clicks, draw the zooming rectangle on screen at the desired angle.

When you complete the rectangle with the third click, the view will zoom in/out and be rotated simultaneously.

340

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Grids in Oriented View


The on-screen Grid, if it was orthogonal to begin with, remains orthogonal after the rotation. If it was a rotated Grid, that Grid will rotate along with the view, its project coordinates remaining unchanged after the rotation.

Text in Oriented View Text blocks


The way a Text Block behaves in a rotated view is set in Text Tool Settings in the Text Block Formatting Panel. (pictured below) or with the corresponding controls in the Text Tool Info Box.

See Text Block Formatting Panel. If you place a Text Block at an angle, the Fixed Angle option means that the Text Block will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. The Always Readable option (on by default) means that the program will automatically flip the text to make it legible on screen (as opposed to upside down) regardless of the views orientation. This automatic flip occurs if the text is at an angle between 90 and 270 degrees.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

341

Interaction

Text Labels
The Label Settings Text Panel (for a Text-type Label) also contains the Fixed Angle option:

This means that the Label will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. If Fixed Angle is checked in the Text Label panel, you can also check Optimize Position. This means that ArchiCAD will reposition the Labels arrow if it ends up in an awkward position after the view is rotated: Not optimized Label, after rotation:

342

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Optimized Label, after rotation:

Dimension text
Dimension text is automatically adjusted to ensure that it will remain easily legible regardless of the views orientation. (If you set a custom angle for dimension text, however, that angle will prevail.) For dimensions whose text is set to Horizontal in Dimension Tool Settings, the text will remain horizontal with respect to the screen regardless of any rotation of the view.

See Dimension Tool Settings.

Fill Area text


Will always be displayed horizontally on screen, regardless of the views orientation. See Add Area Text to a Fill. (If you set a custom angle for fill area text, however, that angle will prevail.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

343

Interaction

Text of GDL Objects in Rotated View


GDL Object-type elements may contain text that is affected by a rotated orientation. Many such objects have new parameters. For example, options for Text Orientation on Symbol include: Readable: As the view is rotated, the object text rotates too, but is flipped as necessary to ensure text readability. Align with Symbol: Text rotates together with the symbol, with no other adjustments. Always Horizontal: Text remains fixed in a horizontal position on screen, regardless of the views orientation.

Marker Text in Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet


The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Always Horizontal and Always Vertical values will display text horizontally/vertically on screen, regardless of the views orientation. Align with Section Line will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, and will flip the text if necessary to ensure readability. Align with Section Line - No Flip will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, without any flip adjustment for readability.

Text of Door/Window Markers


The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Standard: Text is always parallel to the wall, and is automatically readable (that is, flipped if necessary after rotation of the view). Align with Marker Line: Text remains fixed in line with the marker line and is automatically readable. Horizontal/Vertical: Width/Height/Sill/Fire Rating/Acoustic Rating texts are automatically readable.

344

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Fit in Window
You can resize your view to accommodate all elements placed in the project. This provides a good way to check whether you have placed something in the far corners of your window by mistake during numeric input or a multiply operation. Choose the View > Fit in Window command or click the corresponding shortcut button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window.

If the current view has been rotated, the rotation remains intact. See Oriented View. Another shortcut: Double-click the middle mouse button to Fit in Window. If you wish, you can save a windows Fit in Window setting as part of any views View Settings: choose Fit in Window from the Zooming pop-up in the 2D/3D Documents Panel of View Settings. See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.

Listing windows have an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

345

Interaction

Pan
Use the Pan function to scan the project as a whole, usually to see elements that do not currently fit on the screen. Enable the Pan function, then move the cursor to move the view around in the window along with the cursor. With Pan Button: Click the Pan button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window. Click into the active window and pan it by moving the Hand cursor with your mouse. The whole on-screen area will move, while the current zoom level is preserved.

If you have a three-button mouse, you can use it for panning by pressing down the middle button while moving the Hand cursor in the window. With Mouse Scrolling Button: If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, you can use it for panning by pressing the scrolling button continuously while moving the Hand cursor over the window. With the numeric keypad (Windows only): Press the following keys: 4 (left), 2 (downwards), 6 (right), 8 (upwards). (Make sure Numbers Lock is off.) The up/down and left/ right keys achieve the same result. With the Navigator Preview Palette. See Navigator Preview (2D).

What to Do if Panning Produces Jumpy Screen Effect


When panning a large and complex project in a 2D window, you may experience fits and starts in model display. To remedy this, try switching among the choices in Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options: Model Display in 2D Navigation.

346

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Preview (2D)


The Navigator Preview Palette makes it easier to locate and zoom in on certain parts of your project, especially when working on larger projects. For details on these controls, see The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls. To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.

For 2D Windows, the Preview Palette displays a miniature copy of the entire contents of the current view. The frame inside the Preview Palette represents the active window at its current zoom. Use this frame to zoom and pan within the Preview Palette; this has the same effect as zooming and panning in the active window, while simultaneously giving you an overview of the entire window contents. If the current zoom of the active window includes a rotated orientation, the preview shows the project in its original view, but the frame is rotated to match the angle of orientation. See Oriented View.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

347

Interaction

(The two heavier arrows of the frame indicate the bottom left corner of the screen.)

When previewing a 2D window in the Navigator Preview, you have the following zooming and panning options: To change the location of the frame, drag its enclosed area with the Hand Cursor (this lets you pan in the active window).

348

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To change the size of the frame, drag its sides or corners (this has the effect of zooming in and out within the active window).

At the bottom of the palette, the plus and minus buttons and a sliding switch are additional zooming techniques: they allow you to zoom the current view in and out. Clicking the buttons increases the zoom level in about 10% increments.

At the bottom right corner, a pop-up menu contains three options for controlling the zooming techniques of the Navigator Preview. The default is Real-time zoom: as you move the cursor, the zoom is adjusted. Auto zoom will adjust the zoom after you finish moving the cursor. Double-click to zoom means you must double-click or press the Go button at top right to execute the chosen zoom.

Use Redraw Preview if you have made changes in the current window that are not yet reflected in the Navigator Preview.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

349

Interaction

Navigation in the 3D Window


Note: For general information on accessing the 3D window, and how to set up Perspective and Axonometric (Parallel) views, see 3D Window. The 3D window can be navigated using most of the basic 2D navigation methods. The keyboard, mouse scroll button, Fit in Window, Pan, Zoom, and command-based techniques all work the same way as in 2D. See: Fit in Window, Pan, Zoom. The 3D window also contains unique navigation possibilities for exploring the model and orbiting around in it. These are described in the following sections.

Accessing 3D Navigation Commands Explore Model (3D Navigation) Orbit (3D Navigation) Navigator Preview (3D) 3D connexion Enabler

350

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Accessing 3D Navigation Commands


Special commands for navigating in 3D are displayed in the 3D Visualization and the Simple 3D toolbar, and can be assigned shortcuts. Choose Window > Toolbars > 3D Visualization or Simple 3D to display these toolbars as needed. If the 3D window is active, its bottom scrollbar contains icon shortcuts to 3D Navigation commands.

Note: The 3D Navigation controls familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD can be accessed by choosing Window > Toolbars > Classic 3D Navigation toolbar. The 3D Navigation commands are available only in the 3D Window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

351

Interaction

Explore Model (3D Navigation)


In Perspective views only, you can explore the model either by choosing the View > Explore Model or access the same command from a toolbar, or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.

In Explore mode, use the mouse and the arrow keys of the keyboard for navigation (as when playing a video game on a PC.) When in this mode, you cannot edit the model or use any of the commands. The Fly option and speed slider also appear at the bottom of the screen as long as you are in Explore mode.

To exit Explore mode, click with the left mouse button or use the Esc key. Note: Exploring the model is optimized for the OpenGL engine. When choosing the Explore Model command, an informational dialog box opens to give you a visual prompt on what you can expect from your various actions with the mouse and the keyboard. Note: If you dont need to see this information every time you enter Explore mode, check Do not show this information next time at the bottom of the dialog box. To enable this or any

352

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

other dialog box you have marked as do not show, use the Enable all informational messages command at Options > Work Environment (bottom of menu).

Rotate camera in Explore mode


Moving the mouse around will rotate the camera in the directions indicated by the arrows next to the camera on the picture above.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

353

Interaction

Walk forward and backward in Explore mode


Pressing the arrow keys, or the W-A-S-D keys, will walk you forward/backward and laterally in the directions indicated by the arrows in the picture above. Note that the Up arrow brings the model closer to you while the Down arrow moves it further away.

Fly around the model


In Explore mode, click F for Fly mode. Again, use the arrow keys or the W-A-S-D keys to move around, but this time the Fly mode combines the lifting effect with the rotating and lateral movements to simulate a walking movement on a horizontal plane or in space.

Lift the model up and down


Use the PageUp (shortcut: spacebar) and PageDown (shortcut: C) keys to simulate a lifting effect.

Speed Up/Slow Down in Explore Mode


Click the Plus and Minus keys on your numeric keypad to change the speed in which you explore the model. For a temporary speed increase, press Shift, then release it to return to your basic speed.

354

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Orbit (3D Navigation)


For Orbit mode, choose View > Orbit, or access the same command from a toolbar or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.

Once you enter Orbit mode, press the left button and drag the mouse to turn the model around its centerpoint (axonometry) or target point (perspective). If you are in Orbit mode, you cannot edit the model. Click ESC to exit Orbit mode and return to editing mode.

Temporary Orbit Effects While in Editing Mode


While in editing mode (not in Orbit mode), you can temporarily simulate Orbit mode by pressing Shift together with the mouse scrolling button to orbit the model. Release the keys to stop orbiting. This type of temporary Orbit requires the model to be redrawn and can result in slowed-down navigation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

355

Interaction

Navigator Preview (3D)


To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.

This palette allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projections, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric). See 3D Projections. The options of the Navigator Preview depend on whether you are looking at a Perspective or Axonometric view. For Perspective 3D views, edit the camera and target positions directly by clicking them in the Preview window and dragging them to a new location. Note: Make sure that Show from Top is chosen from the pop-up menu in the Previews lower right corner.

356

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

In the image below, we turn the building around simply by clicking and dragging the camera represented in the Navigator Preview Window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

357

Interaction

If you choose Show from Side view from the Preview options pop-up, you can easily re-set the camera height relative to the stories of the project: just click in the Navigator Preview and move the camera up or down.

Or you can change the view cone, using the sliding switch or the small icons at its ends, in 5 degree increments For Axonometric (parallel) projections, the 3D Navigator Preview has two pop-up menus at the bottom right. From the left button, choose one of the 12 predefined projections to quickly switch to that view.

(These are the same predefined axonometries available from 3D Projection Settings).

358

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To customize the projection, use the right-side pop-up button, then move the small camera icon inside the Preview window to set up a custom view.

For detailed information, see The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls and 3D Projections.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

359

Interaction

3D connexion Enabler
The 3D connexion Enabler is an add-on functionality that allows you to use your 3Dconnexion device for navigating in ArchiCADs 3D window. If you are using a 3Dconnexion device, use one of the two options at View > 3D Navigation Extras > 3Dconnexion: Camera mode: Move the device to navigate in the model by moving the camera position. Object mode: As you move the device, the model is moved accordingly. The camera viewpoint is fixed, while the model moves.

360

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Palette

About the Navigator Palette How to Display the Navigator Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows Project Workflow in the Navigator Organizer Palette Navigator Color Codes Navigator Project Map
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

361

Interaction

Navigator View Map Clone a Folder in the View Map Setting up a View Saving a View Modifying View Settings Quick Options Palette Navigator Layout Book Navigator Publisher External Projects in the Navigator

362

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Navigator Palette


The Navigator Palette (Navigator) is a tree structure that lets you build up the entire logical structure of your project and navigate within it. You can create folders, then copy, drag and drop views and other project items depending on their particular purpose. The Navigator also lets you access views and layouts from external ArchiCAD files and place them into the Layout Book of your current project. Finally, you can configure the outputs for publication using Navigator controls. The Navigator displays the whole projects tree structure in four different maps. The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. The View Map includes all the predefined and custom-created Views of the Project File. The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project. The Publisher Sets map is a tree structure in which you define sets of views for various output purposes (printing, plotting, or saving to a local disk). To switch from one map to another, click among the four buttons at the top of the Navigator. The palettes title bar indicates which map is currently displayed.

The Navigator item currently open in the window is shown in bold. The Navigator has a special double-tree view, called the Organizer, which makes it easier to move items from one map to the other. Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable.

Related Topics: Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls Organizer Palette

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

363

Interaction

How to Display the Navigator


The Navigator is displayed by default.

If it is hidden, choose Window > Palettes > Navigator, or click the Navigator icon from the horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the ArchiCAD screen.

364

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Auto-Hide the Navigator


Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on, you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual, but once you click outside the palette, it will disappear. The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palettes context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

365

Interaction

Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows


Double-click the desired item from any map of the Navigator. By default, ArchiCAD will open the item in existing windows, replacing the previous view in that window. To open a new view in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.

If you would rather open a new window by default each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options.

366

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Project Workflow in the Navigator


A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. Viewpoints are listed in the Project Map of the Navigator Palette. See Navigator Palette. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the View Map. The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project, and can contain Drawings originating from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. Use the Publisher to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect, the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout). The following diagram summarizes the project workflow as reflected in the maps of the Navigator:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

367

Interaction

Organizer Palette
The Organizer is related to the Navigator and is opened from the Navigator. It houses essentially the same controls, but has a double-tree structure to make it easier to move and copy views and files from one map to the other. See also Navigator Palette.

Display the Organizer


To display the Organizer, choose Window > Palettes > Organizer, or the Show Organizer command from the Project Chooser at top left of the Navigator.

Auto-Hide Organizer
Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on, you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual, but once you click outside the palette, it will disappear. The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palettes context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette.)

Organizer Modes
Click the desired map icons on both sides of the Organizer to bring up one of the three modes of the Organizer:

368

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

View Editor mode (Project Map on the left, View Map on the right): Save views by selecting a viewpoint from the Project Map and clicking Save view, or drag and drop it into the View Map.

Layout Editor mode (Layout Map on the right): Place Drawings onto Layouts in the Layout Book by selecting a view from the Project or View Map (on the left), then clicking Place Drawing, or drag and drop it onto a Layout (on the right). Publisher (Publisher on the Right): To add a view or layout (on the left) to a Publisher set (on the right), select a view or layout and click Add Shortcut. If you select a Subset in the Layout Map, the Add Shortcut button will create a folder in the Publisher Set which corresponds to that Subset: if you change or add items in the original subset, the Publisher Set folder will reflect these changes automatically. However, if you drag and drop a Subset into the Publishing Set, a folder is created, but this folder is not linked to any subsequent modifications to the Subset. Note that the Project Map is available only on the left side. Certain combinations are not possible, and ArchiCAD will always adjust to one of the three possible Organizer modes. (For example, if you choose the Publisher on the right, then the left side will switch from Project Map to View Map, because you cannot place items directly from the Project Map to the Publisher.) It is possible to have the same map open on both sides of the Organizer; this enables you to make copies of items within a single map. When you click any item in the Navigator/Organizer, its preview is displayed in the Navigator Preview palette (if applicable). Double-clicking the item activates the corresponding window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

369

Interaction

Related Topics: Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls

370

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Color Codes


A color-coding system makes it easier for you to identify items in the Navigator palette. Items of the Project Map are colored orange.

See Navigator Project Map. Items of the View Map are colored yellow.

See Navigator View Map. Items of the Layout Book are colored white.

See Navigator Layout Book. See also Navigator Icons in the Teamwork Section of ArchiCAD Help.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

371

Interaction

Navigator Project Map


The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. See also Project Map Controls.

. A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. The Project Map Viewpoints are: Stories Sections Elevations Interior Elevations Worksheets 372
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Detail Drawings 3D Documents 3D Schedules Project Indexes Lists Info Help Double-click a viewpoint to open it in the project. Once you save a viewpoints settings, it becomes a view (listed in your View Map) and can then be placed onto a Layout for editing. At the top level of the project map hierarchy, the house icon represents the project and is followed by the project name. (The project gets a name once you save the project file, but if you assign a Project Name in File > Info > Project Info, that is the name that will be shown in the Navigator.) Below, folders store the available viewpoints of the project (one folder named for each type of viewpoint). Project Map folders are a fixed list of item types; you cannot add or delete folders here. You can display the contents of each folder by clicking the plus sign in front of it (in Windows) or the little arrow (in MacOS). In Windows, double-clicking the folder icon or name also opens the folder. The Stories folder contains all the Stories defined for the project. When you first start a new project, your Stories folder contains three items, whose names will vary depending on the local version of ArchiCAD being used. The Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations, Worksheets, Details and 3D Documents folders contain the list of corresponding windows. If there is no plus sign in front of a folder, this means that no such viewpoint has been created yet in the project. See ArchiCAD Model Views for information about each of these viewpoint types. The 3D folder contains elements for the various projection and camera types. By default, two items are present on starting the project: Generic Perspective and Generic Axonometry. When you place Cameras in the Project, their names appear in the 3D folder of the Project Map, grouped under the Path. The Path can be renamed in Camera Tool Settings, and more Paths can be added. All these additions and changes are updated in the Project Map. See Camera Tool Settings. The Schedules folder contains the interactive schedules (Elements and Components) created as part of the project documentation. The Interactive Schedule serves as a basis for ordering doors, windows, and other construction elements from the manufacturers and for checking the consistency of elements based on a set of criteria. See Interactive Schedule. The Project Indexes folder contains three sets of table of contents type items. Project indexes include view list indexes, layout sheet indexes and drawing list indexes based on a set of filtering criteria. See Project Indexes.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

373

Interaction

The Lists folder contains three items: Elements, Components and Zones. When opened, all three show the list of predefined list schemes available for the project. All these items also appear in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. For more information, see Calculation. The Info folder contains two items: Project Notes and Report Window. They represent the corresponding windows also available from the Window menu. For more information, see Project Notes and Session Report Window. If you click an item with the right mouse button, a set of relevant commands appear in a context menu (for example story-related commands for Stories or 3D-related commands for Perspectives).

Double-clicking any of the items of the Project Map activates the corresponding window and shows its contents with its last used zoom and display settings. (These zoom and display settings can be checked in the Quick Options Palette.) See also Quick Options Palette. Remember, a viewpoints settings change along with edits in the window. When you have set up the viewpoint settings as desired, you can save it as a view. You can make this process automatic - saving Project Map viewpoints as views with specific settings - using the Clone Folder function.

374

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator View Map


With the second button in the Navigator Palette, you will display the Navigator View Map: the list of saved Views available in your project file.

See also View Map Controls. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator Palettes View Map. The Properties section at the bottom of the View Map provides feedback on the settings of the selected view. To modify view settings, select the view and click Settings at the bottom of the View Map to access View Settings. Views can be created within the active project or imported from other ArchiCAD projects. For more information, see Saving a View. In the View Map, several view folders are predefined; you can rename or delete these, and add new folders as needed. To gain an overview of View Map items or to sort them by criteria, use the Project Indexes function. See Project Indexes. 375

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Even if the project content changes, the settings of your saved views - will remain unchanged unless you expressly modify them. Note: You can create a dynamic connection between project viewpoints and views if you clone a folder.

376

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Clone a Folder in the View Map


Cloning a folder means that you recreate a Project Map folder inside the View Map. Consequently, for each new viewpoint you create in the Project Map, a counterpart new view will be created in its cloned folder in the View Map. For example, if you have cloned the Project Maps Stories folder, then the cloned folder in View Map will always show all Stories of the Project, even new ones added after the creation of the clone folder. Moreover, every view in the cloned folder will have identical View Settings - the settings you define when creating the cloned folder.

How to Clone a Folder


Click the Clone Folder at the bottom of the View Map. This opens the Clone a Folder dialog box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

377

Interaction

The top of the Clone a Folder dialog box lists all the folders of the Project Map; choose the folder whose clone you want to create in the View Map. The rest of the controls are identical to those of View Settings. The settings you define here will be applied to every view in the cloned folder. Click Clone to create the cloned folder. The resulting cloned folder in the View Map will be identified by a special clone folder icon, rather than a regular folder icon.

Another way to create a clone is to drag the folder from the Project Map to the View Map, using Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Opt+Cmd (MacOS) within the Organizers View Editor. The following two diagrams illustrate the difference between views in regular folders in the View Map (which are not affected by changes in the Project Map structure), and views in cloned folders in the View Map (whose contents change in tandem with changes in the Project Map viewpoints.)

Views in regular View Map folders:

378

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Views in Cloned View Map folders:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

379

Interaction

Setting up a View
To set up a new view, open the project in the appropriate window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/ IE, 3D Document, Detail, Worksheet, 3D, Interactive Schedule, or List) and adjust any or all of its settings as needed. For example, you can change the scale and layer combination to fit your output needs, in one of the following ways: in the active window, using the usual editing commands changing the options of the Quick Options Palette, which always show the settings of the currently active (frontmost) window See also Quick Options Palette. in the Organizer, using the View Settings and Storing Options at the bottom of the Project Map

View Settings
The View Settings are stored with each view. See View Settings Dialog Box.

Once you save the view, it will store the combination of the following settings: Layer Combinations Scale 380
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Partial Structure Display Pen Set Model View Options Combinations Renovation Filter See Renovation. Floor Plan Cut Plane See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). Dimensions See Dimensioning. Zooming (including the Zoom value, the Pan, and the Oriented View) See Zoom, Pan, and Oriented View. Image Settings (for 3D Window views): these include 3D projection settings (including zooming), filtered elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D Cutaway and PhotoRendering Settings. Existing selection (3D only)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

381

Interaction

Saving a View
To save the view, do one of the following: Use the Organizer to drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the View Map. The current settings are saved as view settings. Click the Save Current view button at the bottom of the View Map. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.)

Select the Viewpoint in the Project map, then right-click and execute the Save Current View command. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.) Drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the Layout Book. The current settings are saved as view settings. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book. Use the Save View and Place on Layout command, available in the active windows context menu, the items context menu in the Navigator/Organizer, and as a command in the Document menu. The current settings are saved as view settings. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book.

382

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Modifying View Settings


To change the settings of an already saved view, do one of the following: Open the View Settings Dialog Box and make any changes needed Click Get Current Windows Settings to overwrite the original view settings with the current viewpoint settings (i.e. those of the active window).

If you have opened a saved view from the View Map, and if, while working in the active window, you have changed any of its View Settings, a triangular yellow warning icon will appear at the bottom of the Navigator, next to the changed settings, alerting you that The settings in the frontmost window no longer correspond to the original view settings. For example, the image below indicates that the current windows zoom and layer settings are different than in the saved view.

If you wish, you can save the current window settings as a view: Click Settings to open the View Settings dialog box, then click Get Current Windows Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

383

Interaction

Quick Options Palette


The Quick Options Palette displays the current settings of the active (frontmost) window. The Quick Options Palette is displayed by default at the lower right corner of your screen. (You may have to drag the palette to a new position or stretch it to see all six of the Quick Options.) To hide/show this palette, use Windows > Palettes > Quick Options Palette or the corresponding button in the bottom scrollbar of the model window.

The current window settings as reflected in Quick Options are the currently effective project settings, but they have not necessarily been saved as part of any view; they merely provide feedback on what you are currently seeing in the active window, and offer a quick way to apply changes among these settings.

. Use these six sets of pop-up controls as a quick way to change the settings of the project or of the currently active (frontmost) window: Layer Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Layer Combination to the whole project. See Layer Combinations. Scale: Changing this setting applies a new scale to the currently active window. See Scale. Partial Structure Display: Changing this setting applies a new Partial Structure Setting to the currently active window. Pen Set: Changing this setting applies a new pen set to the model. (Not available in the Layout window.) See Pens & Colors. Model View Options Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Model View Options Combination to the whole project. See Model View Options Combinations. Renovation Filter: Choose a Renovation Filter to assign to the view. See Renovation. Dimensions: Changing this setting applies a new Dimensioning standard to the whole project. (Not available in the 3D window) See Dimensions Preferences. 384
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Layout Book


The Layout Book is a tree view of the Layouts defined for the entire project, plus the Drawings on the Layouts. Drawings in the Layout Book can originate from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. You can view the Layout Book in two formats: Tree by Subset or Tree by Master. Click the popup button above the tree to choose a format.

Tree by Subset (the default display) lists layouts according to the Subsets you have created - a freely defined logic. (The primary function of Subsets is to enable you to assign a customized numbering system.) See Subsets. Tree by Master lists the Layouts in categories according to their Master Layouts. At the bottom of the Layout Book, the Properties section displays the settings of the current Layout, some of which are editable directly. See also The Layout Book and Layout Book Controls. To access the Settings of the selected Layout or the selected Drawing, click the Settings button at the bottom of the Layout Book.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

385

Interaction

Drawings are accompanied by icons that correspond to their file type. Views imported from ArchiCAD project files retain their icons (for example, floor plan or detail) but are shown in white.

386

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Publisher
Use this map of the Navigator/Organizer to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Access the Publisher in one of these locations: the Navigator the Organizer the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command.

. For detailed information, see: Publisher Function and Publisher Controls.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

387

Interaction

External Projects in the Navigator


By default, the Navigator and the left side of the Organizer display the tree structure of the active ArchiCAD project which you are working on. You may wish to place views or Layouts from another ArchiCAD project into the Layout Book of your active project. To do this, you will use the Project Chooser, accessed by clicking the icon at the top left corner of the Navigator or Organizer. See also Project Chooser.

To place Layouts or views from an external ArchiCAD projects onto a Layout of the active project, do the following: Open the Organizer of the active project. Click the Browse Project or Browse Teamwork Project command in the Project Chooser.

Choose an ArchiCAD project whose content you want to use in the active project. Note: If you choose Browse Teamwork Project, you will be prompted to choose a server on which the Teamwork Project is found. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. See Manage Users on the BIM Server. Click Open.

388

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

The external project is now displayed on the left side in the Organizer tree structure, and the active projects Layout Book on the right:

The external project name is now also listed in the Project Chooser. (If this project is also open, it is shown as Running.)

Drag the desired item into the Layout Book of the active project, shown on the right side of the Organizer. Once your active projects Layout Book contains views/layouts from an external project, the Project Chooser will list this project as linked. Note: You can access external projects the same way by using the Project Chooser with just the Navigator open (without the Organizer). In this case, once you have browsed the desired external project and see its tree structure, add any of its views or layouts to the active project by dragging and dropping it directly onto the Layout in the active window. To open the external project in a separate ArchiCAD, double-click any of its items in the Navigator.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

389

Interaction

Origins
About Origins in ArchiCAD Reposition User Origin

390

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

About Origins in ArchiCAD


In ArchiCAD, as in any coordinate system, all measurements are made in reference to an origin. The location of the origin is always interpreted as (0, 0). ArchiCAD defines three coordinate system origins:

Project Origin
The Project Origin is a constant location which remains fixed for the life of your Project. The Project Origin of the coordinate system, marked with an X, is close to the lower left corner of the Floor Plan window, when using the default view of the default template. (The Coordinates Palette shows the coordinates as (0, 0). In Floor Plan and other 2D views, the origin is always marked by a bold X.

In 3D Views, the origins and their X, Y and Z axes are displayed with bold black lines.

User Origin
The User Origin is the place at which element input begins. By default, the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. However, the User Origin can be moved to any location, allowing you to reset the zero point to any location. This is often helpful when you need to draw elements with respect to existing walls, slabs or other components. For details, see Reposition User Origin.

Edit Origin
The Edit Origin is also temporary; it appears only during drafting and editing operations and is used to display the distance and angle of a rubber band line from the starting point of a drawing operation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

391

Interaction

Reposition User Origin


The User Origin is the place at which element input begins. By default, the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. There are two ways to move the User Origin: At any node by using the keyboard. Hold down both the Alt and Shift keys (MacOS: Opt + Shift) and move the cursor to the construction node where you want the origin located. At any location by using the User Origin button from the Standard toolbar (or the Coordinates palette, if it is displayed).

Click the User Origin button, then click at any point in the window. The origin is instantly relocated there.

Now your new element input will begin at this newly set User Origin. See also Editing Plane in 3D Window. To return the User Origin to the Project Origin, double-click the User Origin button in the Standard Toolbar.

392

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Elevation
Elevation Values in the Tracker Reference Levels

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

393

Interaction

Elevation Values in the Tracker


During input, refer to the Trackers Z field to check the elevation of the newly created element. You must activate Show Z in Tracker from the Trackers drop-down menu in the Standard toolbar. (This command is available during editing/input.).

If you are inputting a Wall, Column, Beam or Object using the Gravity function, the Z value will reflect the elevation of the underlying Slab/Shell/Roof/Mesh. See Gravity. If you switch the Show Tracker control to Always in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input, then the Trackers Z field will display elevation values even if input is not yet underway; just move the cursor to get feedback. The Tracker can display elevation values in one of three different forms depending on your choice: from the Project Zero from the current Story (or in 3D, the User Origin) or one of the two optional Reference Levels defined in Options > Project Preferences > Reference Levels. See Reference Levels. To determine which reference level the Trackers elevation (Z) feedback should use: 1. Open the drop-down menu of the Tracker icon from the Standard toolbar. 2. Go to the Elevation Value Origin sub-menu.

3. Choose the desired reference level.

394

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Reference Levels
You can define optional Reference Levels that will help you position elements when using the Tracker. See Elevation Values in the Tracker. Define Reference Levels at Options > Project Preferences > Reference Levels. See Reference Levels Preferences.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

395

Interaction

Selection
Selecting Elements Selection Feedback Element Information Highlight Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) The Intelligent Cursor Deselecting Elements Find and Select Elements Zoom to Selection Edit Selection Set Store and Access Selection Sets Marquee Area

396

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Selecting Elements
With the Arrow tool active: Point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a shaded rectangle around the element you want to select. With any other tool active: Press Shift, then point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. For more information on cursor shapes, see The Intelligent Cursor.

Select All Elements (in Window or in Marquee)


To select all elements on screen (either in the entire window or inside a previously defined Marquee area) with the Arrow or Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All command. Note: Select All will only select elements on the currently displayed story. See also Marquee Area.

Select All Elements of a Single Type


To select all elements of a single type (for example, all Walls, or all Windows), activate the corresponding tool, then use the Ctrl+A shortcut. To learn about additional Arrow tool selection options, see Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon. To learn how to highlight an element before selecting it, see Element Information Highlight.

Select Elements Based on Multiple Criteria


Use the Find & Select function to select elements defined by a wide variety of criteria. See Find and Select Elements.

Add/Remove Elements to/from Selection


You can add elements to the selection by shift-clicking them. Shift-clicking an already selected element will deselect it.

Select Morph Sub-Elements


If you are editing Morphs, you may wish to select only Morph sub-elements (faces and edges) by default, rather than the entire Morph. To do this, activate the Sub-Element selection method for the Arrow tool. This only works for Morph selection.

See Morph Selection.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

397

Interaction

Other topics in this section: Quick Selection of Surface Areas Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon Selection of Overlapping Elements

398

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Quick Selection of Surface Areas


Quick Selection is the easiest way to select single elements which have a surface area (such as slabs and roofs). To activate Quick Selection as the default working mode, turn on the Quick Selection icon in the Arrow tools Info Box.

Now, to use Quick Selection, either the Arrow tool must be active, or you must press the Shift key. Move the cursor over any surface of the element you want to select. You will note that every time the cursor hovers over a selectable element, it will change shape. Click to select.

As shown in this image, you need only move the cursor over any part of the roof area; (if the Arrow tool is not active, press Shift to change to the Quick Select cursor), and click to select the roof.

Quick Selection works on all construction and text elements, fills and objects. To temporarily suspend the Quick Selection method while the icon is activated, press the Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active, or Shift-spacebar if any other tool is active. Quick Selection is active by default, but it can be deactivated in the Arrow tools Info Box by releasing the button. To use Quick Selection on a temporary basis (while the Quick Selection icon is deactivated in the Arrow Tools Info Box), press Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active (or Shift+Spacebar with any other Tool).

Click and Drag with Quick Selection


With the Arrow Tool and Quick Selection active, you can drag any element by clicking on it and holding down the button while you drag it, without having to use the Drag command. (With any other tool active, press Shift, then click and drag.) Note: All selected elements will be dragged simultaneously.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

399

Interaction

Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/ Polygon


A useful method for selecting multiple elements is by drawing a selection polygon or rectangle around the items. These will be explicitly selected items, displaying selection dots. Note: To select an area instead of explicitly selecting elements, use the Marquee tool. See Marquee Area. 1. Activate the Arrow tool 2. Choose a selection method from the Arrow Tool Info Box - this defines the logic by which elements enclosed by the selection rectangle/polygon will be selected. See Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon, below. 3. Choose a Geometry method from the Arrow Tool Info Box - this defines your drawing method. See Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon, below. 4. Click on the screen and draw the selection rectangle/polygon. Note: If you want to use a selection rectangle or polygon within a quick-selectable area, press the spacebar to temporarily suspend Quick Selection, then draw the selection polygon keeping the spacebar pressed. Note: If you use the Polygon geometry method, then double-click while drawing the polygon to automatically close it, if at least two segments have already been defined manually. The double-clicked point becomes the last apex of the polygon. See Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon.

This will select all the elements inside the area (either partially or entirely, depending on the selection method used), and deselect all other currently selected elements. If you keep the Shift key pressed, enclosed elements will be added to the selection while already selected ones will be subtracted from it.

400

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon


The Arrow tools Info Box offers three selection methods when using a rectangular or polygonal shape.

With the first (default) Selection Method, any element that has at least one of its nodes, edges or curves in the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected.

With the second method, only elements with all nodes inside the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected. With the third, direction-dependent selection method, the selection logic will depend on the direction in which you draw the rectangle.

- If you draw the selection rectangle from right to left, then the first selection method is in effect: that is, any element with at least one node inside the rectangle will be selected. - If you draw the selection rectangle from left to right, then the second selection method is in effect: that is, any element with all nodes inside the rectangle will be selected.

Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon


In the Arrow tools Info Box, you can choose among three selection area shapes.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

401

Interaction

The options are Polygonal, Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular.

402

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection of Overlapping Elements


When the nodes of several elements overlap at a single point, the Info Highlight indicates which element will be selected, and the Info Tag shows its type and main properties. See Element Information Highlight and Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags). Note: The element information highlight pops up if the cursor is over any element (with Arrow Tool active). If any other tool is active, press Shift to see the element information highlight. To cycle the highlight among multiple elements which overlap or join, press Tab until the desired target element is highlighted. When you are satisfied that the appropriate element will be selected, click with the cursor.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

403

Interaction

Selection Feedback
Selection Dots Selection Highlight

404

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection Dots
Explicitly selected elements display selection dots (or reference points). Selection dots represent the points of the element by which you can modify the element. Note: Elements selected by Marquee do not display selection dots. The location of the selection dots depends on the type and the geometry of the element.

In the case of GDL Object type elements, the number of selection dots depends on the number of hotspots defined in the object.

Some GDL objects have special hotspots that enable you to graphically edit the object. See Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

405

Interaction

Selection Dot Variations


Single elements have small solid selection dots which are black by default.

To change the color of selection dots, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. Editable selection dots are diamond-shaped and appear on GDL objects whose parameters can be edited graphically.

For more information, see Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots. Grouped elements display larger circles, whose color is automatically assigned.

Elements that belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF are shown with hollow squares, whose color is automatically defined.

Locked elements selection dots appear in faded form.

406

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Elements are locked (and display locked selection dots) in four cases: The element is placed on a locked Layer. The element has been explicitly locked with the Edit > Locking > Lock command. The elements belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF. In all cases, locked elements can be selected, but they cannot be edited. (You will be informed of this if you try to edit a locked element.) You can open the settings dialog boxes of these elements, but you cannot edit their parameters.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

407

Interaction

Selection Highlight
Selected elements will be shown with a distinguishing highlight, in addition to selection dots. Selection highlight color (for both element surfaces and their contours) are configurable in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information, or you can turn off selection highlights altogether. See Selection and Element Information.

Even if you leave the Selection Highlight function on, you may want to disable it temporarily for example, if you want to see the actual display colors of lines and fills. To suspend Selection highlight, use the Ctrl/Alt + spacebar shortcut. Note: Surface highlights in 3D are available only when using the OpenGL 3D engine.

408

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Element Information Highlight


ArchiCAD helps you identify elements by highlighting them before you select them (also known as element detection). Just place the cursor on an element node or edge, then press Shift. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the highlight appears on its own, without your having to press Shift.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

409

Interaction

When working in 3D, you will notice that the informational highlight acts on the entire outline of the element, that is, even hidden lines of its contour are shown. Grouped elements are highlighted individually. Element information highlights can be configured, or even turned off entirely, in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. See Selection and Element Information. Element Information highlights also work when clicking to dimension an element, and with the Parameter transfer functions (Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands): the information highlight appears along with the eyedropper/syringe cursors right before you complete the parameter transfer. You do not need to press Shift to see the element detection highlight when using the Parameter Transfer function. See Parameter Transfer. Note: These highlights (identifying related elements for Parameter Transfer and Dimensioning functions) will appear if the Highlight contours of related element(s) checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. For these highlights, you need not press Shift.

410

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags)


If you move the cursor over an element and press Shift, an element information pop-up appears. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the element information pop-up appears on its own (along with the highlight), without your having to press Shift. The Element Information Pop-up displays the following information:

The elements type The elements basic properties (structural fill for Walls, name for Objects, thickness for Slabs, type for Lines, and so on) The elements elevation (for 3D shapes only) The elements Layer In 3D and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Story the element belongs to. In Teamwork, the reservation status of the element (e.g., Editable, Free for Reservation, Reserved by). Some additional information is displayed in the bottom section of the pop-up: If more than one element has a selectable part at the given location (node, edge, or surface if Quick Selection is active), the caption Multiple Elements (TAB) is shown in the Info Tag to inform you that you can cycle through selected and selectable elements by hitting the TAB key as many times as needed. See also Selection of Overlapping Elements. If the element is selected, the mention (Selected) appears in brackets. Element information highlights, including the time interval before it appears on screen, can be configured in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

411

Interaction

Deselecting Elements
To deselect one or more selected elements, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with any tool (including the Arrow) on an empty part of the project to deselect all the selected elements at once. Click a selected element while holding down the Shift key. With the Arrow tool active, hold down the Shift key, and click or draw a selection rectangle around the elements you want to deselect.

412

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Find and Select Elements


Use the Find & Select Palette to select and deselect elements based on defined criteria. Open this palette from Edit > Find & Select; or click the Find & Select shortcut from the Standard Toolbar:

The Find & Select palette can remain open as long as you wish on top of all windows. Elements will be selected on the visible layers of the currently active window. The Selected and Editable values at bottom left give you feedback on the currently selected elements in the project. Note: The controls of this dialog box are similar to those in the Reserve Elements dialog box used in Teamwork. See Reserve Elements by Criteria.

Find and Select by Element Type


To find and select elements by element type, follow these steps: 1. In the Criteria list, the first line is always Element Type, since the Find & Select function finds only elements.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

413

Interaction

2. Select this first line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose a value for this criterion from the pop-up (that is, the element type you want to find).

3. Click the Add pop-up, then the Add command to define additional elements (such as Columns) to search for simultaneously.

Note: To add IFC Properties as search criteria, click the arrow at the right side of the Add button. From the appearing dialog box, choose the properties you want use as search criteria. 4. Click the Plus button to find and select all elements that fit your defined criteria. Note: The two Criteria (Element is Wall, Element is Column) are joined as an or statement, so that when you click the Plus sign, ArchiCAD will Find and Select every element that is either a Wall or a Column.

414

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Find and Select by Additional Criteria


To narrow the scope of your search, add more criteria. 1. Click the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.

2. Select the new line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose the desired criterion from the pop-up.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

415

Interaction

The list of criteria depends on the element(s) defined in the row(s) above. For example, if you have chosen to find the element type Label, then the available criteria are those which can pertain to Label (such as Text Pen and Arrow Pen.)

Note: Defining a Layer or Layer Combination as a criterion means that the program will find and select the elements which are visible according to the given Layer Combination. Note: If the element type is Text or Label, you can further specify whether all or part of the text or label text should match the criteria - usually, the text style. (e.g., find all text blocks that are entirely in bold, or find all text blocks that are at least partially in bold).

See also Find and Select Text Blocks/Labels. See also Search for Elements by Label Text. See also Find and Select Missing Library Parts. See also Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes. See also Find and Select Elements by IFC Data.

416

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

3. When you are done setting up the criteria, click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. Note: Different criteria types (e.g. Element Type, Layer) are joined to each other by and statements.

Deselect Elements
Click the Minus button to deselect all the elements that fit the current criteria in the Find & Select Palette.

Use Predefined Criteria Sets


The Find & Select Palette (Edit > Find & Select) has several built-in Criteria Sets.

If you choose one of these, you dont have to define any criteria yourself. Just choose the desired Criteria Set from the Criteria Set Name pop-up list, then click the Plus button. Predefined Criteria Sets cannot be modified.

Define and Store Your Own Criteria Sets


In many cases, you will define simple Find & Select criteria for one-time use. However, it is possible to store these criteria sets for later use, if you will need to select the same set of elements repeatedly, or in other projects. Note: Your stored Criteria Sets can be made available in Teamwork projects, both to Find & Select elements and to reserve elements by criteria. See Define Reservation Criteria in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help. To store a Criteria Set: 1. Set up the criteria as desired. The Criteria Set name is now Custom.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

417

Interaction

2. Next to the Criteria Set Name field, click the pop-up button to access the relevant commands. Click Store as.

3. In the appearing dialog box, give a name to the Criteria Set and click Store.

Your customized Criteria Sets are now stored in the Criteria Set pop-up, under My Criteria Sets.

418

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Use the commands from the pop-up to manage your Criteria Sets: Rename, Delete, Export or Import them (as.xml files).

Pick Up Settings from Selected Elements


Use this feature if you have added a number of criteria (e.g. Element Type, Layer, Surface) in the Find and Select dialog box and want to define their values based on an existing element. This is a quick way to define a Find & Select criteria set. 1. In the Find & Select dialog box, define the criteria you want to search by (e.g. Element Type, Layer). 2. Click the Pick up Settings button to activate it.

3. In the project, Alt+click an element whose settings you want to load. 4. The Element Type and Layer values of the clicked element are now loaded in the Find & Select dialog box.

Copy Settings
If any elements are selected, the second button - Copy Settings - becomes active. Click the button to load the settings of the last selected element into the Find & Select dialog box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

419

Interaction

Zoom to Selection
Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements. This command is also available from the context menu, if you right-click in an empty space on the screen.

420

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Edit Selection Set


The Edit Selection Set dialog box from Edit > Element Settings > Edit Selection Set makes it possible to edit specific attributes (layers, pencolors, and classifications) for a collection of dissimilar element types simultaneously, without affecting any other settings of these elements. Every element in ArchiCAD shares two basic attributes with all others: a Layer assignment and one or several Pencolors. In addition, elements can be assigned classifications (Element Classification, Position, Structural Function, and/or element-level Renovation settings) which is useful for mapping settings if you export your ArchiCAD model to other applications. See Classification. If you explicitly change any of these attributes in the Edit Selection Set dialog box, all the selected elements will take on the new values. Note: The pen setting affects all cut pens of the selected elements (cut fill pens, cut line pen).

Modify Associated Window & Door Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Window and Doors contained in any selected Walls. Note: If not checked, the openings will retain their individual Pencolors/Penweights. Modify Auto-Labels Layer & Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Auto-Labels (i.e. associative labels assigned in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box Listing & Labeling Panel) assigned to any selected elements. For information on associative labels, see Listing and Labeling Panels. Note: If not checked, the labels will retain their individual attributes.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

421

Interaction

The pencolors of GDL Object-type elements can only be changed if the object is not set to be displayed with its own Symbol Pens (defined in the 2D symbol of the GDL Object). When editing the object, the standard Pen Color radio button will be preset to the edited Pen Color. All components of composite elements, such as Walls, Dimension chains or Markers made up of lines, Arrowheads and Text, are modified together. If you change the Classification settings, the new settings will be applied to all selected elements. If you do not change them, every element retains its current settings. Selected/Editable: This area displays the number of elements of each type currently selected on the Floor Plan and in 3D. The bottom of the dialog box shows the type of selected elements and whether they are currently editable (that is, not locked).

422

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Store and Access Selection Sets


Use the Window > Palettes > Selections palette to recall previously saved, frequently accessed sets of selections that are stored with the Project. The controls of the Selections Palette allow you to save any selection made on the Floor Plan, in a Section/Elevation/IE window, or a Detail/Worksheet drawing. You can delete a selection or sort saved selections by name or by window of origin, using the pop-up menu at top right of the dialog box.

Use the commands in the pop-out menu at top right to manage sets of selected items. If you have selected items in the project, use Add Selection to save this selection (you will be prompted to name it.) The same pop-up contains commands to let you Rename or Delete any of these saved Selection Sets. Sort by Name: Choose this option to sort the items by their name. Sort by Original Window: Choose this option to sort the items by the windows they originate in The bottom part of the palette displays the contents of the selection set, broken down by element type.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

423

Interaction

The three operation signs (x, -, +) affect the current, on-screen selection status of the stored selection set you have highlighted in the Palette (e.g., in the image below, NW Living):

The X function means that only the highlighted selection set will be selected on screen. Any other element which is not part of this selection set is deselected. The - function means that the elements of the highlighted selection set will be deselected. The + function will select all the elements of the highlighted selection set. The operation is always performed on the currently active window.

424

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Marquee Area
About Marquee Areas Select All Elements in a Marquee Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories Place Marquee (Geometry Methods) View Marquee Area in 3D Removing a Marquee Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool Stretching with the Marquee Tool Use Marquee in Find & Select Other Editing Operations within the Marquee

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

425

Interaction

About Marquee Areas


The Marquee tool is used to define areas for selection, editing and visualization purposes.

The capabilities of the Marquee tool complement those of the Arrow tool, and are particularly useful in selecting and moving groups of ArchiCAD elements. A Marquee area does not display selection dots on the included elements; the marqueed area is shown by a dashed line of marching ants. The color of the Marquee is the same as that of Selection dots: set this color at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information > Selection Dots and Marquee color.

. Marquee selection is often used when: You wish to define a smaller area in which to select all of the elements of a given type. You want to visualize a particular part of the design in 3D. You need to move or resize a number of elements of different types at the same time: for example, you can stretch all polygonal and linear elements of a building simultaneously. You want to save only part of the view in PDF or DWG format. The Marquee tool is available in the Floor Plan, the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation windows, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, Layout windows, and the 2D Symbol window of GDL Objects. In image-type windows (PhotoRendering or picture windows) or the GDL Objects 3D view, the only operation available for a marquee selection is Copy. To use the Marquee tool for selection and editing, you must first define a rectangular or polygonal Marquee area. All construction aids are available.

If you inadvertently start to draw the Marquee area at an unintended point, press Esc (or the Cancel button in the Control Box). If you click a node or an edge inside the Marquee area, with the Marquee tool active, the cursor will assume the Checkmark or Mercedes shape. If you then move the cursor, the Marquee area will be moved with all the nodes or edges included in it.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

426

Interaction

All polygonal or linear elements with a node included in the Marquee area can be stretched simultaneously. For a detailed description, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. If you click inside the Marquee area without touching a node or an edge, the cursor will assume the Trident shape.

In this case, moving the cursor will only move the marquee, leaving all enclosed elements unchanged.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

427

Interaction

Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories


The Marquee tool has two definition methods available in the Info Box.

With the thin dashed line contour representing the Single Story method, you can select elements on the current Story.

With the thick dashed line contour representing the All Stories method, you can select elements on all the Stories of the Project.

Note: These controls are dimmed when not viewing the Floor Plan.

428

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Place Marquee (Geometry Methods)


To place a Marquee, select the Marquee tool from the Toolbox. Choose one of the Geometry Methods from the Info Box. (If you are working in the 3D Window, four options are available; otherwise there are three options).

The Polygonal method defines a Marquee area consisting of any number of segments. Completing a segment automatically begins the next one. Close the Marquee by doubleclicking the last endpoint, by clicking OK in the context menu to close the polygon, or by drawing the last endpoint on top of the first one and clicking when the Hammer cursor appears. At least two segments must be defined manually, since the area must have a minimum of three sides. Only straight segments are possible.

The Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle at right angles to the window. After the first click, a rubber band line rectangle will follow the cursor, allowing you to see the area. After the second click at the diagonally opposed corner, the Marquee rectangle will appear. The Rotated Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle placed at any angle. You first draw one side of the rectangle with two clicks, and then, with a third click, you define the length of the perpendicular sides.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

429

Interaction

The first three methods available in the 3D Window are extensions of the Polygonal, Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle methods. First the base of the marquee area is defined with the same steps as on the Floor Plan. (In perspective view, the marquee base must be underneath the horizon.) Then you define the height of the selected space. The coordinate axes are continuously present on screen to help you.

The fourth option (3D window only) allows you to draw a 2D marquee in order to copy elements from the 3D Window in the form of pictures.

For more information, see Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window.

430

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Select All Elements in a Marquee


To select all elements inside a previously defined Marquee area with the Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All in Marquee command.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

431

Interaction

View Marquee Area in 3D


You can use the Marquee to view a selected area of your project in the 3D window. Define the Marquee area, then use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command; or select the same command from the context menu. Any part of an element that falls inside the Marquee area will be included in the 3D view, even if there is no selection node or hotspot on this part of the element. Note: If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. To further define how Marqueed elements are shown in 3D, use the Marquee Effects controls of the View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D dialog box. For more information, see Show Marquee Area in 3D.

432

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Removing a Marquee
To remove a drawn Marquee area, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with the right mouse button or Ctrl-click (MacOS), and choose the Remove Marquee command in the appearing context menu. Begin drawing a new Marquee. Double-click in the window outside the marquee area with the Marquee tool selected. If you have explicitly selected further elements within the Marquee, pressing Esc will deselect these elements in reverse order, and finally remove the Marquee. If you choose another tool, the Marquee area will not be removed, in order to save the recent Marquee area for further use.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

433

Interaction

Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG


When saving a project view in PDF or DWG format, you may use the Marquee to delimit the part you wish to save. After placing the Marquee, use the Save As... PDF or Save As... DWG command as usual. Only the Marquee area will be saved to the file, rather than the entire window contents.

Save Document in PDF Format Saving DWG/DXF Files

434

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window


You can use the Marquee tool to copy and paste an area of the 3D Window, a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, or a Model Picture Window. 1. Generate the view you need. 2. Use the Marquee tool to select the area you wish to copy (if you are selecting from the 3D window, make sure that the 2D Marquee option is active).

3. Choose Edit > Copy. If you are copying from the 3D window using the OpenGL engine, all images will be pasted in pixel format. If you are copying from the 3D window using the Internal Engine, a dialog box appears during the Copy operation giving you options for how the image will be displayed on the screen.

For more information, see Copy Dialog Box. Note: If you are copy-pasting construction elements, they will be placed as 2D elements (points, lines and fills.) You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

435

Interaction

4. Move to the Floor Plan and choose Edit > Paste. Note: You can paste into other 2D model windows, but the pasted elements will behave as 2D drawing elements only, not model elements. 5. 6. Position the image on your Floor Plan using the Trident cursor. Click outside the selection rectangle to complete the operation. Elevations are pasted to the Floor Plan as full-sized 2D elements. Parts of Model Pictures are pasted as screenshots.

436

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool


You can insert a cropped part of any image file into your ArchiCAD plan. With your ArchiCAD project file open, open any image format file. Click and drag (only the Marquee tool is available) to select the desired image area, then copy it to the clipboard. Close the image file, then paste the clipboard contents into the open project. You can modify it like any other figure. For more information, see Figures.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

437

Interaction

Use Marquee in Find & Select


If you have placed a Marquee, then the Find & Select includes the Marquee criterion automatically. You can then opt to search either inside or outside the Marquee. See Find and Select Elements.

438

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Other Editing Operations within the Marquee


If you wish to Cut, Copy, Clear, Drag, Mirror, Rotate, Elevate or Duplicate elements, they must have at least one node inside the Marquee area in order to be selected. The edit operations will act on the whole element. To use Edit commands on a placed Drawing, include at least one node of the Drawing (i.e. one of the Drawings corners) inside the Marquee. Note: In Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, some editing commands are available only for 2D drawing elements. See also Stretching with the Marquee Tool.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

439

Interaction

On-Screen Input Aids


The Intelligent Cursor Selection Feedback Tracker Ruler Measure Tool Grid System Grid Snap Function Guide Lines Editing Plane in 3D Window Gravity Mouse Constraints Coordinate Constraints Relative Construction Methods Snapping to Existing Elements Special Snap Points Cursor Snap Range

440

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

The Intelligent Cursor


The following section describes the various shapes of the intelligent cursor in different locations and situations in the project. The ArchiCAD cursor takes on the following shapes when drafting or editing elements, with any tool except the Arrow tool active: Crosshair in an empty area in the window.

Heavy Checkmark at a wall node on its reference line or a beam node at its reference axis.

Light Checkmark at any other node/hotspot of any element.

Heavy Mercedes on the reference line of a wall or the reference axis of a beam.

Light Mercedes at any other edge of any element.

Intersection at an intersection of edges.

When you click to start drawing an element whose definition requires more than a single spot, the cursors shape changes to an empty pencil. It then changes its shape again depending on whether it encounters other elements. The possibilities are as follows: White pencil in an empty space or over any element where there is no hotspot or edge

Striped pencil with black top at a walls reference line or a beams reference axis.

Striped pencil at any other edge.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

441

Interaction

Filled pencil at a node on a walls reference line or on a beams reference axis.

Filled pencil with white top at any other node or hotspot.

Pencil point with intersection at an intersection of edges.

Pencil point with perpendicular sign at a perpendicular edge.

Pencil point with tangent sign at a tangential edge.

When using the Arrow tool, the following shapes are available: Arrow at empty area in the window.

Quick Selection (Magnet) appears whenever you move the cursor onto a quick-selectable item.

Arrow with Heavy Checkmark snaps to nodes on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Light Checkmark snaps to Hotspots and nodes other than the ones on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Heavy Mercedes snaps to reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Light Mercedes snaps to edges other than reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

442

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Arrow with Intersection snaps to an intersection of edges.

Arrow with Perpendicular sign snaps perpendicularly to an edge or arc while dragging an element

Arrow with Tangent sign snaps tangentially to an arc while dragging an element.

Some cursor shapes only appear in special situations: Cloud indicates empty space over the horizon in perspective views.

Magic Wand used for tracing the contours of existing elements for creating new elements with the active tool. It has three different shapes for identifying nodes, edges and empty space (including surfaces).

Scissors trims elements (hold down the Ctrl/Cmd key while clicking on an element). The Black Scissors appear on top of element edges, while the White Scissors indicate empty space.

Eyeball defines the direction of Roofs pitch, the side that remains selected when splitting elements, the depth of Limited Sections and the orientation of Doors/Windows. It is also used to set the position of curved walls and Curtain Walls placed with the tangential method, when more than one placement possibility exists.

Double Eyeball locates position of edge-placed Door/Window.

Sun appears during Curtain Wall input to define the outside part of the Curtain Wall.

Eyedropper appears when picking up parameters from an element as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

443

Interaction

The Eyedropper is: Full, when snapping to a Reference Line or axis node;

Half full, when snapping to Hotspots, general nodes or selectable area;

Part full, part striped when snapping to a reference line;

Striped, on top of a normal edge;

Empty, when the cursor is in an empty workspace area (visual feedback only).

Syringe appears when transferring parameters of one element to another as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.

Plus when dragging, rotating or mirroring a copy of an element.

Double-Plus when dragging or rotating multiple copies of an element.

Fill Handle prompts you to draw a vector orientation after a fill is placed.

Hammer places Dimension chains, Angular Dimensions, the Elevation Dimension array, Zone Stamps and Fill areas; it also appears when closing polygons.

Trident moves Marquee area or the Clipboard contents after pasting.

444

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

During a dimensioning operation: Magnet plus dimension-line icon: In a 3D Document, after clicking the points to be dimensioned, this cursor allows you to choose the plane in which to dimension the clicked elements.

Mercedes plus parallel dimension icon: During a linear dimensioning operation using Any Direction, allows you to choose a line or edge. The dimension will be created parallel to this clicked line/edge.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

445

Interaction

Tracker
About the Tracker Parameters Shown in Tracker Defining Tracker Coordinates Coordinate Input in Tracker Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options

446

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Tracker


Coordinate values are displayed in the Tracker, which follows your mouse movements and is available in any editable window type. See Coordinates Palette for another method of coordinate input. The Tracker gives you a dynamic and constant feedback on such values as edited lengths, angles, and hotspot values for GDL Object editing. To use the Tracker, you must activate the Tracker toggle button on the Standard toolbar

or activate the Show Tracker checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.

By default, the Tracker only appears On -demand: that is, during coordinate input and editing operations. Another way to show the Tracker if you have not yet begun element input: use the n shortcut. The Tracker will pop up and display the cursor position. Alternatively, choose the Always option to display the Tracker continuously. This means that the Tracker will follow your cursor even if you are not inputting anything, providing feedback on the cursor position. To deactivate the Tracker, deactivate the Tracker toggle icon on the Standard toolbar, or hit the n shortcut. Tracker options (including colors, contents and behavior) can be set in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

447

Interaction

Some Tracker options are commands accessible from the pop-up arrow next to the Standard toolbars Tracker toggle.

448

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Parameters Shown in Tracker


The parameters appearing in the Tracker vary depending on the type of editing action that is underway. For example, if you select a straight segment and choose the Curve edge command from the pet palette, then the Tracker shows the Arc Radius parameter.

The Tracker always shows one of its parameters in bold; this is the default parameter. Depending on your choices in the Tracker pop-up menu in the Standard Toolbar, the Tracker will display only the XY or the DA (distance/angle) coordinate pair (switch from one to the other by clicking Prefer XY Coordinates/Prefer Polar Coordinates during editing/input), and will show or hide the names of the coordinates (Show/Hide Parameter Tags).

Hint: To switch between DA and XY coordinates on the fly, use the / (slash character) shortcut. As a rule, the parameters in the Tracker will be listed in order of relevance, with D/A coordinates followed by X, Y and Z coordinates. By default, the coordinate values are Relative values. (If you prefer Absolute values, deselect the Relative Coordinates in Tracker toggle command; this command is enabled by default, except during editing/input.) If you have activated the Expand Tracker Automatically option from the drop-down Tracker menu, then all the parameters will be shown as soon as you enter the Tracker (by entering a value or by pressing Tab). Note: The same option, Expand Tracker automatically during numeric input, is also available as a checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Otherwise, if you want to expand the Tracker, enter the Tracker by pressing Tab, then click the arrow at the bottom of the Tracker to expand it.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

449

Interaction

Defining Tracker Coordinates


You can enter numeric coordinates directly from the keyboard or use a combination of mouse and keyboard. The horizontal and vertical values correspond to the X and Y coordinates (also called Cartesian coordinates), while the radial and angular values are called polar coordinates. Coordinates can take on absolute and relative values. By default, they are shown as relative values in the Tracker. Use the Tracker menu from the Standard Toolbar to toggle the Relative Coordinates in Tracker preference on or off.

Relative values are measured from the Edit Origin, that is, they display horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the last edited point in the window.

Absolute values are measured from the User Origin. This means that they always display the horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the User Origin. See Origins. A temporary dashed line is drawn between the origin and the cursor to indicate that you are using absolute coordinates.

For information on Elevation values, see Elevation Values in the Tracker. 450
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Coordinate Input in Tracker


As long as the Tracker is shown during input, just type a number for the default parameter (the one shown in bold.) The cursor will automatically jump to the Tracker and enter the value. Note: This input method works if the Enable direct input into Tracker fields box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. Another way to enter the Tracker is to press Tab. The cursor jumps to the default field of the Tracker (the one shown in bold). Click Tab as many times as needed to activate the required Tracker field. Type in the desired number.

You can also activate fields by clicking them or typing the shortcut of the corresponding field. If the Tracker is displayed in its compact form, typing the shortcut for a hidden parameter will display it. To enter numeric coordinates, type the shortcut of the desired coordinate (X, Y, Z or D/R or A) immediately followed by the value you intend to assign to it, for example X3 or Y-4. The + prefix is optional for positive values. You can type coordinate values in any order. Note: This input method works if the Coordinate Shortcuts prefer Tracker box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. The other way to enter coordinates is through the Coordinates Box (enable it using Window > Palettes > Coordinates). The selected value is highlighted. At this point, you have several options: To enter another coordinate value, type another shortcut for the desired coordinate, then enter a value. To complete the element you are drawing, press Enter or click the checkmark icon in the Tracker. To fix the value of a coordinate, click the crosshair icon in the Tracker. The edited element will then jump into this position and, if Guide Lines are active, this will also display Guide Lines of the currently available type at this location to help you continue the input. To cancel the last operation, press Esc. Return to graphic input by typing the name of the edited coordinate again or by mouseclicking anywhere in the window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

451

Interaction

You can also perform additions or subtractions from the current value by typing a + or sign after the value. For example, typing x3+ will add 3 to the x value shown in the Tracker box. Notes for users of U.S. dimensions: Two dashes are required for subtraction of whole feet because the first dash is interpreted as an indication that inches are to follow. When 3 is entered, ArchiCAD assumes you mean three feet. Typing 36, 36, or 3-6 will enter three feet, six inches. Coordinates can be copied and pasted using the clipboard. The Cut, Copy and Paste menu items are inactive during numeric input, so you must use the standard shortcuts or the context menu. It is possible to enter a whole series of coordinates one after the other in the Tracker when drawing chains of elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, etc.). As soon as you have finished drawing the first element, the Edit Origin is immediately transferred to this endpoint, which becomes the starting point of the second element and is therefore given the x=0, y=0 value when working with relative coordinates.

You can combine coordinate input by fixing the value of a field and then editing the value of another one.

452

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options


Special Tracker options are available to let you further customize the Tracker function, using the Coordinate Input Logic checkboxes in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.

Show X-Y Coordinates relative to User origin in Tracker: If you check this box, the XY coordinates will always be shown as Absolute Cartesian values, even if you have activated the Relative Coordinates toggle button. This means that X-Y coordinates are shown as absolute values, and the RA or DA values are shown as relative values. Use relative angle measures: If you check this box, angle measures in the Tracker will be shown either: relative to the previous input segment, in case of polygon input, or relative to the grid, with the horizontal grid line as the zero value, and angle values shown relative to this line, up to 180 degrees. If this box is unchecked, angle values are shown from 0 to 360 degrees. Use angle relative to the active Guide Line: If you check this box, angle values in the Tracker will be shown relative to the active Guide Line. (You must first activate a Guide Line for this to work.) For information on all these options, see Tracker and Coordinate Input.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

453

Interaction

Ruler
The Ruler is an editing aid available at the top and left side of the screen in every ArchiCAD window, except the 3D Window and Schedules. Use the Ruler as an aid in navigation: it lets you know where you are in the project, at the current zoom. To show/hide the Ruler, do one of the following: use the View > Ruler toggle command use the Ruler toggle in the Standard toolbar You can also hide a ruler by right-clicking it and clicking the Ruler toggle. As you move the cursor on screen, feedback on the ruler shows you the vertical and horizontal position of the cursor relative to the User Origin (or, if no User Origin has been created, relative to the Project Origin). See Origins. Every time you create a new User Origin, the measurements shown on the Ruler change accordingly. The measurement units are the Model Units you set in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.

Place Orthogonal Guide Line Parallel to Ruler


At any time, click on the Ruler, then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler will be created. See Guide Lines.

Ruler Commands
The Rulers context menu (right-click anywhere on the Ruler) gives you a quick way to access related commands:

Click the Ruler toggle to hide the Ruler Click Cursor Projection toggle to include projection lines from the Ruler to the cursor position. (This will also turn on Cursor Projection in the 3D window.) Click Options > Project Preferences > Working Units to access this dialog box, where the Model Unit option determines the Rulers measurement units.

454

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Measure Tool
The Measure tool, located in the Standard toolbar, allows you to measure distances and areas in the project.

It is a temporary, on-screen function for quick feedback. To use the Measure Tool, activate its icon in the Standard Toolbar, or use the M shortcut. Click on a starting point (the top left corner of the rectangular wall, in the image below) and start to trace the wall. The Tracker displays the horizontal, vertical and radial distance measured from the starting point, as well as the angle.

You can Measure any number of segments in sequence: each click represents a new starting-point from which the next distance will be measured. After two or more clicks, the Tracker also shows a cumulative distance and the area (shown by a temporary gray area on screen). The image below shows the Measure tool feedback after three clicks, as you approach the last corner of the rectangular wall.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

455

Interaction

You can also use the Measure tool while creating elements. When you start drawing a Wall, for example, you can activate the Measure tool on the fly, measure (or even edit) a value with the fields it displays and then hit Enter to transfer this value into the appropriate field of the Tracker.

456

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Grid System
Two grid systems are provided to help you make drafting easier: the Construction Grid and the Snap Grid. You can set these up in View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids and Background. For more information, see Grids & Background Dialog Box. As a shortcut, many of these controls are available in the Standard toolbar and the Coordinates palette. Grids can be defined separately for the Floor Plan and any individual Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, or Layout window. Note that, in Floor Plan window, the same Grid settings will be used for all Stories. Note: You can also create, place and use custom local structural grids of different sizes and shapes using the Grid Tool. See The Grid Tool.

Construction Grid
The Construction Grid is used to reflect any characteristic spacing of your Project. The Construction Grid can also be used to define the foundation footings or the column grid of a building. Like the printed grids on traditional graph paper, the Construction Grid adds a visual orientation and sense of scale to the Floor Plan and the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/ Worksheet windows. The Construction Grid is normally visible on the Floor Plan, but you can turn it off with the Grid Display toggle command in the View > Grid and Editing Plane Options hierarchical menu or in the Standard Toolbars Grid pop-up menu.

Snapping to the Construction Grid


Construction Grid Snap is useful for inputting elements (e.g. Walls) that coincide with the Construction Grid. If Grid Snap is enabled (Alt+S), the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid, depending on what you set as your preferred option. See Grid Snap Function.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

457

Interaction

If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid, an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. This shortcut toggles between: No snap; Snap to Construction Grid; and Snap to Snap Grid.

Rotated Construction Grid


Depending on your projects layout, a rotated version of the construction grid may be more helpful than the default orthogonal one. Define the Rotation Angle in the View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids and Background dialog box.

You can also define a rotated grid by hand: first, choose Set Rotated Grid from the Standard Toolbar, then draw a vector on screen or click on an existing straight segment: this vector will represent the rotated grid angle relative to the horizontal axis.

To display the rotated version of your Construction Grid, click the Rotated Grid button in the Standard Toolbar grid menu or the Coordinates Palette.

458

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Auxiliary Construction Grid


The Construction Grid can be optionally enhanced with an Auxiliary Grid, which is also visible on the screen and is defined in View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids and Background. The Auxiliary Grid is often used to indicate the thickness of concrete walls or foundation footings, and can be used to create periodic or stepped grids.

Snap Grid
The Snap Grid is an invisible grid that you can use optionally to make input easier, by having the cursor snap to a predefined distances. When defining your Snap Grid in the Grids and Background dialog box, you will usually enter the smallest unit of measurement relevant to your Project. You can set different horizontal and vertical Snap Grid increments, allowing you to reflect the unique geometry of your Project. If Grid Snap is enabled (Alt+S), the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid, depending on what you set as your preferred option. See Grid Snap Function. Note: The Snap increments you define here can also be used for the Nudge shortcut - to easily move any element by a small defined factor, using a keyboard shortcut. See Nudging Elements. If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid, an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. This shortcut toggles between: No snap; Snap to Construction Grid; and Snap to Snap Grid. 459

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Grid Snap Function


The Grid Snap function allows precise graphic alignment of elements at consistent lengths and distances. When the Grid Snap function is active, you can only draw from one grid intersection to another; the grid pulls the cursor and makes it snap to the grid nodes. This allows you to position the cursor accurately, even at low zoom levels. When grid snap is active, it restricts the movement of the cursor to the nodes of either the Construction Grid or the Snap Grid. A small dot jumping from grid-point to grid-point indicates the current cursor position. The parameters of all grids are defined at View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids and Background. See also Grid System. To disable this feature (for example, to position a piece of furniture at a non-grid location), you can suspend or activate the grid snap feature by pressing Alt+S key.

Activate Grid Snap


To activate the Grid Snap function, do one of the following: Use the Alt+S Shortcut. Select Snap Grid or Construction Grid from View > Grid Snap Options. Use the View > Grid Snap menu command. The Snap function will use the last grid type used, either Construction or Snap grid. Select the Snap Grid or Construction Grid from the grid menu in the Standard Toolbar, or from the Coordinates Box.

Select one of the Snap On buttons (either Construction Grid or Snap Grid) in the Grids and Background dialog box.

Deactivate Grid Snap


To deactivate the Grid Snap function: Use the Alt+S shortcut key Use the View > Grid Snap menu command (deactivate the toggle).

460

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Grid Snap Toggle: Construction Grid vs. Snap Grid


If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid, an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. This shortcut toggles between: No snap; Snap to Construction Grid; and Snap to Snap Grid.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

461

Interaction

Guide Lines
Guide Lines are drafting aids which help you find special points and projections, to ensure precise input in both 2D and 3D windows. Guide Lines are based on the cursors relationship to the input plane and to existing elements. Once you find the Guide Line you need, press Shift during input to constrain your cursor to that Guide Line.

Turn Guide Lines on or off


Do one of the following: Use the toggle button in the Standard toolbar

Use a shortcut key to toggle Guide Lines on and off Note: The predefined Shortcut for this command is the L key, but may vary depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD. Use the View > Guide Lines toggle command

Constrain Cursor to Guide Lines


To constrain the cursor to the nearest Guide Line, press Shift during input. Note: This works if the Instant Guide Lines box and/or Lasting Guide Lines box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods. (They are checked by default.)

Topics in this Section: Working with Guide Lines Guide Line Options

462

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Working with Guide Lines


Instant Guide Lines During Input Display a Guide Line Along a Particular Edge Display a Guide Line at a Point Change Input Vector into a Guide Line Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler Make a Guide Line Active Drag/Offset Guide Lines Remove Guide Lines Show Guide Lines at Main (X, Y, Z) Directions Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent, Parallel, Perpendicular, Angle Bisector, Circle Center) Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display Instant Guide Lines During Input
Begin your input and see the Guide Lines appear. (These are called Instant Guide Lines.) For example, begin drawing a wall and move the cursor around to view the available Guide Lines.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

463

Interaction

You will see Guide Lines appear at fixed angle intervals, as well as Guide Lines along the X and Y coordinates.

To assist your input, constrain the cursor to the Guide Line you need by pressing Shift.

Note: This works if the Nearest Instant Guide Line box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.

Display a Guide Line Along a Particular Edge


During input, you can display a Guide Line on the edge of an existing element to help you when placing a new element. (This will be a Lasting Guide Line.) To do this: 1. Move your cursor to an element edge. 2. The Guide Line handle (the orange dot) appears. 3. Click on the handle: an active Guide Line appears on that edge.

464

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display.

4. This Guide Line will stay in place until you complete your next input, or until you remove it manually. For example, you want to draw a wall that aligns exactly with an existing wall. 1. Move your cursor to the edge of the existing wall and wait for the handle (the orange dot) to appear. 2. Click on the handle to activate the Guide Line.

3. Now that the Guide Line is in place and active, you can draw a Wall along it.

Display a Guide Line at a Point


During input, you can display a preferred Guide Line at the status point of an existing element. To do this: 1. Move your cursor to the point at which you want to display a Guide Line. (You are temporarily interrupting your element input.) 465

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

2. Press and hold the mouse button to see the available Guide Lines (these are Multi-choice Guide Lines that only appear until you choose one of them). (The cursor turns into a fist.) See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display. 3. When the needed Guide Line appears, choose it by letting go of the mouse button. (It is now a Lasting Guide Line.) 4. Then continue input where you left off, using the Guide Line to constrain your cursor as needed. For example, suppose you are drawing this wall, and want it to extend it just far enough so that its endpoint is aligned with the vertical extension of the slabs upper corner.

Move your cursor to the corner of the slab, then press the mouse button down to see the potential Guide Lines. (The cursor changes to a fist; your wall input is temporarily interrupted.) You want the Guide Line that is aligned with the slab edge: when it is shown, let go of the mouse button.

Now the Guide Line is active where you need it.

466

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Finish your wall input up to the Guide Line.

Place Guide Line between Two Points


Suppose you want to place a Guide Line between the endpoints of these two Walls:

1. Draw a vector to one of the endpoints. 2. Press the mouse button down to get the multi-choice Guide Lines (the cursor changes to a fist).

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

467

Interaction

3. Move the cursor to the other endpoint. The cursor changes to a checkmark.

4. Release the mouse button: a Guide Line is placed between the two points.

Create Guide Line Segment


Use this command to create a Guide Line segment anywhere with two clicks. The command is available by default in the Standard Toolbars Guide Lines drop-down.

Change Input Vector into a Guide Line


Independent of your default Guide Line definitions, you can place a Guide Line (or Guide Circle) at any time during input using the Place Guide Line/Guide Circle command from the context menu.

468

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

After clicking on screen to begin input, choose the Place Guide Line (Circle) command from the context menu. A lasting Guide Line (or circle) will appear.

Similarly, you can use the Convert to Guide Line Segment command from the context menu. The current vector will be transformed into a Guide Line. In this case, the length of the Guide Line is limited to the length of the vector you drew and will not run across the whole screen.

Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler


At any time, click on the Ruler at the top or left edge of the screen, and then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler is created. See Ruler.

Make a Guide Line Active


If you click on a Guide Line handle (the orange dot), that Guide Line becomes active. The active Guide Line is relevant for constraining the input vector in a particular direction relative to this active Guide Line (e.g. parallel, perpendicular, tangential) defining additional relative Guide Lines: these are relative to this active Guide Line. One Guide Line at a time can be made active. See Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent, Parallel, Perpendicular, Angle Bisector, Circle Center).

Drag/Offset Guide Lines


To move an existing Guide Line to a more useful location, move the cursor to the Guide Line. Click on its handle (the orange dot), then move the Guide Line. (Or use the Tracker to define its new location numerically.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

469

Interaction

See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display.

Remove Guide Lines


To get rid of all visible Guide Lines at once: Right-click anywhere in the window to activate the context menu and choose Remove all Guide Lines.

To remove a specific Guide Line, do one of the following: Place the cursor on it, activate the context menu and choose Remove Guide Line command.

Place the cursor on it. Move the cursor over the handle (the orange dot) and press Esc.

470

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Show Guide Lines at Main (X, Y, Z) Directions


Automatic yellow highlights on the Guide Lines alert you to the main X and Y axes of the Editing Plane. In the 3D window, the Z-direction (perpendicular to the current Editing Plane) is also available during Move operations that can take place in any plane. Note: This works if the Main-Direction Guide lines option is turned on in Guide Lines Options.

Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent, Parallel, Perpendicular, Angle Bisector, Circle Center)
During input, certain Guide Lines will pop up which are relative to the active Guide Line. Note: This works if the Relative-direction Guide lines option is turned on in Guide Lines Options. The active Guide Line is shown in yellow; the relative Guide Line is marked with an icon to indicate that it is Tangent Parallel Perpendicular to the yellow Guide Line. 471

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Two other relative Guide Lines are available: Angle Bisector (if you begin your input at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines) Circle centerline (if you intersect an active Guide Circle) (In the case of an angle bisector, you should begin your input at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines, which do not need to be active.) For example, a Guide Line along this curved element is currently active. As you input a Wall, a relative Guide Line, tangent to the active Guide Line, appears automatically; the yellow feedback indicates that this Guide Line is tangent to the active one. Snap to the tangent Guide Line to ensure precise Wall input.

Parallel and Perpendicular Guide Lines:

472

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Angle Bisector Guide Line:

Circle Center Guide Line:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

473

Interaction

Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display


Force Guide Line Display is a keyboard shortcut that makes using Guide Lines even smoother. The predefined Shortcut for this command is the Q key, but may vary depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD. Click this shortcut: to make multi-choice Guide Lines appear during element input, when your cursor rests on any point, without having to press the mouse button to create or activate a Guide Line along an edge, without having to click the Guide Line handle with your cursor over a Guide Line handle (the orange dot), to grab the Guide Line and move it, without having to click the Guide Line handle

474

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Guide Line Options


Guide Line options are available at: View > Guide Line Options

and from the Guide Lines toggle command in the Standard Toolbar.

Use Guide Lines Options to activate/deactivate three categories of Guide Lines (they are all activated by default): Main-direction Guide Lines. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear on the X and Y coordinate axes. Relative-direction Guide Lines. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear at defined directions (tangential, parallel, perpendicular) to the active Guide Line. Also, an angle-bisector Guide Line will appear during input begun at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines. Incremental Angles. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear at the increments defined in Guide Line Settings.

Guide Line Angles and Colors


Use Guide Lines Settings in the Work Environment to define your preferred angle increments and to set default Guide Line colors: go to Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines. For more information, see Guide Line Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

475

Interaction

Editing Plane in 3D Window


When you open the 3D window, an editing plane automatically appears: new elements will be placed onto this editing plane. If you begin element input by snapping to an existing element hotspot or surface, the editing plane will automatically move to that position. You can reposition the editing plane manually at any time. During editing, the editing plane may adjust itself automatically. For example, as you drag this roof ridge, the editing plane automatically becomes the vertical plane on which you drag the cursor.

Topics in this section:

Editing Plane Display Editing Plane and 3D Element Input Reposition Editing Plane

476

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Editing Plane Display


The Editing Plane is shown by default in the 3D window. To hide it, use the toggle at View > Editing Plane Display. Note: Regardless of the state of this toggle, the Editing Plane will be temporarily displayed whenever necessary: for example, after you choose a plane for Ruled Shell input.

Show Editing Plane During Editing Operations Only


If the Editing Plane Display toggle is on (View > Editing Plane Display) - and it is on by default - you can still limit its appearance using this checkbox, at Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. If you check this box, the Editing Plane will appear only during the time you are actively editing in the 3D window (provided that the Editing Plane Display toggle is turned on.) When you are done with the operation, the Editing Plane disappears.

3D Editing Plane: Color and Grid


The 3D Editing Plane has a grid system that is the same as the one on the Floor Plan, and reflects the X-Y coordinate plane, so you can use the Tracker to numerically input element geometry. As with the 2D grid, use View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids and Background to set up your grid and color preferences (the 3D window must be active to set editing plane options). As in the 2D window, you can rotate the grid, and use Grid Snap and Guide Lines to aid in element placement.

See also Grids & Background Dialog Box. As you zoom in within the 3D Window, you will notice that the Editing Planes additional automatic gridlines appear on the Editing Plane. You cannot snap to these, but they can help achieve accurate input.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

477

Interaction

Editing Plane and 3D Element Input


Elements placed in the 3D window are located at their default elevation; the Editing Plane automatically jumps to that elevation. (Default elevations can vary for each construction element). If you begin element input by snapping to an existing element hotspot, the editing plane will automatically move to that position. Exception: You can lock input to the existing editing plane before you start creating the new element. See Lock to Plane. If you change the User Origin (Alt + Shift on an element node), the editing plane shifts accordingly. Elements created in the 3D window will be assigned a Home Story by their elevation at the time of input: if you draw the element at a level that corresponds to Story 2, then your new element is assigned a Home Story of Story 2. The Home Story is the story closest to the elements bottom elevation.

Note: The elevation of wall openings is strictly determined by the current values in Door/ Window Settings.

478

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Reposition Editing Plane


You may prefer the editing plane in a different location than the default. You can change the editing plane either before you begin input, or during input. The available commands vary depending on your editing situation. Note: The Offset and Snap to Story commands are available only before you begin input.

Where To Find Editing Plane Commands


To reposition the editing plane, use the commands from one of the following places: Click the square-shaped editing plane Grip.

Right-click to bring up a Context menu, then choose Editing Plane.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

479

Interaction

Access the commands from the Drafting Aids Toolbar.

Access the commands from View > Grid and Editing Plane Options.

Snap Editing Plane to Story


Use this command prior to element input. To snap the editing plane to a specific level corresponding to a project story: 1. Bring up the Editing Plane commands. 2. Choose Snap to Story. 3. From the appearing dialog box, choose the project story to which you want to move the editing plane.

Offset Editing Plane


You may wish to move the editing plane by offsetting it - for example, if you need to create intersection points between existing elements and the editing plane, at a different location than the current editing plane. Use this command prior to element input. To offset the editing plane: 1. Bring up the Editing Plane commands. 480
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

2. Choose Offset. 3. Use the cursor to drag the editing plane to the desired position, or define the offset distance numerically. Notice that a Guide Line appears marking the story positions, to make it easier to place the editing plane.

Offset Editing Plane Example


For example, you wish to edit the Slab shown below by dragging its cornerpoint to a new position. You want to drag it so that the Slab corner will be vertically aligned to the Wall above it, at the place where the Wall is one meter high. The solution is to offset the editing plane (currently the same plane as the top of the slab) by 1 meter and find the place where the plane intersects the Wall.

1. From the Editing Plane grip or context menu, choose Offset.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

481

Interaction

2. Start moving your cursor upwards, and enter the one-meter distance into the Tracker.

3. The editing plane jumps to the required position.

4. While dragging the Slab cornerpoint, find the intersection of the Wall with the editing plane at its new location. Click to place the Slab point.

482

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Other Editing Plane Commands


Choose one of the options for your preferred editing plane orientation (the available options vary depending on the orientation of the current editing plane). Next Plane: Click this to switch to the next editing plane that makes sense in the editing context. Pick Plane. See Pick Plane. Horizontal: Rotates the editing plane to a horizontal position. Vertical: Rotates the editing plane to a vertical position. Offset. See Offset Editing Plane. Look to Perpendicular: Sets up the 3D window so that it is perpendicular to the Editing Plane. Projection to Editing Plane. See Projection onto Editing Plane. Lock to Plane. See Lock to Plane.

Pick Plane
Once you click this command, the grey rectangle plane chooser feedback appears.

Do one of the following to pick the desired plane for the editing plane: Move the cursor onto any plane of an existing element. A rectangle will help you see the plane.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

483

Interaction

Click on any three points in space (such as three element hotspots) to define a plane. Click on an element edge plus another point (in either order) to define a plane.

Pick Plane Example


For example, say you need to cut a hole in slanted roof plane. The hole in the Roof must be a projection of a 2x2 meter square as measured on a horizontal plane. When you select the Roof and the Subtract from Polygon command, the editing plane automatically corresponds to the Roof plane.

Here, however, the horizontal plane at the story level would a more useful editing plane, because that is where you want to measure the hole dimensions. 1. From the context menu, choose Editing Plane, then Pick Plane. (Or access this command from the editing plane grip.)

484

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

2. Move your cursor until the grey rectangle plane chooser icon indicates the plane atop the slab. Click to pick that plane as the editing plane.

3. Continue the editing operation by defining the shape of the hole numerically on the Floor Plan. Note that your editing is projected onto the Roof.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

485

Interaction

Projection onto Editing Plane


By default, as you perform graphical editing, your cursor is moving on the editing plane. If needed, you can redefine the direction of this cursor projection. To change the cursor projection with respect to the editing plane: 1. Begin the editing operation. 2. From the context menu, select Editing Plane Projection. Alternatively, click on the Editing Plane Grip to bring up the same commands. 3. Choose one of the projection options:

Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular to Editing Plane Perpendicular to Result Plane

Lock to Plane
Use this command lock input to the existing editing plane before you start creating the new element. This is useful, for example, if you wish to create an element on the existing editing plane, by tracing the shape of an existing element (e.g. roof) on another plane. 1. Bring up the Editing Plane commands. 2. From the Projection to Editing Plane sub-menu, choose the Lock to Plane toggle.

The new element will be placed onto the editing plane, even if your cursor is on another plane.

Editing Plane Projection Example


For example, here you want to cut a hole in the Roof so the hole is vertically above the four points of the Slab. 1. Select the Roof and choose Subtract from Polygon from the pet palette. 2. Click on a corner of the Slab. 486
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

3. Notice that the projection line is perpendicular to the editing plane, which is not what you need.

4. Change the projection to Vertical: From the context menu, select Editing Plane Projection. Alternatively, click on the blue Editing Plane Grip to bring up the same commands. Choose Vertical.

5. The editing is now projected vertically toward the editing plane.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

487

Interaction

6. Draw the hole in the Roof as desired, by clicking on the four corners of the slab to project its geometry vertically onto the Roof above.

488

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Gravity
When placing a new Wall, Column, Beam or Object-type element (including a Level Dimension), you can use the Gravity function to automatically place the new element directly on top of a Slab, Roof, Shell or Mesh on the same story, thus taking on the elevation of the element it is placed on. Gravity is useful if you are placing elements on the Floor Plan. (In the 3D window, the Surface Snap feature achieves this same effect. See Surface Snap in 3D.) To choose an option, use the Gravity controls in the Standard toolbar or the icons of the Coordinates palette.

Note: Gravity only affects newly created elements and cannot be used for editing existing ones. For example, to place trees on top of a Mesh, activate the Object tool, choose the tree, then select Gravitate to Mesh from the Gravity pop-up in the Standard toolbar. When you then place the trees, they will gravitate to the elevation of the Mesh at the point of placement.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

489

Interaction

Level Dimensions placed with Gravity On, above Slabs, Roofs, Shells or Meshes, are associated to them.

If the Gravity function is on (activate Gravity icon) while you are placing a new element, but there is no underlying Slab, Roof, Shell or Mesh, then the new element will be placed as usual, at the elevation defined in its Tool Settings.

490

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Mouse Constraints
ArchiCADs Mouse Constraints are like having a computerized T-square and triangle available while drafting in the Floor Plan. They are editing aids that can be used as an alternative to Guide Lines, although most users will prefer to use Guide Lines in 2D windows. See Guide Lines. The angle pairs they define can be used to lock the cursor at a particular drawing angle, by pressing Shift during input. The mechanism can only be engaged while drawing or editing an element, as indicated by the thick rubber band line shown in the Floor Plan or the ghosted element contour shown in the 3D Window. It temporarily locks the cursors polar angle value in the Coordinates Palette using one of the angle pairs defined in the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods. See Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box. Three orthogonal angles/angle pairs can be specified: The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the main grid The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the rotated grid The fixed angle set The fixed angle set can be set relative to the rotated grid or the main grid. A practical use for the fixed angle orthogonal set would be aligning multiple elements with a roadway. In addition, you can check one or both Guide Line constraint options: Nearest Instant Guide Line Lasting Guide Lines

Using Mouse Constraints Projection of Cursor with Mouse Constraints

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

491

Interaction

Using Mouse Constraints


Constraining the drawing direction helps you precisely align or connect new elements. To use the orthogonal direction sets for drawing a new element: 1. Make sure the Grid Snap Function is disabled. See Grid Snap Function. 2. Click to start drawing an element.

3. Move the cursor from this starting point and hold down the Shift key. ArchiCAD will search for the closest enabled constraint direction.

492

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

4. If the constrained direction is not what you had in mind, release the Shift key and move the cursor to a position closer to the desired direction, then hold down the Shift key.

5. When you have chosen the appropriate constraint direction, click the cursor again to place the endpoint of the element. Since the direction remains locked, you can align this endpoint with other elements using the projection mode of the cursor.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

493

Interaction

Projection of Cursor with Mouse Constraints


When the drawing direction is constrained by pressing Shift, a dotted line connects the unfinished element with the location of the cursor.

In the Control Box, you can vary the display of this dotted line among three possible settings (Cursor Snap Variants): Perpendicular to the constrained direction Horizontal from the constrained direction Vertical from the constrained direction These options allow you to best align the element under construction with other already existing elements. To switch among these options: 1. Display the Control Box. (Window > Palettes > Control Box) 2. Draw an input vector on screen. 3. Press Shift to enable a constraint. The Cursor Snap Variants pop-up is now active in the Control Box. Move your cursor to this popup and choose the cursor snap variant you need. See Control Box.

494

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Coordinate Constraints
You can lock a cursor coordinate and thereby restrict the movement of the cursor by pressing Alt (Windows) or Opt (MacOS) and either X, Y, A, or R/D on the keyboard. If Guide Lines are active: Alt/Opt + X produces a vertical Guide Line.

Alt/Opt + Y produces a horizontal Guide Line. Alt/Opt + A (having defined the Angle value numerically or drawing in a sample direction) produces a corresponding Guide Line. Alt/Opt + R produces a Guide Circle whose radius is determined numerically or graphically. To unlock the constraint, just press the same key combination (e.g. Alt/Opt + X) again. If Guide Lines are inactive, the locking function works the same way, but you will not see the Guide Lines. Another way to lock a coordinate during input is to choose the Lock to Guide Line command from the context menu, if you have already snapped to a Guide Line.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

495

Interaction

Relative Construction Methods


In addition to the Guide Lines feature, the relative construction methods also constrain the element construction direction to a constant angle or offset. They are accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar:

They can also be accessed from the third button of the Control Box.

Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. See Control Box for more information.

These Relative Construction Methods are described here: Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints Angle Bisector Constraint Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods) Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector

496

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints


Use these commands to draw new elements that are either parallel to or perpendicular to a reference line or existing element edge. The Parallel and Perpendicular constraint commands are accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar:

They are also accessible from the Control Box. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. See Control Box for more information. 1. Make sure that the Grid Snap Function is inactive. See Grid Snap Function. 2. Choose the Perpendicular or Parallel icon and click it to make it active.

3. Select a line or an element edge as a reference by clicking it (the Mercedes feedback will indicate an edge), or draw a temporary reference line using the cursor. The cursor icon will indicate which method (parallel or perpendicular) is active. Note: The reference edge/line will not be shown as selected; a newly drawn reference line will not remain visible on-screen. 4. Draw the new element. The new element you draw will be perpendicular or parallel to the reference line (depending on the method selected).

Note: You can also select the Perpendicular or Parallel method after you have started drawing an element. In this case, the drawing operation is frozen until you have either drawn or selected a reference line or edge.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

497

Interaction

Angle Bisector Constraint


Using the Angle Bisector relative construction method, you can draw elements bisecting the angle formed by other elements or temporary reference vectors.

This command is accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar:

It is also accessible from the Control Box.

Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. See Control Box for more information. You can either start drawing the new element before activating the Angle Bisector method and defining the reference vectors, or the other way round. Before using Angle Bisector constraint, make sure that Grid Snap is disabled. Click the Angle Bisector icon, then define the reference vectors by either clicking on two existing element edges or lines, or drawing two temporary lines. While you are clicking or drawing the reference lines, the cursor icon will show that you have activated the angle bisector constraint.

(The reference edges/lines will not be shown as selected; the temporary lines will not remain visible on-screen.)

498

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

The mouse is constrained to the bisecting angle between the two reference lines. Before you actually draw the element, the cursor is already constrained, and you can see a small black dot move along the line that would be drawn at that angle.

As for any other constraint, you can use remote cursor snap to define the other endpoint of the drawn line.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

499

Interaction

Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods)


The Offset Constraint and Multiple Offset Constraint methods help you create elements that are at a given offset from a reference line, using any tool that has a linear or polygonal input method.

To draw an offset segment or offset polygonal element: 1. Activate the tool with which you want to draw the new element. 2. Choose or activate the Offset command using one of the following methods: the drop-down menu of the Drafting Aids toolbar

the Control Box See Control Box.

3. Draw a reference line or an open or closed reference polyline. The cursor displays the offset or multiple offset icon. Note: You can, if you wish, create this polyline using the Magic Wand. See Magic Wand. 4. Double-click to complete the reference line/polyline. 5. A rubber band outline appears; drag the cursor to the final location of the new element. 6. If you are using the regular Offset command: Click once to place the element. 7. If you are using Multiple Offset: drag and click as many times as the number of elements you wish to place; double-click, or click Cancel in the Control Box, to place the final element.

500

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D


The Align to Surface relative construction method is only active when working in the 3D Window. It enables you to fit elements onto non-horizontal planes when working in 3D views.

This method automatically identifies the intersection of a selected plane and the working plane of the cursor. The working plane is often horizontal. However, in special cases, for example when moving a hole in a roof plane, the cursors working plane is angled. It is also possible to align to curved surfaces, for example when fitting an object to a curved wall. The limitation here is that if the cursor is moving in an angled plane, it is not possible to fit to a curved surface, only the tangential plane of the surface.

Using the Constraint when Creating New Elements


1. To use the constraint, first open the 3D Window. 2. Choose the tool for the element you wish to add. 3. Adjust your User Origin if necessary. 4. Choose and activate the Align to Surface Relative Construction method in the Control Box.

5. Click on any surface in the 3D view you want to align your new element to. 6. A black dot will appear on the selected plane at the height of the current User Origin. The dot will follow the cursor constrained to the intersection line of your reference plane and the User Origin plane.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

501

Interaction

7. Click where you want to start drawing your new element. The element will be constrained to the intersection line. Finish drawing the element in the usual way.

Using Align to Surface with Existing Elements


1. Activate the 3D Window. 2. Adjust the User Origin if necessary. For more information, see Origins. 3. Select the element you wish to edit. 4. Choose the Edit command you wish to execute, e.g., stretch an edge of a slab to the intersection of a roof and the User Origin. 5. Click a reference point or edge to start editing. 6. Select the Align to Surface icon from the Drafting Aids toolbar or the Control box, and activate the constraint as described above. 7. Choose your reference plane. 8. Finish editing the element.

502

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Snapping to Existing Elements


Element Snap
ArchiCAD helps you to move or reshape elements by snapping them to existing ones as part of a move operation. The Element Snap function can be enabled and disabled using the Options > Element Snap toggle command. (This command is also available on the Standard Toolbar.)

Element Snap can be toggled on and off while you work using the E shortcut. Note: Element Snap can only be used when Grid Snap is disabled. If you select an element and then start moving it with Element Snap active, you will see that its special points change to small squares.

These special points include: The selection dot points of the element including anchor points The division points of the element (if Special Snap Points are enabled.) See Special Snap Points. The tip of the cursor When one of these selection dots encounters a node, anchor point or edge of another element where the cursor changes its shape to indicate a special relation, that selection dot becomes larger

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

503

Interaction

showing that the element is attracted to the sensitive point. You can then click to join the two elements without having to place the cursor at the actual joining point.

If more than one snapping point touches an eligible point on the other element, you will see that these turn black. You can use the spacebar to cycle through possible points. Click when the one you need is displayed with the larger empty square.

Surface Snap in 3D
Your cursor will snap to any surface (as well as edges and points) in the 3D window - for easy input among elements in space. Surface Snap is enabled by default. This function can be enabled and disabled using the Options > Surface Snap toggle command. (You can achieve the Surface Snap effect in 2D windows, too, by using the Gravity feature. See Gravity.)

504

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Snap Points


Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector
Special Snap Points are temporary hotspots that appear at particular intervals (defined by you) on elements, to help you place and draw new elements more accurately.

To activate Special Snap Points:


1. Click the Special Snap Point toggle on the Standard toolbar, or in the View menu. 2. Hover your cursor over the element on which you want to see the Special Snap Points. 3. The Snap Points appear. Their number and position depend on the options set by you. See Define Special Snap Points, below. 4. The Snap Points act as a temporary hotspot - you can snap to them with your cursor. You can start drawing new elements from these points or use them for editing other elements in relation to them. 5. Special Snap Points will disappear after about 5 seconds. Note: Although Special Snap Points will disappear on their own after a set interval by default, you can opt to have the snap points remain visible until you either place an element or change to another view or story: disable the Autohide Special Snap points checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Define Special Snap Points


To define division points and custom distances: 1. Click the Special Snap Values drop-down menu from the Standard Toolbar. (The same commands are available from View > Special Snap Options > Set Special Snap Values menu command.)

These controls are also available as commands in the Control Box. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. See Control Box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

505

Interaction

2. Choose the intervals at which to place your special snap points: Half: Divides an edge into two equal parts. Division: Divides an edge into the set number of segments. (Range: 3-20) Percentage: Divides an edge into two parts according to the set percentage. Distance: Divides an edge into segments that are the set distance apart. Distances and percentages are always calculated from the endpoint that is closest to the cursor. 3. Define the values for your divisions, percentage, and/or distance by clicking the Set Special Snap Values command from this drop-down menu.

Disable Special Snap Points


In the Standard Toolbar or the View menu, toggle the Special Snap Points command to Off.

Special Snap Point Color


To customize the color of your Special Snap Points, use the control in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Special Snap Points Options


From the Special Snap Points menu in the Standard Toolbar (or the View menu), choose one of two options for setting your Special Snap Points:

506

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Along Entire Element (snap points appear at the defined intervals along the whole element, even if it is intersected by other elements)

Between Intersection Points (snap points are placed on the chosen element only from one intersection point to the next.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

507

Interaction

Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector


In addition, you can display Special Snap Points on a temporary vector used while drawing elements. The method can be activated with the Special Snap icon among the relative construction icons in the Control Box.

See Control Box. In the following example, you will draw a Wall that starts at one- fourth of the gap between two endpoints of two other Walls. 1. Start by choosing the Divisions option in Special Snap Point Settings, then type 4 as the number of Divisions.

2. Make sure that Grid Snap is inactive. Activate the Wall tool, then choose and activate the Special Snap Point icon in the Control Box.

3. Start drawing the reference vector from the endpoint of one of the Walls.

508

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

4. A dashed line is drawn indicating the reference vector, with small black dots at the locations of the special snap points. Click the endpoint of the other Wall to terminate the definition of the reference vector.

The Edit Origin is relocated to the place of the generated special snap point.

You can start drawing the new Wall.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

509

Interaction

Cursor Snap Range


To help locate hotspots on the screen, the cursor gravitates toward edges and nodes. The attraction of the cursor by elements is defined in pixels in the bottom section of the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods dialog box.

Cursor Snap Range can be set between 1 and 9 pixels. 3-4 pixels is a comfortable setting, but at small zoom levels you may hit hotspots that you did not wish to snap to. If you have good pointing skills, use 1 pixel and you will not be forced to zoom in. Cursor Snap Range will also help you to automatically snap to special points including the section points of existing lines or edges, perpendicular projections from the Edit Origin to existing lines or edges, and tangential points of the rubber band line along existing arcs, splines, curved edges, etc. The cursors shape informs you about the type of special point ArchiCAD has found.

510

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Editing Elements
Basic Editing Operations Edit Selection Set Cancel Operations Pet Palettes Move Elements Offset All Edges Intersect Two Elements Align Elements Distribute Elements Modify Element Sizes Explode into Current View Create Element Duplicates Drag & Drop Parameter Transfer Group Elements Lock/Unlock Elements Display Order Magic Wand Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

511

Interaction

Basic Editing Operations


Topics in this section: Cut Copy Paste Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects Delete Undo/Redo Cut
The Edit > Cut command removes selected elements from a Project and places them on the Clipboard for future use via the Paste command. It can also be used for dialog box or Coordinates Palette numeric field contents. Note: The Cut command is not available in the 3D Window. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. If you cut a construction element from a Model-type Section/Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, the element is also cut from the Floor Plan. In Text type windows, you can use the Cut command as in any word processor.

Copy
The Edit > Copy command puts the selected construction or text elements on the Clipboard, but the selected elements are not removed from the original document. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using Copy/Paste. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy command in a model-type Section window.) Note: To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror a Copy, press Ctrl while executing the regular Drag, Rotate or Mirror command. In the 3D window, the Copy command is only available with the Marquee tool. See Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool.

Paste
Use Edit > Paste command to insert the contents of the Clipboard onto the current Project or a text Window. 512
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

When pasting cut elements into a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window, the elements are pasted as drawing primitives (points, lines and fills). You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using either Cut/Paste or Copy/Paste. The Paste command is not available in the 3D window. When you are pasting with a multiple story marquee, an alert appears asking you to identify the copied story to merge to the current one.

See also Copy-Paste Dimension Text. If you Cut/Copy and then Paste a selection between stories at the same zoom level with no Panning operations in between, the contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the same position they were originally cut or copied from. If there are several possible options for locating the pasted Clipboard contents, the Paste Options dialog box appears. (The dialog box appears if the pasted elements cannot appear in their entirety in the Window at the current zoom level, or if it is possible to locate the pasted elements relative to either the Active view or a Reference view.) See also Paste Options Dialog Box.

Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories


The Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

513

Interaction

Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects


When pasting elements to another project, remember that element attributes are identified by name. If the pasted elements refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, the necessary attributes will be appended. If the elements refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project. The Clipboard can be used not only to hold ArchiCAD elements for pasting, but also to import bitmap graphics and other types of information. You can paste multi-line texts from wordprocessing applications into ArchiCAD. If you have copied items from an external application, you have several options - depending on the type of copied item - for pasting them into ArchiCAD. For more information, see Pasting Dialog Box.

Delete
The Edit > Delete command removes selected items from Project or text Windows. The deleted elements are not preserved on the Clipboard. They are easily retrieved by Undo. The keyboard equivalent of Delete is hitting the Backspace or Delete key. Deleting construction elements in any model window (Floor Plan, 3D, model-type Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document) will also clear these elements from all the other windows. Note: Deleting any additional (i.e. manually added) elements from a model-type Section/ Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, or any elements from a drawing-type Section/ Elevation/IE window will leave all other windows unchanged.

Undo/Redo
The Undo and Redo commands allow you to undo (revert to a previous step) and redo a large number of construction operations. The name of the command to be undone is displayed in the menu along with the Undo or Redo command. This capability also allows you to test tentative solutions by trying them out until you arrive at the desired result. The number of steps that can be undone and redone (from 1 to 99) is set using in the Options > Work Environment > Data Safety & Integrity dialog box (Undo Limit). The default value is 20. After redoing a series of steps, Undo will only be available when you complete a new undoable action. All model and drafting operations can be undone step by step, chronologically, regardless of the model or drawing view they were performed in.

514

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

In text type windows, only the last editing step can be undone/redone. (Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function, GDL script windows, Project Notes, and Report windows.) Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable. Note: Each time you save the Project, your previously available Undo steps will be cleared. In case of a crash, Autosave will save your Project. Autosave does not clear the undoable steps.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

515

Interaction

Cancel Operations
By successively pressing the Esc key, you will achieve the following actions: 1. Cancel current operation entirely (during input) 2. Deselect selected item(s), if any 3. Remove Marquee selection, if any 4. If nothing is selected: Switch to Arrow tool During input, pressing the Backspace key will cancel the operation. Warning: Pressing Backspace with any items selected will delete those items!

516

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Pet Palettes
A pet palette with relevant commands appears with most on-screen editing operations. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following factors: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge or node) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need.

You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation with a second mouse click. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. For more information on customizing pet palette functions, see Dialog Boxes and Palettes.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

517

Interaction

Move Elements
You can move elements individually or collectively. You can nudge them in increments; you can drag, rotate or mirror them along a horizontal plane and through vertical displacement, that is, by changing their elevation values. Note: To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror a Copy, press Ctrl while executing the regular Drag, Rotate or Mirror command. To move elements, you can: Select them and choose the corresponding menu command from the Edit > Move menu (with any tool active in the Toolbox) or the Move commands in the context menu of a selected element- as with the selected column in this image:

With any tool active, click on a node and then choose the desired shortcut in the appearing pet palette.

Nudging Elements Dragging Elements Rotating Elements Mirroring Elements Elevating Elements

518

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Nudging Elements
A quick way to move elements on the screen is to use the Nudge feature: select one or more elements, then use Shift + an arrow key to move the element left, right, up or down. The Nudge factor - the increment by which you will move the element - is the same as the distance entered for your Snap Grid in View > Grids & Editing Plane > Grids & Background. See Grid System.

In the 3D window, Nudge will move the element left, right, forward or backward on a horizontal plane. To Nudge a selected element in larger increments, use Shift + Alt/Opt + an arrow key. This will move the selected elements by the distance entered for your Construction Grid in View > Grid and Editing Plane Options > Grids & Background.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

519

Interaction

Dragging Elements
To drag an element, do one of the following: With Quick Selection: click on the elements surface and drag it to its new position. See Quick Selection of Surface Areas. Select the Element; select the Edit > Move > Drag command, and draw a temporary vector anywhere in the active window: the element will be dragged to its new location according to this vectors length and direction. Select the element, select the Drag icon from the pet palette, then drag the element.

Select the element, then access the drag command with the context menu or using the Drag command shortcut (Ctrl+D). Note: To Drag a Copy, press Ctrl while executing the regular Drag command.

520

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To move a wall, select it, then take hold of it anywhere on its surface and drag it with the cursor to its new location. (The accompanying pet palette shows the Drag command activated.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

521

Interaction

All selected elements are moved to a new location. Single elements are accompanied by a ghost outline or boundary as you move them. Selections containing grouped elements appear as a grayed bounding box as you move them.

These functions will also work when several elements have been simultaneously selected. All of the selected elements will be dragged along the same vector. In the image below, we select a wall, table and chair, and drag them all at the same time to their new position.

Note: In 3D, dragging can also change the elevation of the selected elements. To constrain the movement of the elements to the horizontal plane, activate the horizontal-vertical angle pair in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods, make sure the Drag Horizontally icon is active in the appearing pet palette, and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the elements.

522

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Rotating Elements
See also Rotating Beam and Column Profiles, below. To rotate an element: Select the Element.

Select the Edit > Move > Rotate command (or Move > Rotate from the selected elements context menu). Alternatively, click again on a node or edge of the selected element to bring up the pet palette, then choose the Rotate command.

Or use the Ctrl (Cmd) + E shortcut. Click to define the center of rotation of the selected elements. Click to define the starting point of the rotation arc and its radius.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

523

Interaction

Move the cursor and click to complete the rotation arc.

Note: To Rotate a Copy, press Ctrl while executing the regular Rotate command. You can rotate selected elements in the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window, and drawing elements only in Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/Worksheet windows. Even in the 3D Window, rotation is always performed across a horizontal plane.

Rotating Beam and Column Profiles


There are two ways to rotate Beams and Columns with respect to their profiles. The regular Rotate command (described above) rotates the Beam/Column element together with its extrusion vector (i.e. the Beam reference line or the Column axis.)

When using a Beam or Column that is a complex profile, you may wish to rotate the profile itself.

524

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To do this, use the Rotate Profile command from the pet palette of the selected element in the 3D window.

Note: The same command is available as Rotation Angle or Rotate Profile in the Settings dialog boxes of the Column/Beam elements.)

Rotating Shell Profiles


Shell profiles can also be rotated graphically, using the Rotate Profile command from the pet palette of selected Shells. See Graphical Editing of Shells.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

525

Interaction

Mirroring Elements
Mirroring creates a mirror image of selected elements on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. To Mirror an element: Select the Element(s) you want to mirror. Here, we want to place the table and chairs in the facing direction, at the other side of the room.

Select the Edit > Move > Mirror command, or choose the Mirror command from the context menu or the pet palette.

Define the mirroring axis with two clicks, as if you were drawing a Line.

526

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

The mirrored elements will be placed after the second click.

Notes: To Mirror a Copy, press Ctrl while executing the regular Mirror command. Any number of Doors and Windows can be mirrored at a time. The mirrored Door/ Window will always be in line with the wall that contains the original. Select the Door/ Window; click once. This click is the axis of the mirroring action. Text, Line arrowheads and Dimensions will not be mirrored, only their bounding box. Mirrored Text blocks, Labels, Dimensions and Fill polygon area labels are always readable from the bottom and the left side of the drawing. Zone stamps cannot be mirrored.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

527

Interaction

Elevating Elements
The Elevate command allows you to move selected elements vertically along the Z axis.

In the Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE windows:


1. Select the element. 2. Choose the Edit > Move > Elevate command, or the Elevate command from the pet palette.

This brings up the Elevate dialog box.

3. Type the value by which you wish to raise or lower all selected elements 4. To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, check Set Home Story by Elevation. 5. Click OK. This command is well-suited to changing the elevations of large numbers of similar elements (i.e., walls, landscaping objects, floor tiles, and lighting fixtures). It is the best way to preserve the vertical relationships between objects while moving them. Note: In the Section/Elevation/IE window, you can also elevate elements simply by clicking and dragging. See also Change Home Story by Elevation.

In the 3D Window (Using Drag):


1. Select the element. 2. Choose the Drag command from the pet palette.

528

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

3. Change the editing plane if needed.

4. Drag the element to its new position, or define the distance numerically. Notice that a Guide Line appears marking the story positions, to make it easier to place the element.

In the 3D Window (Using Elevate command):


1. Choose the Edit > Move > Elevate command. This brings up the Elevate dialog box.

2. Type the value by which you wish to raise or lower all selected elements 3. To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, check Set Home Story by Elevation. 4. Click OK.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

529

Interaction

Offset All Edges


Use the Edit > Reshape > Offset command to offset all edges of an existing element. This function works on: all elements that are polygonal (these include splines as well as the more obvious polygontype elements) multiple connecting elements of a single type, provided they are all selected: for example, two line segments that meet at a point See also Offset Edge - Fixed Area and Offset All Polygon Edges. 1. Select the element(s) you wish to offset. 2. Choose the Offset command in one of the following ways: the offset icon from the Pet Palette (click a node, an edge, or a reference line endpoint of the selected element); from the Edit > Reshape menu;

530

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

from the Edit Elements toolbar; Note: If you want to offset multiple elements simultaneously, you must use the menu or toolbar command instead of the Pet Palette.

3. A ghost contour of the proportionally increased or reduced element follows the movements of the cursor. Click when you are satisfied with the new element size.

Use Offset to Create One or More Element Copies


1. As described above, select the original element and activate the Offset command. 2. Click the Ctrl key (MacOS: Opt) and drag the cursor to the offset location. To create multiple copies: Click the Ctrl+Alt keys (MacOS: Cmd+Opt), then drag the cursor. 3. Click to place the new element(s).

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

531

Interaction

Offset Constraint
See Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods).

532

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Intersect Two Elements


You can intersect two selected elements with each other by having them meet at their endpoints nearest point. This command works on Lines, Arcs, Walls, and Beams. 1. Select the two elements. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Intersect command.

Note: This command can work only if the two elements are visible on the same story. They do not have to have the same Home Story, but they must be at least visible on the same story. (If the elements have different Home Stories, and their visibility is set to Home Story Only, this command will not work.)

Related Topics: Intersect Single-plane Roofs

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

533

Interaction

Align Elements
About the Align function How to Align Elements Special Align

534

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Align function


Use this menu (Edit > Align) to align selected elements with each other, or to a custom-drawn target line, using a variety of criteria: Align elements right or left; Align elements to the top or bottom; Center elements vertically or horizontally; Special-align elements to any point on an existing element, or to a temporary line/arc drawn by you. The Align commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. When using the Align commands, the expression right refers to the rightmost element on the xaxis in the window you are looking at (e.g. Floor Plan, Section, 3D). The expression left refers to the left-hand direction on the x-axis. Similarly, top means the element with the highest y-coordinate in the current window, and bottom is the element with the lowest y-coordinate. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to align the following Corner Table object with other furniture:

ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):

Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are aligning, use the Special Align options (Edit > Align > Special Align).

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

535

Interaction

How to Align Elements


1. Select the elements you wish to align. 2. Go to Edit > Align and choose one of the following operations:

Left: If you choose Edit > Align > Left, all selected elements will be aligned to the leftmost bounding-box point of the element that is located farthest to the left. In this example, we want to align the three windows shown in Section view.

536

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Select all three windows and use Edit > Align Left.

Right: If you choose Edit > Align > Right, all selected elements will be aligned to the rightmost bounding-box point of the element located farthest to the right. In the illustration below, the arc wall is the rightmost element; the rest of the walls (their rightmost points) are aligned to the rightmost point on the arc walls bounding box.

Top/Bottom: If you choose Edit > Align > Top or Bottom, all selected elements will be aligned to the topmost (or bottommost) point on the element that is the top (or bottom) element of the selected group. In the example below, we want to move up the window on the left, so that it lines up with other two windows.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

537

Interaction

To achieve this, we select all the windows, then use Edit > Align > Top to obtain the desired result.

Center Horizontally: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Horizontally, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements top and bottom y-coordinates, and then align all the elements horizontally (using each elements centerpoint), along a horizontal line halfway between the top and bottom elements. Center Vertically: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Vertically, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements leftmost and rightmost x-coordinates, and then align all the elements vertically, along a vertical line halfway between them. For example, in the following Floor Plan, we will center the selected furniture vertically.

538

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Align
The options in Edit > Align > Special Align give you great flexibility in lining up selected elements. You can choose which point to align, and you can choose what to align the elements to: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.

In this example, we wish to align the selected tree objects to the edge of the garden path.

Go to Edit > Align > Special Align and choose the Nearest Point option: each tree will line up along the path using each trees bounding box point that falls closest to the path. Choose the Click an existing line or element edge option.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

539

Interaction

Click OK to close the dialog box, then click the edge of the path (here, the edge of the mesh). The trees line up along the path.

540

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Distribute Elements
Use this menu (Edit > Distribute) to evenly distribute selected elements using a variety of criteria:

The Distribute commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to distribute elements that include the following Corner Table object:

ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):

Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are distributing, use the Special Distribute options (Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute). Along X: The two selected elements at either end will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you have three windows distributed evenly along a wall.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

541

Interaction

As a result of a design change, the wall is lengthened and you add two more windows.

To ensure they are all distributed evenly, select all the windows and use Edit > Distribute > Along X.

Along Y: The two selected elements at either end (vertically) will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you want to distribute chairs evenly against the back wall of the room. Select them, then use Edit > Distribute > Along Y.

542

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Along XY: The two selected elements at either end (at top left and bottom right) will remain in place, and the rest will be distributed evenly along an XY diagonal. For example, you have nine desks in the classroom placed roughly in a V formation.

To distribute the desks precisely, select a group of 5 desks and use Edit > Distribute > Along XY. First group:

Repeat with a second group of five chairs.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

543

Interaction

Final result:

544

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Distribute
The options in Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute let you choose which point to distribute and along what to distribute the elements: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.

Suppose you want to distribute potted plants in a circle around a hexagonal soil holder object:

Use Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute. Choose the Draw a line or arc option, then click OK to close the dialog box. Click to start drawing and choose the Arc by centerpoint pet palette option. You will create a temporary circle around the hexagonal object. As you complete the circle, the potted plants will be distributed around it.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

545

Interaction

Modify Element Sizes


Overview of Modifying Element Size Stretching Walls Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns Modifying Beams Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements Stretching with the Marquee Tool Stretch Height Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements Offset All Edges Splitting Elements Adjusting Elements Adjust Elements to Slabs Intersect Two Elements Create a Fillet or Chamfer Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Adding Element Nodes Move Nodes Curve/Straighten Element Edge

546

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Overview of Modifying Element Size


Different element types have different characteristic dimensions: length, width, height, thickness, opening angle, etc. Some of these are easiest to modify numerically, by selecting the given element, opening its settings dialog box and adjusting the relevant values. Some dimensions, however, cannot be modified numerically (for example, the length of linear elements or edges), while some others need to be fitted exactly to other elements (walls to roofs, for example) which may make numeric adjustment a tedious calculation task. You may also need to change the overall dimensions of several elements at the same time while keeping their relative proportions. In such cases, ArchiCAD allows you to modify element sizes using splitting, stretching and trimming operations. Most of the operations can be performed in three ways: Edit menu command Keyboard Shortcuts Commands from Pet Palettes In some cases, only the pet palette is available. Some general considerations: You cannot stretch Hotspots, Cameras or Detail Markers. Some GDL Object type elements are programmed to allow only specific sizes, or include smart editing hotspots to edit their shape graphically. Stretch is available for most types of selected elements in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. Only drawing elements can be stretched in the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Stretch command cannot be used on polygonal elements, but you can stretch their edges or displace any of their nodes graphically.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

547

Interaction

Stretching Walls
To stretch/shrink the length of straight Walls with the menu command: 1. Select a wall. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch menu command, or the Stretch command from the pet palette. 3. Click the reference line endpoint and move it. 4. Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The wall is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. Note: Multiple Walls, Lines and Arcs with overlapping endpoints can all be stretched at the same time with the Stretch menu command, or by using the Marquee. For more information, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. When using the pet palette: 1. Select a wall.

548

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

2. Click one of the walls reference line endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the stretch icon.

Click to define the new endpoint.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

549

Interaction

3. You can stretch a curved wall by using a special angular or radial stretch commands. See Stretching Curves. To stretch a Trapezoid wall, you can use the special Stretch Trapezoid Wall command from the pet palette: this will increase/decrease the width of the wall proportionally as you stretch it from either end.

See also Stretching or Shrinking Lines; Stretching Objects.

550

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns


Slanted walls and columns can be stretched and/or their slant angle can be modified with pet palette commands in 3D and Section views. (Columns can also be modified in Floor Plan views.) In 3D, you can: Slant a wall/column or change the inclination angle of a slanted wall/column by selecting a corner point (for a wall) or the center of the top plane of the column, and dragging it along the horizontal plane. (Use Modify Angle in the pet palette) Note: You cannot slant a wall whose reference line is centered. Stretch a slanted wall/column by moving its top or bottom edge up or down along the wall plane (Use Stretch slanted height for walls, or Stretch height with fixed angle for columns, in the pet palette.) Stretch a slanted wall/column vertically. (Use Stretch height in the pet palette.) As you change the wall height, the wall thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly.

In Section view, you can use the same functions. (Modify Slant Angle is possible only if the walls reference line is perpendicular to the section line.) In Section view, the Trackers Distance field provides a way to edit the wall inclination using its offset (e.g. Distance) value.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

551

Interaction

In addition, you can edit double slanted walls: If you elevate the top or bottom surface of the double slanted wall, the angles of both lateral surfaces will change If you elevate the height of one side of the wall, both lateral surface angles remain unchanged (and the top surface may be reduced to zero thickness)

The next two methods work on double-slanted walls in Section view only if the Section line is perpendicular to the wall. If you move the top surface horizontally, both lateral surface angles will change while the top thickness remains constant

552

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

If you move one of the top nodes of the double slanted wall horizontally, the angle of the surface on that side of the wall will change as will the top thickness, while the opposite surface angle will remain unchanged

You can modify the slant angle of Columns graphically on the Floor Plan as well as in 3D.

Related Topics: Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Slanted Column

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

553

Interaction

Modifying Beams
To stretch/shrink Beams using the pet palette:
1. Select a beam on the Floor Plan or in 3D. Note: Beams can also be stretched/shrunk in Section view, if the Beam reference line is perpendicular to the Section line. 2. Click one of the beams endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the appropriate stretch (or stretch length) icon:

3. Click to define the new endpoint.

To stretch/shrink beams with the menu command:


1. 2. 3. 4. Select a beam. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command. Click the reference line endpoint of the beam and move it. Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The beam is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position.

554

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To modify the inclination (slant) angle of an inclined beam:


1. Select it on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. 2. Choose the Modify Angle command from the Pet Palette. 3. Drag the beam graphically to the desired inclination angle.

To curve or straighten a beam:


See Curve/Straighten Element Edge. Note: You cannot curve an inclined beam.

To stretch a curved beam:


See Stretching Curves.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

555

Interaction

Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements


Move Polygon Node
To move a node of a selected polygon (including a polygonal wall), click the node and use the pet palettes Move node option.

The two neighboring edges will follow the stretching movement and the shape of the polygon will change accordingly.

Offset Polygon Edge


To apply an offset on a whole side of a selected polygon, click an edge and use the pet palettes Offset edge option. This will stretch the neighboring edges. This offset feature is available for chained elements as well as polygons. Selected elements will be treated temporarily as a polygon, and all polygon reshaping pet palette options will be available.

In the example below, the chained Wall on the right needs to be moved a bit further away while keeping its connection to the two horizontal Walls. Select all three Walls, click anywhere on the

556

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

edge of the Wall on the right and choose the appropriate icon from the pet palette. Click when you are satisfied with the new distance.

When you offset a segment of a polygon perpendicularly, new segments are correspondingly created. This can be useful, for example, when tracing a terrace.

Offset Edge - Fixed Area


This option is available for Zone polygons only. See Offset Edge - Fixed Area.

Offset All Polygon Edges


See Offset All Edges.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

557

Interaction

Adding and Subtracting Polygonal Shapes


You can use the pet palette to add to the shape of a polygonal element, or subtract new polygons from it. To add a new polygon to the existing one: Select the polygon and click it either on an edge or a node. From the pet palette, choose the icon with the + sign (Add to Polygon).

Draw the new polygon shape. It must intersect with the selected one or at least they should have a common edge.

Click to finish drawing the new shape, which will be automatically added to the original one.

558

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

The process is the same for subtracting a shape from a polygon, but you will choose the icon with the - sign (Subtract from Polygon).

You can also use the Magic Wand for adding/subtracting a polygon shape. See Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

559

Interaction

Stretching with the Marquee Tool


You can stretch multiple polygons or linear elements along a particular vector by using the Marquee tool. To stretch elements inside a Marquee area: Draw a Marquee so that the nodes or endpoints you want to stretch fall inside the Marquee. Any nodes you want to keep intact should be outside the Marquee. Define a stretch vector: with the Marquee tool active, click on a node or endpoint inside the Marquee area, then click on a second point. Alternatively, choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command, and then define the stretch vector by clicking any two different points. The shape of all linear elements that have one of their endpoints inside the Marquee area, and polygonal elements that have nodes inside the marquee area, will be stretched along this vector. Note: If you dont want to stretch an element whose node is inside the Marquee, lock the element (select it, then use Edit > Locking > Lock; or lock the elements layer.).

If all the nodes of a polygon are inside the Marquee area, the polygon will be dragged instead of stretched. Stretching nodes in a Marquee area is not available in the 3D Window. Columns, Objects and Lamps cannot be stretched with the Marquee. If any of their hotspots fall inside the Marquee area, the whole object/column will be dragged along when the Marquee area is repositioned.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

560

Interaction

When stretching Arcs or curved Walls with the Marquee, their central angle (i.e. the arc/chord ratio) will remain unchanged.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

561

Interaction

Stretch Height
In the 3D, Section/Elevation and IE windows, you can modify the height of selected elements graphically with Stretch height command of the pet palette.

Click a node of a selected element and choose the vertical stretch icon in the pet palette. A ghost contour of the element follows the cursor. Click to set the new height of the element.

562

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements


The Edit > Reshape > Resize command lets you enlarge or reduce selected elements using numeric or graphical input. This feature is available only in the Floor Plan and 3D windows, and - for 2D drawing elements only - in the Section/Elevation, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Resize dialog box offers additional options for resizing the thickness of Walls/Columns, GDL Objects, text elements, arrowheads and markers. 1. Select the elements you wish to transform and choose Resize.

2. In the appearing dialog box, enter a value into any one of the resize ratio fields. (Make sure the Define graphically checkbox is unchecked.)

Resize ratio: Use any one of the three ways to define the resize ratio you want. (If you enter a value in one field, the other two will be filled in automatically.) Resize wall, column thickness: For walls, columns and beams, the thickness will be resized as well as the length/height. Resize library parts: Any selected library parts will be resized. 563

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

3. 4.

Resize all text entities: All texts and labels are resized. Resize all arrows and markers: The size of all arrows/markers are modified. Click OK. Click in the window to define which point or edge of the elements should remain in its original location. The transformation will be executed.

To perform the operation graphically: 1. Open the Resize dialog box. 2. Check the Define Graphically checkbox. 3. Draw a transformation vector to define both the resizing ratio and the location of the resized elements. Note: Resizing does not affect grouped elements. To resize grouped elements, ungroup them first or choose Suspend Groups. See Group Elements for more information.

564

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Splitting Elements
You can split many selected elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, Slabs, Roofs, Meshes, Fill and Zone Polygons, Lines, Arcs, Polylines and Splines) along a line segment, arc or element edge. The Split command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. Note: You cannot split a polygon - such as a Roof element - with an arc. Note: You can split a Curtain Wall with another Curtain Wall, but you must use the Split Curtain Wall command. See Split Intersecting Curtain Walls. The splitting plane is always perpendicular to the Floor Plan. Exception: If you are splitting a Morph, you have more freedom: the splitting plane can be set perpendicular to the current editing plane. 1. Select the elements you wish to split. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Split command, or the hatchet icon from the Info Box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

565

Interaction

3. Draw a temporary splitting line, or click on an existing Line, Arc, Wall or polygon edge. In the 3D window, a red splitting plane is shown as feedback.

4. Click on either side of the splitting line/arc/edge with the Eyeball cursor. Note: When splitting walls, the split takes place at the point where the splitting line intersects with the reference line(s) of the selected elements. 5. Elements on the clicked side will remain selected, while elements on the other side will be deselected. The selected group of elements can be edited in the usual ways. If the selected element is intersected by an element in several locations, the Split command will split the selected element at every intersection point.

566

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Splitting is also available in the 3D Window. You can split the selected element with a vertical plane into two segments. This feature works the same way as on the Floor Plan. The splitting line is drawn in the plane of the User Origin. Note: When no elements are selected, the Split command will let you split a wall at the clicked location along any of its sides or reference line.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

567

Interaction

Adjusting Elements
Use the Adjust command to extend or trim the endpoints of selected Walls, Beams, Arcs and Lines to a Line, Arc segment or element edge. Note: It is also possible to adjust Roof planes to each other or to other elements. See Intersect Single-plane Roofs and Cropping with a Remote Roof. 1. Select the elements you wish to adjust. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Adjust command. 3. Draw a line segment, or click an existing line, wall, polygon edge or arc/circle. The endpoints of the selected walls and lines will be adjusted (lengthened or shortened) to meet the drawn or clicked line or curve. Only those elements will be affected that intersect (or would intersect) with the chosen line/arc/edge.

Note: If the clicked edge is that of a Slab, the workflow is the same as the Adjust Elements to Slabs workflow. See Adjust Elements to Slabs. The Adjust command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. In 3D view, you can adjust the selected Wall or Beam to a vertical plane.

568

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Split and Adjust Shortcut


A simple shortcut lets you adjust short elements and split long ones by the same edge. 1. Select all the elements that you wish to split or adjust. The active tool must be one of those that created the selected elements.

2. Press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key and click the edge you wish to use for splitting/adjusting.

3. The operation is immediately performed. All transformed elements will remain selected.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

569

Interaction

Adjust Elements to Slabs


Use this function (Edit > Reshape > Adjust Elements to Slabs) to easily adjust elements (Walls, Columns, or horizontal Beams) to specific levels of one or more Slabs that are located above and/ or below them. 1. Select the element(s) (Walls, Columns or horizontal Beams) to be adjusted. Note: If there is more than one Slab above or below the selected element(s), then you should also select the particular Slab that you want to adjust to. Otherwise, the closest Slab will be automatically considered the target. 2. Use the Edit > Reshape > Adjust Elements to Slabs command. 3. In the appearing dialog box, define whether you want to adjust the selected elements to the Slab that is above or below the element(s), or both. Again, if you select Slab(s), then the adjustment will target the selected Slab(s) only.

4. From the drop-down menus, choose the level of the Slab (top or bottom, or - for composites Core Top or Core Bottom) to which to adjust the element(s).

5. Click OK. Note: If a Door/Window is linked to the bottom of a Wall, the Adjust Elements to Slabs command will automatically recalculate the offset to retain the openings position. Note: The same workflow is available by using the Edit > Reshape > Adjust command. In that case, you must select the elements to be adjusted, then click on the targeted Slab. (The cursor indicates that you are clicking a Slab, as illustrated below.) The Adjust Elements to Slabs dialog box appears, and the workflow continues as described above. (Elements are adjusted to the clicked Slab only.)

570

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Adjust Elements to Slabs: Example


In this project, there are problems in the junctions of Walls to Slabs: the internal Walls only extend to the top of the carpeting, while the external (profile) Walls have gaps. The Adjust Elements to Slabs command can help.

1. Select all Walls. 2. Use the Adjust Elements to Slabs command and set the options to Core Bottom and Core Top. This way, the Walls on top of the Slabs will be extended to reach to the Slab core.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

571

Interaction

3. As a result, the internal dividing Walls are now correctly joined to the Slabs.

The external, profiled Walls are still a problem: each needs to meet the Wall above it without stopping at the bottom of the Slab core.

572

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

4. Use Find and Select to select the external Walls only.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

573

Interaction

5. Again, use Adjust Elements to Slabs, but this time, all of the selected Walls should extend all the way up to the Slab core top, to eliminate the gaps.

574

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

6. Now the external Walls are correctly joined, too.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

575

Interaction

Create a Fillet or Chamfer


Use the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command to fillet or chamfer the intersection of two straight lines or walls, or the corner(s) of a polygon element. For special fillet/chamfer options available with Morphs, seeFillet/Chamfer a Morph. To open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box: Select the two lines, or the polygon element. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, or if the selected element is a polygon, choose the Fillet/Chamfer icon from the pet palette.

Choose either Fillet or Chamfer: Fillet joins the endpoints of two straight segments endpoints with an Arc.

576

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Chamfer joins the endpoints of two straight segments with a straight segment, cutting off corners.

Enter a radius for the fillet/chamfer. (The chamfer does not have a radius, but it will be drawn as the chord of arcs of the specified radius.) Note: If filleting the arc with the current radius would extend any of the neighboring vertices, the radius will be limited automatically so that the filleting arc contains the closer neighboring vertex. Click OK. Note: The Fillet, Chamfer and Intersect commands are not effective on grouped elements, unless Suspend Groups is on. See Suspend Groups. Lines are adjusted depending on whether or not they intersect; if they do not, a new length is determined in order to make an intersection or to meet the fillet or chamfer.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

577

Interaction

Apply to All Corners


To apply the Fillet or Chamfer to all corners of the selected polygon, check the Apply to All Corners checkbox. Note: This checkbox is applicable only if the selected element is a polygon. It is not available if you have selected two separate elements. If you have selected a polygon and then the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, the checkbox is selected by default and uneditable; the fillet/chamfer will apply to all nodes. To apply the Fillet/Chamfer to a single node of the polygon, click on that node and use the pet palette command to open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box.

578

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s)


You can trim an element by simply removing the part extending beyond its intersection point with another element, or even cut out a part of the element between two intersection points. Trimmable elements are: Walls, Beams, Lines, Circles, Arcs, Polyline and Splines. To trim an element take the following steps: Choose the Edit > Reshape > Trim command, or press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key. The Scissors cursor appears. Move it to a trimmable element and click the segment you want to trim. Note: In the 3D window, you can also click on a Wall or Beam surface for trimming. The clicked part of the element between the two nearest intersection points will be deleted. For example, here we will trim part of the beam - the part that falls between the first two walls on the left.

Trim Elements to Roof or Shell Cropping with a Remote Roof


ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

579

Interaction

Adding Element Nodes


You can add new nodes to elements using the pet palette. Adding a node to a straight linear element creates an additional element. Adding a node to a polygon-type element increases the number of its edges. In the 3D Window, you can add nodes only to polygonal elements. To add a node to an element: 1. Select the element. 2. Click an edge of the element to bring up the pet palette. 3. Choose the Insert new node icon.

4. Click to define the location of the new node.

To insert a new node without moving it, double-click on a polygon edge. (The Insert node option must be active in the pet palette.) Note: You cannot add a new node to a curved element or segment; if you click Insert new node on a curved element, the curved element will be straightened out.

580

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Move Nodes
With the Move node icon of the pet palette, you can reposition the node of a polygon type element.

The connected edges will follow. Also, the Move Node command is used to stretch objects, doors and windows. See Stretching Objects. You can eliminate a node by merging it into one of its neighbors.

If you merge a node to a remote node (that is, not a neighboring one), the smaller part of the polygon will be deleted.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

581

Interaction

If repositioning a node eliminates one of the connecting edges, the other node of that edge will also be deleted, together with the corresponding part of its own other connecting edge.

If you reposition a node so that the polygon edges intersect each other (but no connecting edge is eliminated), the polygon will be split.

When repositioning a bent edges endpoint, the arc segment will be stretched in a way that its central angle (the arc-chord ratio) remains the same.

582

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

With the Fillet function (use the Fillet/Chamfer pet palette icon), you can replace a polygon node by a tangential arc whose radius can be set in the Fillet/Chamfer Radius dialog box.

For a detailed description, see Create a Fillet or Chamfer.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

583

Interaction

Curve/Straighten Element Edge


With the pet palettes Curve edge function, you can curve a segment of a straight element - such as a wall or beam - by dragging its edge or reference line.

The resulting arc will cross the two endpoints of the clicked edge and the point that has been dragged.

Note: If the bent segment of a polygon intersects any of the other polygon edges, ArchiCAD will regularize the polygons shape, which may result in cutting the polygon into several parts.

584

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To straighten a curved element edge, select the curved element, then select the Insert New Node command from the pet palette.

For more information on editing curved elements, see Stretching Curves. See also Holes in Curved Beams.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

585

Interaction

Explode into Current View


Choosing Edit > Reshape > Explode into Current View will turn selected elements (Floor Plan and other 2D windows only) into 2D drawing primitives (Lines without arrowheads, Circles, Arcs, Elliptic arcs, Splines, unframed Fills, single-line Texts). You have the option to delete or keep original elements.

Note: The Explode command will not affect grouped or locked elements. Turn on Suspend Groups before exploding grouped elements. Note that exploding a construction element with the first option (Keep drawing primitives only) means that it no longer exists as a construction element. Consequently, it will disappear from other model views (model-type Sections, Elevations, IEs, 3D Documents).

Keep Drawing primitives on elements original layers


This third option (a checkbox) appears if the exploded Drawing contains layers (that is, if it is a DWG file or if it is derived from an ArchiCAD view):

(Original layers are the same layer as the Drawings layer). If you uncheck this box, you may avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. After an Explode function, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows.

586

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Some examples:
Slabs, Roofs and Meshes are decomposed into lines. Walls and Columns are decomposed into Lines and Fills (Doors and Windows inserted into Walls are also exploded). Doors and Windows (if selected without the Wall they are placed into) are decomposed like GDL Objects into 2D elements and are replaced by empty hole type openings. Dimensions are decomposed into Lines, Texts and the basic elements of arrowheads (Lines, Circles, Arcs, Fills). Polylines are decomposed into Lines and Arcs. GDL Objects are decomposed into basic 2D drawing elements. Explode has no effect in the following cases: In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, cut construction elements cannot be exploded. Section/Elevation/IE lines and Cameras. Basic 2D elements.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

587

Interaction

Create Element Duplicates


You will often need to create exact duplicates of a particular element. Often, the simplest way to duplicate is to use Copy/Paste. See Basic Editing Operations.

Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories


The Story Settings dialog box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story. See Story Settings Dialog Box. It is also easy to use graphical editing to drag, rotate, or mirror one or more copies of a selected element, or to use the multiply function. These are described in the following sections:

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies Multiply Elements Offset All Edges

588

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies


You can also create exact duplicates of an element inside the same project by dragging one or several copies of the selected element. The selection can be made with either the Arrow tool or the Marquee tool. To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror one copy of an element, select the element and choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu.

Another way is to choose the plain Drag/Rotate/Mirror command from the pet palette, then press Ctrl (Windows) or Alt/Opt (MacOS). (This adds a small + sign to the cursor; press Ctrl again to undo the Copy feature). A copy of the selected element will be dragged, rotated or mirrored. Click to place the copy, which will now be selected instead of the original.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

589

Interaction

To Drag or Rotate multiple copies of an element, select the element, choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu (or use Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Cmd + Opt/Alt (MacOS) as a shortcut). You will see a ++ sign appear. Click the element to drag or rotate its copy to its new position. You can place any number of copies. Double-click to finish placing copies.

Note: When rotating copies, they will all be placed along the same rotation axis. This feature works in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE windows and the 3D Window. In Detail Drawings, you can use it on any drawing elements. In the 3D Window, Drag/Rotate/Mirror is available only for added Drawing elements. To create one or more copies of an element that are offset from (rather than exact duplicates of) the original: See Offset All Edges.

590

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Multiply Elements
If you need to create a number of identical elements inside the same project following a definite pattern, for example at equal distances from each other, use the Edit > Move > Multiply command, or the Multiply command from the pet palette. Multiply creates any number of exact copies of selected elements on the current story, using one the following methods: Drag multiplies the copies along a straight path defined by the reference line. Rotate multiplies the copies along an arc, using the angle specified in the reference arc. Elevate stacks the copies with a vertical displacement. (Not available in 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window.) Matrix will place the copies of the selected element(s) to a matrix defined by two perpendicular reference lines. When choosing the Matrix option, you need to define the number of copies for both the first and the second stroke of the matrix. Two parameters for the vertical displacement can also be set.

In the lower half of the dialog box, set the following options: Number of copies: Enter the number of copies in the multiply operation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

591

Interaction

Vertical displacement: If you are multiplying an element in a 2D window, use this field to enter a value (if any) that is added to the elevation of each subsequent copy of the multiplied object, even during dragging, rotating or arraying the copies. If you want such a vertical displacement when multiplying the element(s) in the 3D window, click the Vertical Displacement: On radio button.

When you close the Multiply dialog box and then carry out the Multiply operation, you will define the vertical displacement vector graphically, as shown with this multiplied and rotated wall:

If you are using a vertical displacement as part of the Multiply operation, the Set Home Story by Elevation checkbox appears: if you check it, newly created elements will be assigned a Home Story based on their respective story locations. If you uncheck it, new elements will have the same Home Story as the original element you are multiplying.

592

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

See Change Home Story by Elevation.

Increment spaces the copies by an incremental distance equal to the length of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute spaces the copies evenly between the start and endpoints of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute-1 will also space the copies evenly between the starting point and the endpoint of the reference line or arc, but the distance is divided by the Number of copies + 1 and no copy will be placed at the endpoint. Spread will place the copies of the multiplied element to equal distance from each other along the reference line or arc all the way until the reference is drawn. In this case, instead of defining the number of copies, you set the spacing in length or in degrees between two neighboring copies.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

593

Interaction

When you have defined your choices, click OK in the Multiply dialog box and perform the operation by dragging the cursor to the desired location.

594

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Drag & Drop


The Drag & Drop technique is familiar to both MacOS and Windows users as a shortcut for opening files or for copying and pasting elements of different types into Windows of the same application or between applications. Since ArchiCAD has many different Window types, the smart implementation of Drag & Drop allows you to copy elements from Windows by pasting data in the receiving Window. You can also drag & drop GDL Objects (Library Parts) from GDL Object Web Plug-in enabled web pages directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or to the Embedded Objects list of the Library Manager dialog box. Data can only be dropped into a Window if the receiving Window can accommodate the dragged data type.

Dragging and Dropping Text


The following possibilities exist for transferring text: From any ArchiCAD Text Window or from a Text Window of any other Drag & Drop-capable application to any other ArchiCAD Text Window From any Text Window to any 2D Window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Library Part 2D Symbol) with the default parameters Moving or copying text within the same Text Window Creating text type clipping files in the File Manager Pasting clipping files into a text type Window Dropping plain text files into a text type Window (with some restrictions)

Dragging and Dropping Drawings


The easiest way to add a Drawing from an external ArchiCAD file is to open the external project structure in the Navigator, select a View or Drawing in the Navigator, and drag it onto the Layout in the Layout Window of the current project. For more information, see Placing Drawings Onto the Layout.

Dragging and Dropping Pictures


The following possibilities exist for transferring picture type data: Dropping a picture file into a GDL Object Preview Window Dropping a picture file into the Floor Plan to paste it as a Figure Creating picture type clipping files in the MacOS Finder Pasting clipping files into the GDL Object Preview Window

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

595

Interaction

Dragging and Dropping GDL Object Files


You can drag and drop GDL Object files from the MacOS Finder or the file manager directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or the Embedded Objects folder of the Library Manager. Dropping an Object into the Floor Plan activates the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and the newly placed element becomes the default element for the given Object type. It is possible to place several GDL Objects at the same time using Drag & Drop. Windows and Doors can only be dropped into a Wall.

Dragging and Dropping Floor Plan Elements


If there is a selection on the Floor Plan defined either with a marquee area or through individual selection with the Arrow, pressing the mouse button and dragging the cursor out of the ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window will initiate a Drag & Drop operation. The following can be copied: Floor Plan elements (in module format) Selected elements on the Floor Plan in picture format (for example, into the Project Preview Window) See Project Preview. The 2D and/or the 3D script of the selected elements in text format 3D GDL script is only generated if the drop is made into the 3D Script window. The 2D script of the selected element can be dropped into any other text type window.

Dragging and Dropping DWG/DXF Objects


Drag & Drop is available as a way to download DWG/DXF objects from the web. A special idrop technique is also available for Windows only. For more information, see Opening with i-Drop (Windows Only).

596

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Parameter Transfer
Parameter Transfer is available: on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Document and 3D windows for most element types In Section/Elevation/IE and Detail/Worksheet windows, for drawing elements only

Topics in this section:


Parameter Transfer Commands Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default Inject Default Settings to Placed Element Pick Up and Inject Morph Parameters You can also use a form of Parameter transfer between two library parts of the same subtype. See Parameter Transfer Between Objects.

Parameter Transfer Commands


Use the parameter transfer shortcuts: Pick Up Parameters: Alt Inject Parameters: Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS) Parameter Transfer commands are also available in the Standard Toolbar and at Edit > Element Settings > Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters.

Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another


Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to transfer. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.) 1. Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. Note: It makes no difference whether the eyedropper icon is full or half-full, as long as it is not empty.

2. Click the element. 3. Now move your cursor to the element to which you want to transfer these parameters.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

597

Interaction

4. Press Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) cursor.

5. Click to transfer the parameters.

Notes: The transferred attributes will also be loaded into the Find & Select Palettes corresponding fields, provided that the Find & Select Palette is open during the parameter transfer. See Find and Select Elements. The transferred parameters will be the default choices when opening any of the corresponding Attributes dialog boxes (Line Types, Pens & Colors, Fill Types, Surfaces, Composites, Zone Categories).

Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default


1. Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to pick up. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.) 2. Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. The clicked elements parameters are now the Tools default settings. The next such element you place will use these settings.

Inject Default Settings to Placed Element


1. Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to change to the default settings. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.) Note: these line types are only effective on Library Parts if the Enable Objects Line Types checkbox in their Settings dialog boxes is switched off. This setting has no effect on Openings or on any elements in a Trace Reference.

598

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

2. Press CTRL+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) icon.

3. Click the element. Its parameters now change to the elements Default Settings.

Pick Up and Inject Morph Parameters


To pick up Morph Face parameters: Alt-click a face. (The eyedropper is accompanied by a Morph Face icon.)

To pick up Morph Default parameters: Alt-click a Morph edge or point. (The eyedropper is accompanied by a regular Morph icon.)

Custom Morph Edge parameters cannot be transferred using parameter transfer. Inject Morph Parameters to a particular Morph Face:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

599

Interaction

Ctrl+Alt+click on a Morph face. (The eyedropper is accompanied by a Morph Face icon.)

Inject Morph Parameters to the Entire Morph: Ctrl+Alt+click on a Morph edge or point. (The eyedropper is accompanied by a regular Morph icon.)

600

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Group Elements
To create a Group, select elements and do one of the following: Use the Edit > Grouping > Group command Use the shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd + G Click the Group command from the Arrange Elements toolbar.

Several groups can, in turn, be grouped together into a single higher-level group. Grouped elements can then be selected and modified as a group, (unless you temporarily suspend the group to allow editing of individual elements). See Suspend Groups. Grouped elements are distinguished by their large, empty selection dots. If you select several groups simultaneously, each groups selection dots will have a different color.

The following element types cannot be grouped: any of the Dimension types, Zones, Labels, Section/Elevation/IE lines, Cameras. Doors and Windows can only be grouped along with the Wall they are placed into.

Suspend Groups
You may need to perform an operation on only one particular element in a group. In this case, ungrouping them all is burdensome, since you will have to select all the elements again to recreate the group after you have finished the operation. The solution is to temporarily suspend groups by choosing the Suspend Group toggle icon in the Standard Toolbar, or at Edit > Grouping > Suspend Groups (shortcut: Alt/Opt+G).

(The Suspend Groups icon is also available in the Control Box.)


ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

601

Interaction

By activating Suspend Groups, you can select and modify grouped elements separately. Activating Suspend Groups means that ALL groups are temporarily rendered inactive: single elements can be selected and edited individually, even if they are part of a complex group hierarchy. To re-activate the Group function, just toggle Suspend Groups to OFF again. Note: To change the settings of a single element in a group without using Suspend Groups, use Parameter Transfer. See Inject Default Settings to Placed Element. This parameter transfer will affect only the clicked element, and not the rest of the elements in the group.

Ungroup
To make all elements constituting a group independent again, choose Edit > Grouping > Ungroup (shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd+Shift+G). Ungroup is also available from the Arrange Elements toolbar.) Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle ON will detach any selected elements from their groups and break down all groups into single independent elements, no matter how complex the nested grouping is. Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle OFF, for a selection consisting of lowerlevel groups, the selected group will first be divided into the sub-groups it comprises. Thus, you may need to repeat the Edit > Grouping> Ungroup command several times before an element can be selected and edited individually.

Autogroup
Edit > Grouping > Autogroup, a toggle command (shortcut: Alt+G), lets you group elements at the same time you create them (instead of creating elements first and then grouping them). The Autogroup toggle command is also available in the Standard Toolbar and in the Arrange Elements toolbar. If the Autogroup command is on, chained polygonal and rectangular elements will automatically be created as a group. Components of exploded elements will also be grouped. Autogroup is activated by default.

Operations on Grouped Elements


The following operations can be performed simultaneously on all the elements constituting the group: Selection The following Edit menu functions: Drag, Rotate, Mirror, Multiply Delete Note: If any elements in the selected group are on a hidden layer, they will also be deleted! Other operations (such as Unify and Fillet/Chamfer) can be performed on individual elements only, after the elements are ungrouped or the group is suspended.

602

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Groups and Layers


Grouping elements does not change their attribute assignments, which means that each element remains on its own Layer. If some elements of a Group are on a hidden Layer: Elements on the hidden Layer will be invisible. When editing the group (by drag, rotate, mirror, multiply, delete), elements on hidden layers will also change their position - or will be deleted - along with the rest of the group.

If some elements of a Group are in a locked Layer, see Lock/Unlock Elements. Elements on the locked Layer will be visible on the Floor Plan, but they will cause the entire group to be locked. The group will not be affected by drag, rotate, mirror and multiply. When selecting the group, all of its elements will be selected, but with grey dots. Use the Suspend Groups command to edit those grouped items that are not in a locked layer.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

603

Interaction

Lock/Unlock Elements
The Edit > Locking > Lock command locks the selected items to prevent them from being accidentally modified. Locked elements can still be selected and used for relative construction; Guide Lines are still available; and you can pick up their settings through parameter transfer. See Parameter Transfer Between Objects. Note: Locking a layer will have the same effect - it locks all elements which are located on that layer. The Edit > Locking > Unlock command unlocks the selected item(s). With the Unlock All command, you can unlock all locked elements, even if they are not selected. You can also use the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar for these actions.

604

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Display Order
When drawing a Project with ArchiCAD, overlapping elements will be drawn according to a specified stacking order. By default, elements are stacked in an order typically used in architectural drawings. By default, stacking order is determined by element classes, of which there are six. Regardless of the sequence in which elements are placed, those in the first class will be placed in the foreground, second class in the level behind it, and so on.

The element classes are in descending order of class: 1. Annotation (Text, Labels, all Dimension types, Zone Stamps) 2. 2D artwork (Lines, Circles, Splines, Hotspots) 3. Library Parts (Objects, Lamps, Stairs) 4. 3D structures (Walls, Beams, Slabs, Doors, Windows, Columns, Roofs, Meshes) 5. 2D polygons (Fills, Zone Polygons) 6. Figures

Display Order of Overlapping Elements


Overlapping within the same class depends on the order in which you place the elements, although walls with the same fills will display clean intersections. When selecting overlapping elements within the same class, you can select them in sequence using Tab. See Selection of Overlapping Elements.

Custom Stacking Order


ArchiCADs default stacking order is appropriate in most cases, but you may wish to place elements in a different overlapping position. For instance, for a Fill to overlap a 2D element or an Object, a set of commands in Edit > Display Order hierarchical menu or the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar let you override the default stacking order element by element.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

605

Interaction

On newly placed elements, the commands work as follows: Bring Forward: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all the unchanged elements of their own and any lower classes, but will still stay below the elements of higher classes. Bring to Front: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all other existing elements. Send Backward: On this command, selected element(s) will be overlapped by (sent behind) all the unchanged elements of their own and higher classes, but will overlap the elements of lower classes. Send to Back: On this command, selected element(s) will become overlapped by all other existing elements. Reset Default Order: This command restores the default overlapping order described previously.

Mechanism of the Stacking Order


Both the default stacking order and the customization commands are based on two ordering mechanisms: classes and stack levels. ArchiCAD places elements in 14 stack levels. Each level can contain any of the element types. The final stacking order you see on screen and on printouts is based on stack level and element class. All elements on a level will overlap elements on lower stack levels, regardless of class. New elements are always placed into the preferred stack level of their own class. Stack level preference is as follows: 1-4: Void by default 5: Annotation 6: 2D Artwork 7: Library Parts 8: 3D Structures 9: 2D Polygons 10: Figures 11-14: Void by default By default, the upper and lower 4 stack levels are empty. You can bring or send elements of any type into these stack levels with the Edit > Display Order commands detailed above. For example, bringing a Fill forward from level 9 to level 8, which is the default level of structures, means that the Fill will overlap all the unchanged fills remaining on level 9, but will still be overlapped by all the unchanged structures on level 8.

606

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

If you bring it forward again, it will overlap all the remaining structures. However, it will still stay below all of the unchanged Library Parts on level 7. This way, you can move it forward until it overlaps the higher levels.

Of course you can bring other elements forward as well, which will again overlap the changed Fill.

The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands move the selected elements until they overlap (or are overlapped by) all of the existing elements. This is not necessarily the 1st or the 14th level, which means that in most cases it will still be possible to place other elements above or below them. Text or Dimensions brought up to the top stack level cannot be overlapped. For example, if you want a Fill to overlap them, you will have to send the Text one level backwards. If you attempt to move elements forward that are already placed on the top level, or to move elements backward from the bottom of the stack, you will be alerted. When moving several elements placed at different stack levels forward or backward, each element will only move one level. When bringing to front or sending to back elements of different types, they will overlap (or be overlapped by) all existing elements, and will retain their stacking order in relation to each other. Zones and Fills are compound elements consisting of components of two different classes (Zone Polygons and Zone Stamps, Fills and their area texts). These two components always keep their order according to their classes, for instance area texts always overlap their fills. Although you can change their overlapping order separately, Fills and Zone Fills can never overlap their own area texts and zone stamps and vice versa, forcing the other component to move with them if necessary. The stacking order will be preserved on printer or raster plotter output. In DXF/DWG output, all elements will be transparent, meaning that hidden or partially overlapped elements will be entirely visible.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

607

Interaction

Magic Wand
About the Magic Wand How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

608

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Magic Wand


The Magic Wand saves you work by finding and tracing a linear or polygon shape from among existing elements, and then generating a new element based on the polygon. The Magic Wand lets you create special shapes that are not available for that particular tool type or would be tedious to construct segment by segment. Since it creates polygonal shapes by nature, the Magic Wand will ignore geometry method settings (such as Rotated Rectangle) for the current tool. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is defined in Magic Wand Settings. The Magic Wand works in both the 2D and 3D Windows and recognizes the following element types: Wall, Beam, Slab, Roof, Curtain Wall, Morph, Fill, Mesh, Line, Arc, Polyline, and Spline. (In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Magic Wand recognizes only 2D drawing-type elements). The Magic Wand recognizes elements that are locked, displayed from remote stories or a Trace Reference, reserved by others or outside your workspace.

Related Topics: How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

609

Interaction

How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand


1. From the Toolbox, select the type of the new element you want to create. 2. Activate the Magic Wand by doing one of the following: Press the Spacebar Click the Magic Wand icon in the Control Box Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. Choose Design > Outline Polygon with Magic Wand The Magic Wand has three different shapes for identifying: nodes

edges

empty space and surfaces

3. Click with the Magic Wand active. It will automatically find and trace a polygon shape. If you click on an edge or node, the Magic Wand creates a polygon by tracing that element and/or finding an element chain: it runs along that edge and traces the element chains whose endpoints fall within that edge. For example, activate the Roof tool (Multi-plane method) and click with the Magic Wand on the edge of the Wall to instantly create a Roof that matches the Wall polygon.

610

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

If you click in empty space or on a surface, the Magic Wand searches for and traces the closed geometric area formed by the nearest elements (whether chained together or merely intersecting), and generates the resulting polygon. For example, activate the Fill tool, then click with the Magic Wand inside the empty area denoted by the curved line, to create a Fill of that shape.

You can refine the Magic Wand function by selecting one or more elements. In this case, the Magic Wand will only take the selected elements into account when searching for chained elements or a bounded area. 4. The new elements are generated. The new elements are not linked to the originals and can be manipulated independently. If the original shapes are superfluous, you can delete them. If Offset or Multi-Offset has been activated, you can complete the offset function after the Magic Wand has created the new polygon. If you are creating a single Roof, you must first draw a pivot line and define the pitch before creating the polygon with the Magic Wand. If you are creating a Fill with a custom origin, you will first generate the polygon with the Magic Wand, then draw the fill orientation vector. All of the characteristics of the new elements are determined by the current default settings of the corresponding tool. You should always check that these are correct either before or after using the Magic Wand, especially if the elements are intended to have a specific relationship to each other, such as a roof resting on a Wall.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

611

Interaction

Using the Magic Wand in 3D


In 3D, the Magic Wand feature works as in the Floor Plan, but instead of using only the top view of the elements, each element is considered the way it lies in space. When searching for the contours of the new element, ArchiCAD will only look at the elements that are actually intersected by the clicked plane. The clicked plane is always the horizontal plane through the clicked surface point or through the User Origin (e.g., when clicking inside polygon walls or beams into space).

612

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes


Instead of defining a new polygon, you can use the Magic Wand to add or subtract the shape of an existing polygon (of the same or a different element type). 1. Select the polygon from which you wish to subtract another shape. In this example we want to subtract a complex polygonal shape from a slab. 2. Choose the Subtract from Polygon icon in the pet palette. 3. Move the cursor onto the polygon that you want to subtract and activate the Magic Wand (press the spacebar). 4. Click to complete.

Verify that the operation has been performed by deleting or dragging away the other polygon or viewing the shape in 3D. Or select the polygon and note the contour around its hole.

Note: Drawing a polygon hole by clicking inside the selected elements boundary with its tool active is similar to subtraction, but it lets you temporarily create a self-intersecting shape. Subtraction always creates a valid shape. For more information, see Magic Wand Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

613

Interaction

Magic Wand Settings


Use the Options > Magic Wand Settings command to open this dialog box. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. With the two radio buttons on the right, you can choose between two tracing methods. Best Match: Curved segments (when applicable) will follow as best as possible the natural form of Circles, Arcs and Splines. Prefer Linear Segments: Only linear segments are used. The four radio buttons on the left allow you to choose from a set of options to approximate curves with linear segments. Deviation from Curves: Enter a value to define the maximum deviation of the polygon from the original curved element. Segments Along Arcs: Define the number of segments along an Arc. Segments Along Circles: Define the number of segments along a Circle. In this case, arcs will be transformed into a number of segments corresponding to the part of the circle they represent. Segment Length: Enter a value to define the segment length for transformations resulting in segments of uniform length. Note: If you choose the Best Match method and real curves cannot be created, ArchiCAD will try to approximate curves in the hierarchical order represented in this dialog box.

614

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings
About Trace References Choosing a Trace Reference Show/Hide Trace Reference Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference Move Reference Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying Activate Reference Rebuild Trace Reference Compare Reference with Active Trace & Reference Palette

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

615

Interaction

About Trace References


In ArchiCAD, you can opt to display two different views concurrently in any model or layout window: the Active Content - the actual model or drawing you are currently working on (Active) the Trace Reference (Reference), optionally placed alongside, on top of or underneath the currently Active content. This acts as a kind of underlay, making it easy to compare multiple model views/drawings on the same screen. The Trace Reference is essentially a temporary editing aid that is tied to the currently active window. The chosen Reference appears in a predefined default position (appropriate to the type of the Active Content and the Reference item). Three item types can be chosen as a Reference: 1. Viewpoints. Any item in the Navigators Project Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference Viewpoint will always reflect the current settings of the active window. 2. Views. Any view in the Navigators View Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The References view settings are independent of the active window. For example, if you change the layer combination in the active window, the Reference wont change. If a view is deleted from the view map, its Reference is no longer available. 3. Layouts (and their drawings). Typically, in Model Windows, you will use any of the following as a Reference: Floor Plan Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document Detail, Worksheet And in the Layout Window: Layout, Master Layout

616

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

For example, you can draw a roof detail in a Detail window (the Active Content) while seeing the relevant wall section as a Reference.

Any given window can display only one Reference at a time. However, as you navigate among your project windows, you can display a different Reference in each: The Floor Plan window has a single current Reference for all stories Each Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet, Detail, Layout and Master Layout can have its own unique Reference. Reference settings are saved along with the window (for example, each Section in your project can have a Reference of a different color and filter different elements).

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

617

Interaction

References are also saved with the project file. All user-defined Reference-related parameters, such as the list of recent References and recently chosen Reference colors, are saved together with the project file. When using the Print command to output a model window or a Layout, you can opt to print the currently visible Reference as well. When you place a Drawing onto a Layout, the Drawing content will not include the Reference. The user can offset and rotate the Reference as needed, though logical default Reference settings for each combination of Active/Reference views will usually align them correctly for the particular context. On-Screen View Options (View menu) affect the Reference just as they affect the Active. The cursor is sensitive to elements in the Reference. Consequently: You can use the Pick Up Parameters command (Alt +C) on Reference elements, then transfer the parameters to an element in the Active. You can use the Trim command, the Magic Wand, and snap points with elements in the Reference to edit Active elements.

618

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Choosing a Trace Reference


Use one of the following methods to activate and choose a Trace Reference.

Topics in this section: Show Navigator Item as Trace Reference Browse for Trace Reference Choose Trace Reference from Menu Choose Reference from Trace & Reference Palette The Choose Reference List Show Navigator Item as Trace Reference
1. Select the item from the Navigator and right-click to bring up its context menu. 2. Choose Show as Trace Reference.

Browse for Trace Reference


Click the Browse for Trace Reference sub-command from one of these locations: View > Trace Options > Choose Reference > Browse for Trace Reference. The Choose Reference command in the Trace Reference drop-down menu of the Standard Toolbar.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

619

Interaction

The chooser button at the top of the Trace & Reference Palette.

The Choose Trace Reference dialog box appears. This is a Navigator-like structure, with only those items available which are eligible to use as a Trace. (In the View Map, View Properties are also displayed.) Choose the desired Trace Reference and click OK to display it as a Trace.

620

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Choose Trace Reference from Menu


1. Activate the Trace Reference function in the Standard Toolbar by clicking the Trace button.

2. Click the drop-down Trace Reference menu from the Standard Toolbar, then choose an item from the Choose Reference list. See also The Choose Reference List.

The same commands are available from the View menu: 1. Activate the Trace toggle in the View menu. (Click the menus Trace icon to activate it.) 2. Access the Choose Reference list from View > Trace Options. See also The Choose Reference List. The same commands are available by right-clicking in the window to access the Trace commands:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

621

Interaction

Choose Reference from Trace & Reference Palette


Click the button atop the Trace & Reference Palette to access a list of possible Reference items. Click the one you need to show it as a Trace Reference.

See also The Choose Reference List.

The Choose Reference List


The Choose Reference list is dynamic - the appearing choices depend on the content of the active window: 1. Browse for Trace Reference...: This command is at the top of the list. Use this if the Trace you need is not shown in the list. The Choose Trace dialog box appears, showing the eligible Navigator items. Click the one you need, then click OK to show it as a Trace Reference. 2. Recent References are listed next. 3. Other relevant References, if any, follow. If the active window is a Floor Plan: the Choose Reference list includes three possibilities that are relative to the current story, so that the Reference will change as you navigate among stories: Above or Below Current Story will always show the story above (or below) the current story as a Reference. Previous Story will always show the last story you were on as a Reference. If the active window is a Model-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). If the active window is a Drawing-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the relevant Model Section/Elevation. If the active window is an Interior Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes all viewpoints of the IE group (if any), plus the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited).

622

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

If the active window is a Detail or Worksheet: the Choose Reference list includes their source viewpoints. Note: Independent viewpoints (e.g. an independent Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet) have no model source; their Choose Reference list shows the viewpoint itself. If the active window is a Layout: the Choose Reference list includes the source view (if available) of the placed Drawings. 4. Entire Model Display: This option will display the current view/viewpoint as a Trace Reference in Entire Model Display form. 5. Next in the Choose Reference list: any Layouts containing drawings that originated with the current viewpoint. If you choose a recent Reference, it will include any manual transformations (drag, rotate) which the user applied the last time he/she showed this Reference.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

623

Interaction

Show/Hide Trace Reference


Click the Trace toggle button to show or hide the Trace Reference in the current window. The Trace toggle button is available: in the Standard Toolbar

in the context menu of any window - right-click in an empty space in the View menu in the Trace & Reference Palette See Trace & Reference Palette.

624

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference


To set the color of the Reference and the visibility of elements on the Reference, first open the Trace & Reference Palette. (Use Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference, or choose Trace & Reference from the list of Trace Reference commands.)

Use the controls in the top half of this palette to set the References color and element visibility options. See also Trace & Reference Palette. Change you make here apply to the Reference of the current window only. However, to apply the settings in this pop-up to all References in the project, click the Apply Settings to All References button.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

625

Interaction

Move Reference
These commands are accessible from the list of Reference commands; or from the Trace & Reference palette. See also Trace & Reference Palette. Use this icon to drag the Reference to another location.

Use this icon to rotate the Reference.

Use this icon if you want to reset the Reference to its original default position after you have moved it.

Note: The same commands are available from the context menu by right-clicking into any window showing a Reference; and from the Standard Toolbars pop-up list of Reference commands. In the image below, a Section viewpoint is displayed as a Reference and rotated alongside the Floor Plan that contains the Section marker:

Drag/Rotate commands applied to the Reference will be reflected in the Trackers coordinate data (coordinate data are calculated according to the Actives coordinate system, not the References.) 626

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying
Elements on the Reference cannot be selected or edited. However, by switching the Reference and Active views temporarily, you can select and edit elements in the Reference. For example, you can use the Switch Reference with Active command if you need to paste certain Reference elements into the Active view: First, use the Switch Reference with Active command (from the list of Trace Reference commands, or the Trace & Reference palette.) See Trace & Reference Palette.

This changes the Reference into the Active (now you can edit its elements), and the Active into a Reference. Note: This command is not available if a Drawing Section is active and its own Model-based Section is the Reference. 6. Select, edit and/or copy the required elements. 7. Once again, use the Switch Reference with Active command and return to the original Active content. 8. If you copied elements to the clipboard, now you can paste these into the Active. This workflow can be used, for example, if you are working in a Worksheet window, while the Floor Plan model has changed. To update your Worksheet, display the Floor Plan as the Reference, identify the differences, switch Reference with Active, copy the updated parts you need, switch Reference and Active (again), and paste into the Worksheet window. Note: When pasting into a drawing-type window (such as a Worksheet), construction elements will be exploded into their 2D components.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

627

Interaction

Activate Reference
The Activate Reference command is available from View > Trace Options, and from the list of Trace Reference commands (accessible from the Standard Toolbar, the View menu or the context menu of an ArchiCAD window.) Activate Reference will change the active window to the Viewpoint that is currently the source of the Trace Reference. This active window, in turn, will use the same Trace Reference definition that was previously set, IF it applies and makes sense. For example: Ground Floor is active and Floor Above (First Floor) is set to be the Trace Reference. If you activate the Reference, then the First Floor will be the active, and Second Floor will be shown as Trace Reference. If the current Reference definition has no meaning in the activated viewpoint, then no Reference will be shown. For example: The South Elevation is shown as Trace Reference under the Ground Floor Plan. If you use the Activate Reference command, the program will switch to the South Elevation Viewpoint and no Reference will be shown.

628

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Rebuild Trace Reference


Use the Rebuild command (available from the Trace & Reference Palette or among the Trace Reference commands) to rebuild the Reference to reflect any changes in the source view.

See Trace & Reference Palette. In some cases, the Reference will be rebuilt automatically as a result of certain other user actions, such as navigating to another window and panning inside a window. However, editing a model view will not necessarily rebuild the Reference; you must use the Rebuild Reference button. Note the following: If the Reference is an Auto-Rebuild Model, it is possible that you make changes in the Active, yet these are not reflected in the Reference, even after you navigate or pan, because to avoid slowing down the program - you have unchecked Update Autorebuild Model Viewpoints continuously in Options > Work Environment > More Options. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed. If the Reference contains an Auto-update Drawing, such a Reference will not be continuously rebuilt, to avoid slowing down the program. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

629

Interaction

Compare Reference with Active


ArchiCAD provides several functions to help you identify and understand differences between the Reference and the Active content, especially when the Reference is on top of the Active content, or vice versa, and you need additional help to see the differences clearly. The best way to compare the two will depend on your particular task. You can use several of these functions at the same time to get the most accurate information. All the Compare functions can be used on the fly while editing your Active content. They are on-screen only functions, with no effect on output. To access these functions, use the Trace & Reference Palette, from Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference.

For details on each control, see Trace & Reference Palette. Each of the techniques below can be useful in visually comparing the Reference with the Active. Try them out to see which works best.

Tip 1: Use Separate Colors for Active and Reference


You can set separate display colors for the Reference and the Active content: a custom color for each, or else retain the original colors. You may want to set two sharply different, custom colors for each of the views - say, red and blue - to make it easy to distinguish one from the other.

630

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To set the colors, use the pop-up icons (one each for Reference and Active) in the middle of the Palette.

Note: Even if youve set separate colors, the background fills of one view may obscure the underlying elements in the other view.

Tip 2: Make Fills and Zones Transparent


Note the Make Fills and Zones Transparent toggle at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette: activate this to make fills and zones transparent in both the Reference and Active views. This way you will uncover information that otherwise might have been covered up by a fill in the top view. This switch has only a temporary effect and does not affect the settings of the model elements.

Tip 3: Reverse Display Order of Reference and Active


When comparing the Reference to the Active, it may help to switch their display order.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

631

Interaction

Click the Reference on Top button at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette.

If your Reference was previously underneath the Active, this command will change them around, placing the Reference on top of the Active.

Tip 4: Optimize Intensity of Reference vs. Active


A simple way to make an initial visual comparison is to use the Intensity sliders of the Reference and Active. Note: This method works best if the Active is shown in its original colors, and the Reference in a different color.

Pull the Reference intensity slider back and forth. On screen, the effect will be to flash the Reference on and off, allowing you to identify places on screen where there are differences from the Active View. Then you can zoom in on these locations and analyze the differences.

Tip 5: Use the Splitter Bar to Turn the Page


This function is useful for identifying differences between the Reference and Active when they overlap. You will drag a Splitter bar across the window, with the Reference on one side and the Active on the other. The effect is like turning the page of an overlay to see what is beneath.

632

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

To activate the Splitter function, click the Splitter icon from the Trace & Reference Palette.

Four splitter handles appear, one on each edge of the screen. Choose any one of them and move it in a perpendicular direction, to create either a horizontal or vertical splitter bar.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

633

Interaction

As you drag it, the content on either side of the splitter changes dynamically.

Once you let go of the mouse button, the splitter bar returns to its original position.

Tip 6: Move the Reference Over Temporarily (Displace Reference)


Use this function when you have zoomed in to an area where the two views are different, and you want to quickly check what is on the view underneath. Click the Temporarily Displace Reference button in the Trace & Reference Palette.

Click in the window. The cursor changes to the familiar hand shape, allowing the user to nudge the Reference temporarily (i.e. to move it out of the way). Click again, and the Reference jumps back to its original position. 634
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows


Why Consolidate? Linework Consolidation Fill Consolidation

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

635

Interaction

Why Consolidate?
Several ArchiCAD features involve the creation of exploded elements. Model-based Details, Worksheets and Drawing Sections create 2D elements (lines, fills) out of the model construction elements. Also, imported DWG drawings appear in ArchiCAD in 2D form, as a large collection of lines and fills. In these Drawing-type windows, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. Line and Fill Consolidation are separate functions and are executed independently of each other. Select the elements, then execute either the Linework Consolidation or the Fill Consolidation command. (Edit > Reshape > Linework/Fill Consolidation).

636

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Linework Consolidation
In the window, select at least two line-type elements you wish to include in the Linework Consolidation process. Line-type elements are straight-lines, polylines, arcs and circles. Note: Linework Consolidation does not affect any line-type element having an arrowhead. The Linework Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation) brings up the Linework Consolidation Wizard. This command is also available from the Edit Elements toolbar.

Now page through the wizard (click Next at the bottom of every screen) and check the boxes of every Line Consolidation option that you wish to execute as part of the consolidation process. For details, see Linework Consolidation Settings. On the last screen, click Consolidate to execute Linework Consolidation. Following the linework consolidation, a report appears, listing the number of elements (if any) that have been deleted or merged for each type of line consolidation. At the bottom of this page, a checkbox gives you the option of using the simplified Linework Consolidations Settings (rather than the Wizard) the next time you issue the command.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

637

Interaction

Linework Consolidation Settings contains the same options as the Wizard, but all options are accessible in a single dialog box.

638

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Interaction

Fill Consolidation
In the current window, select at least two fills that you wish to include in the Fill Consolidation process. The Fill Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Fill Consolidation) brings up Fill Consolidation Settings. See details at Fill Consolidation Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

639

Interaction

640

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Virtual Building
ArchiCAD Model Views Construction Elements Parametric Objects Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs Custom Stairs with StairMaker Element Extras: TrussMaker, Solid Element Operations Model View Options On-Screen View Options Partial Structure Display Renovation Energy Evaluation

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

641

Virtual Building

ArchiCAD Model Views


About Model Views in ArchiCAD Model View Options Floor Plan Window Stories Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan 3D Window Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) 3D Document Details Worksheets Managing Markers in ArchiCAD Interactive Schedule Project Indexes

642

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Model Views in ArchiCAD


You can approach the Virtual Building model from several different model views. Model views have two main uses. First, you will work in model views to modify the Virtual Building. Second, saved model views are the basis for creating architectural drawings (placed onto Layouts) for the final documentation of the Virtual Building. As you will see, each model view shows a very different aspect of the same Virtual Building. In 3D perspective, you see the Virtual Building as it will look when actually constructed. In Floor Plan, the Virtual Building is shown as a two-dimensional blueprint. In the Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation (IE) windows, elements are generated from the 3D model; you cannot create new model elements here, but you can view and modify them. The 3D Document is generated from either the 3D window or the Floor Plan, but is a 2D-type document that allows for annotations and dimensions, and can display the sections of composite elements in their 3D aspect. In the model window known as the Interactive Schedule, the Virtual Building is expressed in lists and figures - here, too, your input will modify the Virtual Building and can be output as documentation. When you work on each of these aspects of the model, you are working on a viewpoint. You can navigate among them, and save them as views. For more information, see Project Workflow in the Navigator. The available commands and functions vary depending on the window that is active. Every time you activate a window, its contents are rebuilt to reflect any modifications you made to the plan. The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands. You can have only one Floor Plan and one 3D window open at a time. While it is possible to keep several windows open for other types of viewpoints(e.g. several Section/Elevation/IE windows), by default ArchiCAD will open subsequent viewpoints in existing windows, replacing the

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

643

Virtual Building

previous one. To open a new viewpoint in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.

If you would rather open a new window each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options:

You can pan and zoom the window within the full drawing space to obtain the best view of the work you are currently doing, by using the shortcut icons next to the bottom scrollbar or the commands of the View > Zoom menu. For more information, see Navigation. To maximize working space, use the Window > Full Screen command to have your active window, including palettes, occupy the entire workspace on your monitor. The Window > Full Screen & Hide All Palettes does the same, without showing any palettes.

644

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Floor Plan Window


The Floor Plan Window is the basic construction area where most editing operations take place. It shows a representation of the current project as a traditional architectural drawing. When you start ArchiCAD, the first window you see is the Floor Plan. Each story of the Virtual Building has its own Floor Plan. ArchiCAD gives you the freedom to replicate 3D-like aspects of construction elements in the Floor Plan window, using Cut Plane settings and element-level display and projection options. These options let you visualize parts of multi-story elements that are located on a different floor plan, or to project parts of the element that are above or below the cut plane. See the sections below for how these options work. The visibility and accessibility of elements on the Floor Plan depends on: chosen options in the elements Tool Settings dialog box, including multi-story display and projection settings;

the Floor Plan Cut Plane; Layer Settings (elements on invisible layers will not be displayed; elements on locked layers cannot be edited). Modifications to the model in the Floor Plan window will be updated accordingly in the 3D, Detail/Worksheet and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. The converse is also true: changes made in other windows are automatically displayed on the Floor Plan when activated. The updates can take place either manually or automatically depending on the Detail or Section/Elevation/IE update settings you choose. For more information, see Updating Sections and Updating the Detail Window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

645

Virtual Building

Stories
About Stories Home Story Define Top Link for Wall, Column or Zone Show On Stories Navigate Among Stories Defining Story Display in 3D Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE Create or Delete Stories Story Settings Dialog Box Story Level Lines Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box

646

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Stories
Stories in ArchiCAD, just as in real buildings, serve to divide space vertically and replicate the story structure of your real building. Story names and levels are defined in Story Settings. See Story Settings Dialog Box. Each story in the project is displayed, by name and number, in the Navigators Project Map. Double-click on the story name to display it in the Floor Plan window. The current Story name appears in the title bar of the Floor Plan Window.

The elevation of new construction elements placed on the Floor Plan are calculated relative to the elements Home Story. Some elements (Wall, Column, Zone) can also be top linked to any story in the project.

For more information, see Home Story and Define Top Link for Wall, Column or Zone.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

647

Virtual Building

Navigate Among Stories


To navigate among stories, do one of the following: In the Navigator Project Map, double-click the Story you wish to open. Activate a story from the Story Settings dialog box (Design > Story Settings, or right-click any story from the Project Map): click on its name, then click OK to close the dialog box and display the selected story on the Floor Plan. Use predefined keyboard shortcuts to jump among stories Use the Mini-Navigator

Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator


Use the story shortcuts located in the predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar.

Go Up a Story activates the Story above the current one on the Floor Plan. Go Down a Story takes you to the Story below the current one. If you attempt to go to a story that does not exist, the Create New Story dialog box appears.

The Go To Story command in the Mini-Navigator toolbar opens a dialog box allowing you to jump directly to an existing Story and provides you with a range indicator of how many Stories currently exist. If you enter a Story number outside the existing range, the field will revert to the top or bottom Story of the valid range.

648

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Defining Story Display in 3D


In the 3D window, all Stories are projected by default, but you can limit the projection using the Stories to Show in 3D controls at View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D. Choose the range of stories you wish to display in 3D.

The Trim Elements to Story range checkbox (in the same dialog box) means that the model will be clipped at the story range boundaries. If this box is not checked, the model will not be clipped, and all elements that fall at least partially inside the story range will be displayed. The story display in the 3D window, as set in the Filter Elements dialog box, will naturally affect the 3D Documents created from this 3D source. For more information, see Filter and Cut Elements in 3D.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

649

Virtual Building

Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE


In Section/Elevation/IE views, you define a vertical range that can include entire Stories or only parts of them. Also, Story Level Lines can be optionally displayed in these views.

Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE

650

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create or Delete Stories


Use Story Settings (Design > Story Settings) to create and delete stories. Story Settings and story-related commands are also available: from the context menu if you have selected a Story in the Navigators Project Map or View Map.

from the Mini-Navigator. See Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator.

Delete a Story
Use the Navigator or Story Settings (as described above) to delete a story. Warning: If you delete a Story, all elements that had that story as their Home Story will also be deleted!

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

651

Virtual Building

Create a New Story


1. Go to Design > Story Settings.

2. Click Insert Above or Insert Below to insert a new story above or below the story name selected in the dialog box list. Alternatively: 1. Select a Story in the Navigators Project Map. 2. Use the context menus Create New Story command.

3. In the appearing dialog box, type a name for the new story. 4. Click an option for where the new story should be placed in the project structure: Insert Above: The story will be inserted above the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). Insert Below: The story will be inserted below the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). 5. Click OK. The new story appears above or below the selected story. The numbering is automatically updated. There is no limit to the number of stories. See also Story Settings Dialog Box.

652

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create New Story from the Mini-Navigator Toolbar


If you choose the Mini-Navigator toolbars Go up a Story/Go Down a Story command, and that story does not exist, the Create New Story dialog box appears, where you can add Name, Elevation and Height to Next values for the new story. See also Create New Story Dialog Box.

Copy/Move Elements Between Stories


When creating a new Story, you may wish to copy elements onto it which already exist on another Story. Go to Edit > Move > Edit Elements by Stories, or right-click a Story in the Navigator Project Map. (If this command is not available, use the Work Environment Menu Customization controls to add the command to any menu.) In the appearing dialog box, use the commands to Cut, Copy, and/or Paste all elements or selected element types from one story to another.

For more information, see Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

653

Virtual Building

Story Level Lines


Story Level Lines indicate the vertical location of stories in Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. Story Levels can be set to appear in Section/Elevation/IE views. In this case, each story level line included in the Section/Elevation/IE range will appear in the window. The story line markers are library parts. The Story Marker parameters and position can be edited in Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see Section Story Levels Panel.

Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE


For each individual Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, you can hide, show and/or output Story Level Lines. To set these options, open the Section/Elevation/IE Settings Dialog box, go to the Story Levels panel, and use the Show Story Levels pop-up.

Note: It is possible to turn off story level line display on a story-by-story basis. Go to Design > Story Settings, and for any selected story, uncheck the Story Level Line box. This storys level line will henceforth not appear in any model window in the project.

654

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Edit Story Levels

You can edit the elevation of any given story or set of stories using Story Editing Mode: 1. Choose the Design > Edit Story Levels command, or the same command from the context menu that appears by right-clicking inside the Section window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

655

Virtual Building

2. The Story Editing Mode palette appears. As long as the palette remains open on screen, you are in Story Editing mode and can move the story level lines.

3. 4.

Choose a mode from this palette by clicking one of the four buttons: Adjust only the selected story Adjust the selected story and all stories below Adjust the selected story and all stories above Adjust all stories Move the cursor onto the Story Level Line you wish to move. The cursor will assume the Mercedes shape. (Make sure you move the cursor onto the line itself, not the markers at either end.) Click and drag the story level line to edit its elevation.

5. Click OK to apply changes and exit Story Editing Mode.

656

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The elements that are on the given stories will retain their elevation respective to their Home Story, as you will see when the view is updated after you click OK.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

657

Virtual Building

Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting)


3D construction elements on the Floor Plan (Walls, Curtain Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs) are displayed as if they were cut horizontally along a theoretical plane; this is the Floor Plan Cut Plane. The default height of the Cut Plane, measured from the base of the current story, depends on local architectural conventions, but you can set any Floor Plan Cut Plane for the current window using the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box. To set the Cut Plane, go to Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane See also Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box.

Note: The Cut Plane does not affect the display of Mesh, Slab or Object elements, including Stairs. However, Stairs and other GDL Objects can be programmed to display themselves according to the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to Current Story. If you wish to display all construction elements in their entirety, on all stories (the default settings for construction elements), the rest of the settings in the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box are not relevant. The Relative Floor Plan Range and Absolute Display Limit - the other Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings - are only relevant if any of your construction elements are defined as having a limited projection. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are global; the current settings apply to all the stories of the project. Once you set the global Floor Plan Cut Plane, you can further fine-tune the Floor Plan display of individual construction elements (Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs only) in their element Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.

658

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Set Separate Floor Plan Cut Planes in Different Views


For every view, you can define a unique Floor Plan Cut Plane, if required, using the Floor Plan Cut Plane controls accessible from View Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

659

Virtual Building

How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan


While the current Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are applied globally to the whole project, you can set a separate display preference for each individual construction element. The settings described below (Show on, Floor Plan Display and Show Projection) are found in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box.

Show On Stories Define Elements Floor Plan Display Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings

660

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show On Stories
Use the Show on Stories pop-up in the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Tool Settings to control the display of construction elements by story. Choose whether to show the element on every story it intersects, or only on selected stories. The available Show on Stories options differ depending on the construction element, as discussed below.

Wall, Curtain Wall, Column:

All Relevant Stories: The element will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. When available, this will be your preferred option most of the time. Home Story Only: The element will be shown only on its Home Story. See Home Story.

Roof, Morph, Shell

Home Story Only: The element will be shown only on its Home Story. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its Home Story, then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut, Outlines only, Overhead all.) Home & One Story Up and/or Down: The element will be shown on its Home Story, plus one story up and/or down. All Stories: The element outline - regardless of its actual location - will be shown on every story of the project. All Relevant Stories: The element will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

661

Virtual Building

Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the elements outline and fill. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the elements outline and its fill. (Once you set these Custom Settings, use the Edit Custom option to edit them.)

Slab, Mesh
For a Slab or Mesh, the following options are available. (There is no All Relevant Stories option, since there are no multi-story versions of these elements):

Home Story Only: The Slab or Mesh will be shown only on its Home Story. Home story plus one story up and/or down All Stories: The outline of the entire Slab or Mesh will be displayed on every story of the project. See also Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the Slab/ Mesh outline and fill. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the roofs outline and its fill. (Once you set these Custom Settings, use the Edit Custom option to edit them.)

Beam
For Beams, the following options are available:

662

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Object/Stair
Objects and Stairs have a unique display option: One Story up and One Story Down. This way, you can opt to not display these elements on their Home Story at all.

Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories


For Slabs, Meshes, certain Library Parts and Stairs: The elements outline on remote stories will be displayed using the line type chosen in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

663

Virtual Building

Define Elements Floor Plan Display


Use the Floor Plan Display pop-up to display Walls, Curtain Walls, Beams, Columns and Roofs, and Windows and Doors, in one of several representations. This pop-up control is located on the Floor Plan & Section panel of the elements Tool Settings dialog box. For specifics on Door/Window display, see Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows.

1. Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of elements 3D model (e.g., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane, plus its uncut (downward) part. Note: Projected with Overhead is the default display setting for slanted or complex columns and walls, and for all roofs and beams. 2. Projected: shows cut part of elements 3D model, plus its uncut (downward) part. If you choose either of these projected options (Projected with Overhead or Projected), you can then further define the extent of the projection, using the Show Projection options. For more information, see Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection). 3. Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. (Available for construction elements; not available for windows or doors.) Some additional abstract display options are available: 4. Symbolic Cut: (Available only for non-slanted and non-complex walls and for vertical or complex columns.) The whole floor plan projection of non-slanted, non-complex walls or vertical (basic or complex) columns will be displayed as cut, using their cut line and cut fill attributes, regardless of the elements vertical position. This option is available only for basic straight walls or columns, or for complex columns, and only if the Show on Story control is set to Home Story only. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of these elements. 5. Symbolic 6. Symbolic with Overhead: This display option is available for Curtain Walls only. See Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel.

664

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

7. Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. (Uncut attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.)

8. Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. (Overhead attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.) Note: When opening projects from an earlier format of ArchiCAD, the Floor Plan display of construction elements will automatically be set to predefined Floor Plan Display settings which correspond to traditional architectural standards for these elements. You can reset any elements Floor Plan Display setting as needed.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

665

Virtual Building

Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection)


The Show Projection pop-up provides options for setting the range within which a multi-story element (Wall, Curtain Wall, Column, Beam, Roof) should be displayed. This control is therefore only available if the elements Floor Plan Display is set (using the Floor Plan Display pop-up) to either Projected or Projected with Overhead.

Entire Element (default setting): The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. However, you may prefer not to show the entire element. In this case, you have two other ways to set its display in the Show Projection pop-up: 1. By Relative Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it, and an optional offset.) If you choose this option, this element will be shown on the stories defined as the Relative Floor Plan Range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane. In certain situations, the current Floor Plan Cut Plane and Relative Floor Plan Range settings may conflict: The Cut Plane level may be outside the current Floor Plan Range (e.g. an extremely small story height as compared to the default Cut Plane level). In this case, the Cut Plane will be automatically relocated to the upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (or to its lower limit, if the Cut Plane would fall below the lower limit). The lower Floor Plan Range limit may be higher than the upper limit. In this case, the lower limit will be considered as both the lower and upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (which will also equals the Cut Plane level, as described in (1) above.)

666

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2. By Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. The Absolute Display Limit option enables you to ensure that the Floor Plan will never display any part of the model that falls below the level you define here in absolute terms (independent of story levels). For example, you can enter the level of the terrain or the water level, so that anything below this level is not shown on the Floor Plan. Or, if you want to show a rooftop terrace without displaying the garage below it, enter the terrace level as the Absolute Display Limit. If you choose this option, then the Absolute Display Limit set in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings determines this elements lower display limit.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

667

Virtual Building

Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings


Suppose your settings are as follows: Show on Story: Automatic This means that each multi-story construction element will be displayed on each relevant story of the Floor Plan. Floor Plan Display: Projected with Overhead This means that each construction element will be displayed in its entirety, its cut portion, its overhead portion, and its uncut portion, with the line types and pen colors you set in the dialog box for each of these parameters

Show Projection: Entire Element This means that the displayed projection is not limited by either an absolute display limit or by a defined vertical range. Consider the following building with slanted walls:

668

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

As you view the building on its various stories, its Floor Plan appearance changes accordingly: although the entire wall is indicated on every story, the cut and overhead segments are different on every story.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

669

Virtual Building

Non-Standard Projections for Construction Elements


In the example below, the structure is shown on 3 stories: the Curtain Wall is set to Projected with Overhead and Entire Element the mullions - made of columns - are Cut Only

670

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

the round structural columns are set to Projected with Overhead and Floor Plan Range (on each story, only their relevant section is displayed)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

671

Virtual Building

3D Window
The 3D window displays your model in real perspective or axonometry: this gives the best overall view of what the final building will really look like, inside and out. In the 3D window, you can directly edit your model, and create new construction elements, in either perspective or parallel view, using any of the construction tools. The 3D window is directly linked to the Floor Plan and to the Section/Elevation/IE windows: any changes made on the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation/IE window will be visible in the 3D window and vice versa. 3D Documents can be derived from either a 3D Window source or the Floor Plan. If you change the projection, the cutting planes, the zoom level or the selected/marqueed/filtered items of the 3D source window, you can redefine the 3D Document accordingly. See 3D Document. Special navigation techniques in the 3D Window let you explore the model much more freely than in other windows. For more information, see Navigation in the 3D Window. The 3D display of individual construction elements is controlled by the options of the Model panel in their Settings Dialog box. General settings affecting the parameters for displaying the 3D window are in 3D Window Settings. See 3D Window Settings. The commands that affect the set of elements displayed in 3D are in the View > Elements in 3D View and the View > 3D View Options hierarchical menus. These commands are also accessible in the 3D Visualization toolbar.

Open the 3D Window


To open or activate the 3D window, do one of the following: press the F3 key use the Window > 3D Window command press the 3D window control on the 3D Visualization toolbar or the Mini-Navigator toolbar

672

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

use context menu commands from right-clicking on blank space in the current window:

The following sections provide details on working with the 3D window.

Show All in 3D Show Selection in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Default Display in 3D Filter and Cut Elements in 3D Save Contents of 3D Window as a View 3D Engines 3D View Options 3D Projections Navigation in the 3D Window 3D Navigation Extras 3D Cutting Planes Editing Plane in 3D Window

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

673

Virtual Building

Show All in 3D
To show the entire model in 3D, regardless of any current selection, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show All option; or use the same command from the context menu. This commands shortcut is Ctrl + F5. The full model display resulting from the Show All command may be limited by filtering criteria in the Filter and Cut Elements in 3D dialog box. See Filter and Cut Elements in 3D.

674

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show Selection in 3D
For a 3D display of only the explicitly selected items, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command from any type of editable window. (Or use the 3D Visualization toolbar control for this command.)

If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. Show Selection/Marquee in 3D also works if you are already in the 3D Window and make an explicit selection there, then execute the Show Selection command. The caption of the 3D

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

675

Virtual Building

Window will include the Selection mention and the name of the Home Story of the selected element(s). If the 3D Windows content is based on explicit selection and you add elements to it, these will be preserved in the 3D Window as long as you continue to work in it.

676

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show Stored Selection in 3D


This command, also in the View > Elements in 3D View submenu, will display the last 3D view generated by the Show Selection/Marquee command.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

677

Virtual Building

Show Marquee Area in 3D


To show only the marqueed element(s) in 3D, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command. The caption of the 3D Window will include the Marquee mention. For more information on defining a marquee area, see Marquee Area. If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements.

Marquee Effect: By default, the elements inside the Marquee will be displayed and they will be cropped to the marquee area. However, you can adjust the Marquee effect to show the elements outside the marquee instead of those inside: use the Marquee Effect controls in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D, and choose the Outside Marquee radio button.

See Filter and Cut Elements in 3D Dialog Box. To show the entirety of elements that fall partly inside the marquee - without cropping them uncheck the Trim Elements to Marquee checkbox (also under Marquee Effect, in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D).

678

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Elements in a Marqueed 3D Window


If you create an element in the 3D Window which is delimited by a marquee, the new element will only appear in the 3D Window if you draw it inside the marquee area. If you place a new element outside the boundaries of a Marquee-based 3D view, or drag an existing element outside the Marquee boundaries, that element will disappear immediately from the 3D Window. When you go to the Floor Plan, however, you will see the elements. Change your marquee area (or remove it) and return to the 3D Window to check it. If you select one or more elements in a trimmed 3D view, resulting from either a Marquee area or a 3D Cutaway, some elements will be only partially visible, but selection dots of the whole element will be displayed and all the nodes and edges can be found with the cursor.

If edited, a temporary ghosted image of the whole element will be visible.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

679

Virtual Building

Default Display in 3D
If you simply switch to the 3D window, without using any specific 3D display command, the 3D window will display the contents last shown in the 3D window, irrespective of what might be selected in any other window.

680

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Filter and Cut Elements in 3D


Go to View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D to open this dialog box. Activate or deactivate the checkboxes of the different elements: only those elements whose checkbox is active will be displayed in the 3D window. See also Filter and Cut Elements in 3D Dialog Box. If you are displaying a Marquee area in 3D, the Marquee Effect part of this dialog box provides options on what to include in the 3D window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

681

Virtual Building

The Stories to Show in 3D part of this dialog box lets you define a range of stories for display.

Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode, and all other elements types in wireframe mode. To achieve this effect (a default setting in earlier ArchiCAD versions), apply the predefined Show 3D Zones as Solid Layer Combination.

682

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

683

Virtual Building

Save Contents of 3D Window as a View


If you save the contents of your 3D window as a view, the 3D Only panel of its View Settings dialog box will provide feedback on whether that view is a result of a filter or a marquee selection. See Saving a View. 3D view settings include: 3D projection settings (including zooming), filter elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D cutaway and photo rendering settings. You can redefine a 3D view by changing these settings in the 3D window, then use the 3D Only panel of View Settings to redefine the view accordingly.

684

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Engines
3D Engines are built-in configurations which control the generation of the 3D model in ArchiCAD. By default, two engines are offered: Internal 3D Engine OpenGL Engine To choose an engine, go to: View > 3D View Options > 3D Window Settings and use the 3D Engine pop-up, or use the Engine commands at the bottom of the View > 3D View Options menu. 1. Internal 3D engine The internal 3D engine is most useful for working in the 3D window: views generated by the internal engine show vectorial patterns and are easy to print. It produces a simple, clean, navigable 3D view, without textures. The internal engine is optimized for simple, nonphotorealistic architectural representation, and for direct output from the 3D window without using photorendering. The internal engine features more visualization effects than OpenGL, but usually results in slower navigation and access to the model on most machines.

2. OpenGL engine The OpenGL engine for 3D is recommended if you have a high-performance OpenGL display card. Some effects, such as vectorial 3D hatching and saving the contents of the 3D window as

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

685

Virtual Building

a vectorial 2D drawing, are not available with OpenGL. Additional options for OpenGL can be accessed by clicking the Options button from 3D Window Settings.

OpenGL is a bitmap-based technology. Consequently, 3D views created using the OpenGL engine will be placed as image files.

Important: Open GL is optimized for fast, smooth navigation during model development. It displays textures correctly, but features fewer model effects; it can be considered an interactive preview of the rendering. OpenGLs output capability is more limited than that of the internal engine, since it is based on bitmap technology. OpenGL will produce significantly faster on-screen navigation on most machines, provided that the supporting hardware is available. For more information, see Open GL Options.

686

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The following image uses OpenGL with the Transparency effect enabled in View > 3D View Options > 3D Window Settings:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

687

Virtual Building

3D View Options
When using ArchiCADs Internal 3D engine, three 3D viewing modes are offered: Wireframe, Hidden Line, and Shading. They can be chosen from the View > 3D View Options > 3D Window Settings dialog box or using the commands of the View > 3D View Options menu. Note: When using the OpenGL engine, only the Wireframe and Shading modes are available. The icons of the 3D Modes are also accessible if you display the predefined Window > Toolbars > Simple 3D toolbar.

Choosing Wireframe mode creates a view showing all the edges and lines of your Project. Note that if you have many elements one behind the other, this type of view can be hard to interpret. In Hidden Line mode, those lines which are blocked from view by solid objects are removed. This type of view is the best choice for easy interpretation, if you do not want a shaded view. It is also suitable for hard copy output on a printer. Hidden Lines can be saved in many file formats, either as 2D or 3D files. Choosing the Shading method causes your 3D model to appear with all of its visible surfaces shaded according to the light direction set in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. The colors of the surfaces are determined by the Building Material assigned to the construction elements (regardless of the color of light set in the Sun dialog box). See also Sun dialog box. Shading is recommended for: Fast on-screen feedback Easy checking of surface colors Any presentation for which photorealistic quality is not a requirement

3D Projection Settings Surfaces


688
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Projections
ArchiCAD can display parallel (axonometric) projections and perspectives. Axonometric projections automatically show the entire model in the center of your view. Perspectives are defined by a viewpoint and a specific target. When the 3D window is active, the 3D Navigator Preview Palette contains a miniature representation of the entire project view. This allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projection Settings, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric); you can adjust the view cone or change the axonometry while retaining an overview of the whole project. See Navigator Preview (3D).

3D Projection Settings
Go to View > 3D View Options > 3D Projection Settings, or open this dialog box from the Mini-Navigators pop-up menu. The name and contents of the dialog box depend on the projection type: Parallel Projection Settings or Perspective Projection Settings. You can easily switch from one settings dialog to the other with the button at the top right corner.

The projections you define here remain valid only until the next time you open the dialog box and modify them.

How to Switch Between Axonometric and Perspective Views


You can switch between the 3D Windows Perspective and Axonometry views by using the: Predefined shortcuts: Ctrl+F3 = Axonometry Shift+F3 = Perspective Commands available from View > 3D View Options:

3D Visualization toolbar:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

689

Virtual Building

Mini-Navigator toolbar:

Navigator Palette:

How to Store a 3D Projection


To store projections that you set up in the 3D Window, you can: Use the Save Current View command from the context menu of the Navigator palette. This will create a view (perspective or axonometric) based on the currently set up projection in the 3D window. The new view will be added to your Navigator View Map. Add the current perspective to your Project Map, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Place a Camera into the path command. A camera capturing the current perspective will also appear on the Floor Plan. Add the current axonometric (parallel) projection to the series of Pre-Set views, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Add Current Projection command.

Related Topics: Parallel Projection Settings Perspective Projection Settings Cameras Pre-Set Projections 3D Navigation Extras

690

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Navigation Extras
Other controls useful in modifying the 3D view are available from the View > 3D Navigation Extras (or a toolbar containing 3D window commands). These controls allow you to: Interactively set the target point for the perspective (Look to). Switch to a view perpendicular to a given point (Look to Perpendicular of Clicked Surface). Reset the roll angle to zero to rapidly return from a bizarre view obtained during navigation (Reset Roll Angle). Return with a single command to a horizontal view of the model (Horizontal View). Edit pre-set projections and Add current projection: These commands are available if you are viewing an axonometric (parallel) projection. Put a camera into the path (for perspectives). This command adds the current perspective to the Project Map, if no camera is selected on the Floor Plan. If you have cameras on the Floor Plan already that define an animation path, the new camera will be added after the active camera in the active path, which is marked by its view cone on the Floor Plan. If you are in perspective view, with a camera selected, the following commands are also available from View > 3D Navigation Extras: Note: As you use these commands to change the camera selection, the selected item in the Navigator Project Map also changes accordingly. Go to the previous/Go to the next: Use these commands to navigate to the perspective views of the previous and next cameras in the active path, and to select the camera. Modify the selected: The selected camera will be updated to reflect the perspective view that you currently see in the 3D window. Use this when you have changed the view in the 3D window. Revert view to the selected: Discards all changes you made manually and shows the 3D model as the selected camera sees it. Insert a new camera after the selected one: A new camera is added to the path to define the current perspective view, and will be selected.

Related Topics: Navigation in the 3D Window Cameras Pre-Set Projections

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

691

Virtual Building

3D Cutting Planes
3D Cutaway is an imaging mode in ArchiCAD that allows flexible visualization of building spaces. 3D Cutaway works by applying Cutting Planes to the model (Floor Plan, Section, or 3D window).

The 3D Cutaways you define are stored within the project, so you can see them when opening the project in a future session. You can apply up to 9 Cutting Planes at a time. 3D Cutaways are saved with views, so if you wish to keep Cutting Planes over the long term, save a 3D view. To see the cutaway view of your model, turn on Show 3D Cutaway. To see the full model, turn it off. Topics in this section:

Show or Hide 3D Cutaway Create a 3D Cutaway on the Floor Plan or Section Create a 3D Cutaway in the 3D Window Edit Cutaway 3D Cutaway Attributes Hide 3D Cutting Planes Delete Cutting Planes

692

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show or Hide 3D Cutaway


If you have defined 3D Cutaway view, you can show or hide the 3D Cutaway at any time. Do one of the following: Click the 3D Cutaway toggle on the Standard Toolbar.

Use the following toggle command: View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway When 3D Cutaway is on (show), you see the cutaway view of your model, plus the 3D Cutaway interface.

When it is off, you see the full model.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

693

Virtual Building

Create a 3D Cutaway on the Floor Plan or Section


1. Make sure 3D Cutaway is On. See Show or Hide 3D Cutaway. 2. The window will display Cutting Planes handles on all four sides of the screen.

3. Click and drag one or more tabs to the desired location. By default, you will drag the Cutting Plane orthogonally. See also Create Custom Cutting Plane on Floor Plan or Section. See also Use Section Line as Cutting Plane. To cancel the operation: Note that the tabs on all four sides change into garbage cans: if you change your mind while dragging, just move the Cutting Plane back into one of the garbage cans (or press Esc) to cancel the operation.

694

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

4. View the resulting 3D Cutaway.

Use Section Line as Cutting Plane


It may be convenient to use an existing Section as the basis for your 3D Cutaway. Select the Section line, and choose Create Cutting Plane Here.

The Cutting Plane coincides with the Section Line, but is independent of it. You can now move and edit the Cutting Plane if needed; the Section remains unchanged.

Create Custom Cutting Plane on Floor Plan or Section


If you wish to cut the model from a different direction than the predefined orthogonal directions, create a custom Cutting Plane. 1. From any of the four Cutting Plane tabs, click to bring up the context menu.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

695

Virtual Building

2. Choose Create Custom Cutting Plane.

Note: This command is also available from the Standard Toolbar.

3. Click twice to define the cutting line. 4. Click on the cutting line, then drag it to the desired location to create the Cutaway.

696

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

5. View the resulting 3D Cutaway.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

697

Virtual Building

Create a 3D Cutaway in the 3D Window


1. Make sure 3D Cutaway is On. See Show or Hide 3D Cutaway. 2. The window will display Cutting Planes tabs on all four sides of the screen.

3. Hover over any of the tabs to see the orthogonal Cutting Plane in that position.

698

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

4. As soon as you click one of the tabs, you will see the models bounding box. The predefined Cutting Planes will cut the model on planes that are parallel to this bounding box.

5. Drag the tab to cut the 3D model orthogonally. See also Create Custom Cutting Plane in 3D Window.

To cancel the operation: Note that the tabs on all four sides change into garbage cans: if you change your mind while dragging, just drag the Cutting Plane into one of the garbage cans (or press Esc) to cancel the operation.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

699

Virtual Building

6. Click when the Cutting Plane is in the right place. The Finalize floating command appears.

Click Finalize if you are satisfied with the Cutting Plane. 7. View the resulting 3D Cutaway.

Create Custom Cutting Plane in 3D Window


If you wish to cut the model from a different direction than the predefined orthogonal directions, you can create a custom Cutting Plane. Make sure 3D Cutaway is On. 1. From any of the four Cutting Plane tabs, click to bring up the context menu.

700

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2. Choose Create Custom Cutting Plane.

Note: This command is also available from the Standard Toolbar.

3. Define the custom Cutting Plane orientation by doing one of the following: Use an elements plane (e.g. a Roof top plane) Click on the plane of an existing element to define the Cutting Plane angle. A rectangle will help you see the plane. Click again to define the Cutting Plane position Use an edge as a rotation axis of the plane Click on an existing edge with the mercedes cursor, to define the rotation axis Click on any point that the Cutting Plane should touch; this defines the Cutting Plane position Click on any three points (such as three element hotspots) to define a plane Click on two points to define the rotation axis Click on any point that the Cutting Plane should touch; this defines the Cutting Plane position 4. Click when the Cutting Plane is in the right place. The Finalize floating command appears. Click Finalize if you are satisfied with the Cutting Plane. 5. View the resulting 3D Cutaway.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

701

Virtual Building

Edit Cutaway
Once you have created a 3D Cutaway, you can still edit it at any time. Make sure 3D Cutaway is activated, and Show Cutting Planes is on.

Offset Cutting Plane


Grab the plane (click on any of its edges) and offset it to the desired location. Then click Finalize. Note: After the initial offset, before you click Finalize, you can click anywhere on the plane surface to adjust the offset further.

Rotate Cutting Plane


Right-click the edge of a Cutting Plane. Choose Rotate Cutting Plane from the context menu. Then rotate the plane as you would other elements. See Rotating Elements.

702

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Reverse Cutting Plane Direction


Right-click a Cutting Plane. Choose Reverse Cutting Plane Direction from the context menu.

The Cutaway is now created on the opposite side of the selected Cutting Plane.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

703

Virtual Building

3D Cutaway Attributes
Use the Cut Surface Display controls in the following dialog box: View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D

704

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Hide 3D Cutting Planes


Even if 3D Cutaway is on, you may wish to hide the Cutting Planes. Use the Show Cutting Planes toggle from the drop-down 3D Cutaway menu of the Standard toolbar.

The 3D Cutaway is in effect, but the Cutting Plane and the tabs are hidden, except for the tab at the top of the screen.

To show the Cutting Planes again, click the toggle command or the eye icon at the top of the screen.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

705

Virtual Building

Delete Cutting Planes


At any time, with 3D Cutaway on, grab an existing Cutting Plane or line and drag it into the nearest garbage can to delete it.

To delete all Cutting Planes, use the Delete All Cutting Planes command from the Standard toolbar

or from View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutting Planes.

706

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Sections
About Sections Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Open a Section Viewpoint Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Summary of Rebuild Commands Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

707

Virtual Building

About Sections
The Section tool is used to place a Section marker. The Section marker can take one of three different forms: 1. a source marker, which generates a section viewpoint 2. a linked marker, which does not generate a section viewpoint, but acts as a reference to any other view, viewpoint or drawing. 3. an unlinked marker containing custom text Note: An easy way to distinguish between source-type and linked/unlinked markers is to use the Highlight Source Markers option, which is activated by default at View > On-Screen View Options. See also Source Marker Highlight. Note: It is possible to create an Independent Section (with or without a marker), without using the Section tool. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. To generate a Section, you draw a Section line on the Floor Plan and place a Section source marker, which generates a new viewpoint in ArchiCAD. You can set this marker to display a variety of reference information - such as the first drawing that is created out of this Section viewpoint - for easy navigation and identification. Each newly created Section viewpoint is listed in the Navigator Project Map, in the Sections part. Elements in the Section viewpoint depend on the Section Status, defined in Section Settings. A Model Section contains editable construction elements linked and updated with their counterparts on the Floor Plan, as well as any 2D elements. A Drawing Section contains drawing primitives, which are not linked to the Floor Plan and do not reflect its changes. In the Section window, you can view and modify elements but you cannot create new construction elements. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy or Multiply command.) If you paste an element into a Section window, it will be reproduced as drawing primitives (points, lines, fills). Objects can be placed in a Section window, but they are considered as graphic symbols only. (No corresponding 3D model element is generated.) Sections can be saved as Views and placed on a Layout as Drawings; the contents of a Section window can also be published directly. To place a linked or unlinked Section marker, use the Section tool in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail, Worksheet. Such a marker is a linked marker, and you can use it to link it to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. A linked marker is for reference purposes only. See an example at Place a Linked Section Marker. You can choose and format the Section Line and Marker object in Section Settings. 708
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

An unlinked marker can be useful in your published documentation, for example, if you want to refer (with a page number) to the location of an external drawing that is not integrated into the ArchiCAD project. See Place an Unlinked Marker.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

709

Virtual Building

Create a Section Viewpoint


Note: The creation process is identical for Elevations. To create a section with its source in the model, you must place a section marker on the Floor Plan. (This is a source section marker.) Note: Another type of Section viewpoint is the Independent Section, having no model source. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. 1. Activate the Section tool. 2. In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Create new section viewpoint is selected.

3. Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the Floor Plan.

Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. The Eyeball cursor appears.

710

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

4. With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the Section. The place where you click also defines the Sections limit line, if you have chosen a Limited horizontal range in Section Tool Settings.

5. The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed. (If you are placing a Section of limited horizontal range, the limit line is also placed automatically.) Note: Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6. A new Section viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. Other information about the new Section viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information, Model Display, and Story Lines - can be defined in Section Settings. See Section Tool Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

711

Virtual Building

Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint


Note: This process is identical for Elevations. Use the controls in the General Panel of Section Settings to define the Section geometry.

Horizontal Range
An infinite Horizontal Range shows the full extent of the visible model from the Section line. A limited Horizontal range shows the model between the Section line and its limit, which is placed automatically. Once it is placed, you can select the limit line and move it, if necessary. A zero-depth range shows only the parts of the model cut by the Section line, at the cut location only. (For Elevations, there is no zero depth option.) For more information, see Horizontal Range (for Source Section markers only).

Vertical Range
A Section with an infinite Vertical Range shows all stories of the model. If you choose limited Vertical Range, enter the elevation values corresponding to the vertical range of the model you wish to include in the Section. For more information, see Vertical Range (for Source Section markers only).

Editing a Sections Horizontal Range and Distant Area Limit


You can change the depth (horizontal range) of a selected section by moving the limit line: make sure that the Section tool is active, then move the line by clicking it and dragging to the desired position. You can also move the Distant Area limit line, if such a limit has been defined in Section Settings. Note: An optional distant area of your Section viewpoint, with separate colors/effects, is created if you check the Marked Distant Area box in the Model Display panel of Section Settings. The Distant Area limit line is then displayed as part of your Section. See Section Model Display Panel. Both the Section limit line and the secondary distant line are on-screen-only elements. To show or hide the Section limit line (horizontal range) and the Distant Area limit line on the Floor Plan, use the toggle control in View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range. To change these line types/colors, use the control in Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. For more information, see Display of Marker Range Lines.

712

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Define Marker Reference for Source Marker


Follow these steps to define reference information for source-type Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. When placing a new source marker on the Floor Plan to create a viewpoint, the tools Default Settings gives you two choices for defining the Marker Reference:

the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint In other words, the marker will display information pertaining either to the viewpoint you are currently creating, or to the first drawing created from this new viewpoint. (First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book.) For example, the following Section has been defined to display the information of the first placed drawing created out of this viewpoint.

If you choose first placed drawing, and no drawing has been placed yet, the marker will display autotext (such as #DrgID), and once the drawing is placed, this autotext will be replaced by the relevant information. If you select an already placed source marker and open the tools Selection Settings or Info box, you have two additional choices, because the viewpoint may already have multiple drawings or views created out of it:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

713

Virtual Building

the selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected view Choosing either of these two options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the Navigator Layout Book or the Navigator View Map. Eligible drawings/views are available for selection (i.e., those which have been created from the selected Section viewpoint); other items are grayed and cannot be selected.

Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different projects Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). See Import View(s) from External ArchiCAD Project (Solo or Teamwork). Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. The link information that will appear in the marker is previewed in the Reference to text field, as long as the referred item (such as a drawing) already exists in the project. Note: The same marker information is shown in the Marker Panel in the Section Settings dialog box.

714

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Assign Section Status


Note: The process for assigning a status is identical for Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. 3D Document status can be either Auto-rebuild or Manual Rebuild, but not Drawing. When creating each new Section, you assign it a status in the General panel of Section Settings. A Section can have one of three statuses: Auto-rebuild Model, Manual-rebuild Model, and Drawing.

Each Sections status defines the link between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan, and its rebuild method. In the two Model statuses (Auto-rebuild and Manual-rebuild), the window consists of construction elements; any changes made in a Model Section window can be updated in the Floor Plan window, as well as in the 3D window and in other Section windows, and vice versa. In a Section of Drawing status, construction elements are decomposed into 2D fills, arcs and lines. Changes made in this kind of window are not updated in other windows. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model. Construction elements are editable in both Autorebuild and Manual-rebuild Model status windows, but no new construction elements can be created within them, with the exception of duplicating existing Doors and Windows. Even by copying construction elements and pasting them back you can only obtain plain, additional drawing elements. Warning: Clearing a construction element from a Section Window of model status (either Autorebuild or Manual-rebuild) will also clear it from both the Floor Plan and the 3D model. Regardless of a sections status, you can add 2D graphics, annotation and dimensioning. For more information, see Updating Sections.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

715

Virtual Building

Model Display in the Section Window


Note: The controls for the display of elements is nearly identical for Elevations and Interior Elevations, and for 3D Documents based on the Floor Plan. Controls of the Model Display panel in Section Settings define the appearance (fills, contours, surfaces) of: Cut Elements Uncut Elements Sun and Shadows Marked Distant Area Boundary Contours in the Section window.

The following are brief descriptions of these display features.

716

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

All related controls are described individually in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings.

Related Topics: Section Model Display Panel Story Level Lines Cut Elements
By default, cut elements are shown using their element-level line and pen definitions. You can customize the appearance of cut elements in a Section window by checking the Uniform Pen for Cut Elements checkbox in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings, then assigning the lines and colors, for the display of cut elements in this Section only.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

717

Virtual Building

Uncut Elements
These options in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings enable you to apply surfaces (shaded or unshaded) to the uncut elements shown in the Section window:

Sun and Shadows


The following section window is displayed with Vectorial Hatching on (as shown by the roof tiles) and with Sun Shadow on (as shown by the shadow cast by the roof overhang.)

Another effect is to display uncut surfaces in shaded mode - that is, to reflect rounded contours:

718

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

You can combine the two effects (cast shadows and shaded effect) in a single Section display:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

719

Virtual Building

Marked Distant Area


Consider the following Section line on the Floor Plan:

Note that this Section includes the west face of the building, close to the section line, as well as parts of the far end of the building that extends northward. In this Section view, the close and distant areas are displayed identically, so you cannot tell which is which:

To differentiate the close from the distance elements, reconfigure the section so that it contains a Marked Distant area. To do this, check the Marked Distant Area box in the in the

720

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Model Display Panel of Section Settings and specify a different color for the contours of the distant elements.

Return to the Floor Plan and notice that a new line segment representing the Distant Area has appeared. Select this line and drag it as shown (select the section marker, then choose the icon shown in the pet palette to make sure you drag the Distant Area line, not the Section line):

Note: The Distant Area line is a Marker Range Line. See also Display of Marker Range Lines.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

721

Virtual Building

Now re-open the Section. The distant elements are distinguished from the closer ones.

Boundary Contours
Boundary Contours refer to elements shown in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation window which extend beyond the horizontal limits of the Section (in other words, the entire element does not fit in the section window). Use Boundary Contours in the in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings to define the display of this boundary. Here, the left edge of the wall on the left does not fall within the section, and the displayed parts are shown as unfinished, without contours.

722

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

However, you can choose to display boundary contours - that is, to draw a line at the elements boundary as it is shown in the section, even though the element does not really end there. At Boundary Display, choose Uncut Contours to display these contours using the uncut pen chosen for these elements in their own Settings dialog boxes; or Override Contours to use a pen of your choice, like the blue dashed line in this example:

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

723

Virtual Building

Open a Section Viewpoint


To open a Section viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator, or use a menu command. (View > Navigate > Sections > Open Section). Another way to open the viewpoint is to select the Section line on the Floor Plan and use the Open Section command from the context menu.

By default, each Section is opened in a single window, replacing the previous opened Section. To open multiple Section windows at a time, open each new Section from the Navigator, using the Open in new window context menu command.

724

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Section Marker


Note: This process is identical for Elevations, Details and Worksheets. Linked section markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing whose information is displayed in the marker. You can place a linked Section marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail. For example, you might create a Wall Section that functions like a Detail: First, place a source Detail marker in the Section window;

then place a linked Wall Section marker on the Floor Plan which is linked to this Detail.

This linked Section marker points you to the Detail of this walls Section. To place a linked section marker: 1. Activate the Section tool.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

725

Virtual Building

2. In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.

3. Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. 4. Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the plan.

Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. Note: The Staggered line option is not available for Elevations. The Eyeball cursor appears. 5. With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the linked Section marker. 6. The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed.

726

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker


Follow these steps to define reference information for linked Section, Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. For a new linked marker, or to redefine an already placed selected marker, you have these choices:

the selected viewpoint (i.e., the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the selected drawing (i.e., the drawing you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint (i.e., the first drawing created from the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. the first placed drawing of the selected view (i.e., the first drawing created from the view you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. Choosing any of these reference options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the relevant view of the Navigator (Project Map, View Map, or Layout Book). Choose the desired viewpoint, view or drawing. The chosen items information will be displayed in the linked marker. Thus, a linked marker can refer to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. If you are redefining a selected marker, click the Browse button to bring up the Define Marker Reference directory, and choose the item whose information you wish the marker to refer to.

Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different projects Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. See Import View(s) from External ArchiCAD Project (Solo or Teamwork). After the marker is placed, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time.
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

727

Virtual Building

Place an Unlinked Marker


Follow these steps to place an unlinked marker with the Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet tool. 1. In Default Settings or the Info Box, choose Placed Unlinked Marker. Such a marker displays no linked information. 2. Define any custom text for the marker using the Custom text fields in the parameter list in the Marker Panel of the Settings dialog box.

3. Draw a line or boundary (depending on the tool) and place a marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; Worksheet; Detail; 3D Document.

728

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Section Viewpoint


Note: This process is identical for Independent Elevation Viewpoints. Independent sections, with or without a marker, can be created in some windows. These viewpoints have no model source; they are listed as Independent viewpoints in the Navigator. In an independent section, you can use 2D tools to create or add new content. Use copy-paste to transfer selected items from a Trace Reference into the drawing window in 2D form for further editing. To create an independent Section without a marker, use the Create New Independent Section command. This creates an empty viewpoint without a marker, but listed in the Navigator. This command is accessible: from the Section part of the Navigator Project Map. Right-click on this folder and choose the New Independent Section command from the context menu

or from the Document > Documenting Tools submenu or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map; the selected Project Map item (in this case, a Section) determines which kind of new viewpoint will be created.

If you wish this independent Section viewpoint to be linked to a marker, place a linked Section marker into the project and link it (Marker Reference to) to the existing independent Section.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

729

Virtual Building

Updating Sections
Note: The updating process is identical for Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations and 3D Documents. Each Sections status defines the link (and rebuild method) between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan. For further information, see Assign Section Status.

Updating an Autorebuild Model Section


An Autorebuild Model Section is linked to the Floor Plan model and can be edited interactively. If the Floor Plan has changed, a Section in Autorebuild Model status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen. Changes to existing construction elements in the Section window (including associative dimensions) will automatically be updated in the Floor Plan Window, and, when activated, in any other Section Window and the 3D Window. The update process works on construction elements only; 2D elements added to either the Floor Plan or Section window will not be reflected in the other window. If you are in Autorebuild status and you are editing elements inside the Section window, the rebuild function is continuous and immediate within this window. However, in large plans, continuous auto-rebuild can cause slowdowns. If you prefer that your Section window be rebuilt only when it is opened or brought to the front of the screen (the way it worked in ArchiCAD 9), go to the Options >Work Environment > More Options tab page and uncheck the Update Auto-rebuild Model... checkbox. If you nevertheless need to Rebuild manually, the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command is available. (The plain View > Refresh > Rebuild command, used to refresh 2D drawing elements, is not available for Autorebuild Model windows.) Note: Some complex changes to the plan (e.g., modifying a Library Part) do not appear automatically in Model Section Windows. For a Manual-rebuild section, use the View > Refresh > Rebuild command; for an Autorebuild section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model to see these changes reflected properly.

Updating a Manual-Rebuild Section


A Section having Manual-Rebuild Model status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command in the menu. In this case, any additional drawing elements you have added to the Section window will remain unchanged.

Updating a Drawing Section


Not applicable for 3D Documents, which are either Autorebuild or Manual-Rebuild type documents. To rebuild a Drawing-status Section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild. These commands refresh the view as a 2D drawing, fixing any potential temporary display errors. 730
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

For a complete refreshing of a Drawing-status Section window, choose View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model. This will refresh the contents of these windows to fully reflect the current state of the Virtual Building model. In the process, all 2D elements originating from the model will be removed and an up-to-date view will be generated. This means that any previous manual editing of this artwork will be lost. 2D artwork added to the drawing manually will be kept intact.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

731

Virtual Building

Summary of Rebuild Commands


The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. Additional Rebuild commands in the View > Refresh menu are available if the active window is a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, or a Detail or a Worksheet. Rebuild from Model: Use this command to rebuild the active window; this will refresh the window information to reflect modifications in the Floor Plan. Rebuild from Source View: This command is available only in the Detail and Worksheet windows. The following commands might not be visible in the View > Refresh menu by default. You can customize your menu (Options > Work Environment > Menus) to include these commands if needed. See Customizing Menus. Also, these commands are available from the context menu of the folders in the Navigator Project Map and View Map.

Rebuild All from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Section/Elevation/IE windows in your project. Rebuild All Model Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all the Section windows of Model status (either Autorebuild Model or Manual-Rebuild Model). Rebuild All Drawing Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Drawing-status Section windows.

732

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Display of Section Lines and Markers


Note: This information also applies to Elevations. To customize the attributes of a Sections line marker, use the controls in the Marker and Marker Head panels of Section Settings. See Section Marker Panel and Section Marker Head Panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

733

Virtual Building

Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines


Note: This process is identical for Elevations. However, Elevation lines cannot be segmented. To manipulate a selected Section line as a whole, you can use the Arrow tool, the Marquee tool, or Edit menu commands, as well as their counterpart commands from the pet palette. To change the length of a Section line, select it, then click the pet palettes stretch icon to stretch the line at either of its endpoints.

To break a Section line or line segment: Select the lines midpoint. Choose the Break Section/Elevation Line icon from the pet palette.

Click to break the segment in half, then move the newly created half-segment to a new position. Click to place. To move a segment of a Section line, select the Section Marker, then use the pet palettes Move Section line segment icon to move it.

To eliminate a break in a staggered Section line, select the Section line, then pull the break line (perpendicular to the Section line) out of the section range.

734

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Elevations
ArchiCAD has a separate tool for creating Elevation viewpoints and linked or unlinked Elevation markers. In contrast to Sections: Elevations generally do not slice through the structure, but rather create a cross-section view of the structure from a distant point. There is no zero depth option for the Elevations horizontal range. Elevation markers are conventionally different from Section markers; consequently, the Marker options in Elevation Settings vary from their counterparts in Section Settings. Unlike the Section Line, the Elevation line is an on-screen-only Marker item, and is not shown on the Layout. See Display of Marker Range Lines. In all other respects, the Elevation Tool works the same way as the Section Tool. To create an Elevation viewpoint, you must place a source-type Elevation marker on the Floor Plan. The resulting Elevation viewpoint has a Status (Model or Drawing) which determines its update process. The Elevation Settings Model Display Panel defines the display of the Elevation viewpoint, while the Marker and Marker Head panels determine the content and display of the Elevation marker. A linked-type Elevation marker, containing reference information only (without creating a viewpoint), can be placed in the Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Detail or Worksheet Window. Unlinked Elevation markers can also be placed.

For more information, see the following topics:


Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Display of Section Lines and Markers
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

735

Virtual Building

Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines

Moving an Elevation Marker


This option is available only for Elevation and Interior Elevation markers.

Select the Elevation line; the marker will be selected and will display a node. Click on this node and choose the Move Elevation Marker command from the pet palette, then drag the marker to the desired position. The marker will retain this position even if the elevation is dragged or rotated to a new position.

736

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Interior Elevations (IE)


About Interior Elevations Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint Create Multiple IE Viewpoints Interior Elevation IDs and Names Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation Interior Elevations and Zone Shape Display of Elements in Interior Elevation

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

737

Virtual Building

About Interior Elevations


ArchiCAD has a dedicated tool that is optimized for creating interior elevations of interior spaces.

Interior Elevations (IEs) work similarly to Sections and regular Elevations: choose an input method; define the view and its limits graphically; and place a marker with custom-defined marker reference information. Each Interior Elevation is a separate viewpoint in the Navigator Project Map. Edits made on an Interior Elevation can be reflected in the Model, and vice-versa: model changes can be reflected in the Interior Elevation following an update. Dimensions are associative.

Unlike the Section and Elevation tools, the Interior Elevation tool is used to create new viewpoints only; you cannot place a linked, reference-only IE marker. Note: As source markers, IE markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.)

738

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

An IE created using one of the polyline or rectangle input methods will have a separate IE view for each segment of the line; each view is created perpendicular to the segment.

Since Interior Elevations are typically created in groups (e.g. four IEs created by placing a foursegment polyline around a single room), IEs are handled as a group for purposes of numbering, display, Trace functions, and placement on a layout. (Typically, you will use the Master Layouts Auto Arrange Setup options - in Master Layout Settings - to fine-tune the appearance of IE views on the Layout.) For more information, see Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout. These IE groups are automatically listed together in their own subsets in the Project Map. Each new IE viewpoint is assigned to an IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. You cannot move individual IE viewpoints from one Group to another.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

739

Virtual Building

Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint


Draw the IE limit line using the single line method to create a single IE viewpoint.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Note: In contrast to Sections/Elevations, when creating an Interior Elevation you start by defining the limit of the view (e.g. the wall you want to see), then click to define view line (the place from which you view the wall). Click once to begin the limit line. Click a second time to complete the line. Move the cursor to the desired view position. Click a third time to place the IE marker.

To define the Marker style and position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 5. A new IE viewpoint is created and listed in the Project Map. It is assigned its own IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints.

For more information, see the following topics:


Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections 740
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create Multiple IE Viewpoints


Use the polyline or one of the rectangle methods to create multiple viewpoints in a single IE Group.

The resulting Interior Elevation group contains the same number of viewpoints as the number of segments on the polyline/rectangle. 1. Click to begin drawing the limit line. With the polyline method, click once for each segment of the polyline; double-click to complete the polyline.

With the rectangular method, click a second time to define the opposing corners. With the rotated rectangular method, click to define the rotation vector; click again to define the length of the rectangle. The resulting line/polyline/rectangle represents the limit line of the Interior Elevation group.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

741

Virtual Building

2. Move the cursor to the desired view position.

3. Click once more to place the IE marker(s).

Interior elevations use a dedicated IE marker, a GDL object with editable parameters. IE marker(s) are placed at the middle of each segment of the IE line or at the center of the room. To define the Marker style and Position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. For any or all of the viewpoints, you can opt not to show a marker, by choosing the No Marker option in this panel. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 4. The new group of viewpoints is created and listed in the Project Map. 5. The Interior Elevation Group has its own Clone folder in the Navigator View Map.

742

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The viewpoints within a single IE group share certain settings (such as Show on Stories and Layer settings) which can be applied only to the group as a whole. However, the settings of any single segment are accessible individually. See Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints.

For more information, see the following topics:


Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

743

Virtual Building

Interior Elevation IDs and Names


To assign IDs and names to IE Groups and their viewpoints, use the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. The options in the General Panel vary depending on whether you are defining Settings for an IE Group:

or for an individual IE viewpoint:

Each new IE viewpoint is automatically assigned to an IE Group (even if there is only one viewpoint in the group). The IE Group is assigned a default ID of IE-01. Subsequent IE Groups receive their IDs accordingly. (IE-02, IE-03...)

In each individual viewpoints IE settings, the Reference ID and Name fields are set to By IE Group by default.

This means that each IE viewpoint will have the same ID and Name as its parent IE Group. ArchiCADs default IE Settings further define the ID and Name of each IE viewpoint to include Autotexts.

Use Autotext to Create Meaningful IDs/Names for Interior Elevation Group


You can define a logical naming convention for your IE Groups by including an Autotext in the parent IE Groups ID and Name. This way, each individual Interior Elevation contained in the group will display a logical Autotext value that can vary for each elevation. 744
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

By default, ArchiCADs IE Group ID adds an Autotext of <Number> to the ID of each viewpoint in the IE group. In the image below, each viewpoint ID includes the Group ID (IE-01) plus an automatically assigned number (01, 02, 03...). Also, the default IE Group Name adds an Autotext of <Orientation> to each viewpoint Name. Consequently, each viewpoint name consists of its specific orientation, which automatically assigned using Autotext (North, South, East, West...).

Use the General Panel of IE Settings to define any other Autotext to include in the IE viewpoints name and/or ID. For example, you can set the Interior Elevation Groups ID to be the Zone Number: 1. Click the Autotext button next to the ID field in General Settings and choose Zone Number from the list.

2. In the Navigator, note that the ID of the Group is now equivalent to the number of the zone (007, in this case) contained in the Interior Elevation.

This ID is inherited by all of the viewpoints in the Group. (Naturally, assigning a Zone Number autotext works only if the Interior Elevation includes a zone.)

Customize IDs and Names


You can give a customized ID and/or Name to any IE Group or individual viewpoint: Select the IE limit line. Open Interior Elevation Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

745

Virtual Building

If it is an individual IE Viewpoint, make sure the pop-up is set to Custom.

Enter the desired ID and/or Name. You can also change IDs and Names for any IE Group or viewpoint in the Navigator.

746

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints


Each viewpoint of an Interior Elevation group can be edited separately. First, select the viewpoint: Select any individual Interior Elevation marker, or Select any individual line segment of the Interior Elevation line.

The pet palette and context menu commands opened from this segment affect that viewpoint only. To edit the selected viewpoint: Open Interior Elevation Settings. (Use the context menu or the Info Box). Any changes you make here will apply only to the selected viewpoint. Note that certain options in IE Settings are grayed if you are editing a single viewpoint rather than an IE group. Use the pet palettes options to manipulate the selected IE segment or its marker.

Delete/Restore IE Viewpoint
If you have selected an individual IE viewpoint, you can delete that single viewpoint using the context menus Delete command.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

747

Virtual Building

You can restore this viewpoint even after deleting it: select the IE group to which it belongs (select any part of the IE Limit Line) and use the Restore all Interior Elevations in Group command from the context menu.

Note: This command regenerates the IE viewpoint, but any 2D edits you made in this viewpoint before deleting it have been lost.

748

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line


Selecting any segment of the IE limit polyline selects the entire IE group. If the IE group uses a single, common marker, then selecting the marker also selects the entire IE group.

As when editing other polylines in ArchiCAD, use the pet palettes line editing options.

Inserting a node will create a new IE viewpoint in the IE group.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

749

Virtual Building

Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation


Vertical Range
An IE viewpoints vertical range is set manually by the user in the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings, or the Info Box. See Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings.

Each IE view (i.e. each segment of the IE limit polyline) can have a separate, custom vertical range value, if desired: choose the Limited option as the Vertical Range and enter the desired elevation limits. Use the pop-up to define whether this vertical range should be measured from Project Zero, or from the Interior Elevations Home Story (the story onto which it was placed).

Horizontal Range
By default, the IE limit line represents the horizontal range of the resulting IE view. The Horizontal Range option of Interior Elevation Settings (see the General Panel) is set to By Limit Lines by default.

750

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

To adjust the horizontal range, select the limit line and stretch or shrink it using the commands of the pet palette. (Stretch/shrink modifications to this segment will affect the neighboring line segments accordingly, as when editing any polyline.)

To include connected enclosed areas in the Interior Elevation viewpoint, choose Add bounded areas the Horizontal Range option in IE Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

751

Virtual Building

This way, if the room contains an odd-shaped alcove, the IE viewpoint will include structures that fall beyond the Limit Line, but still fall inside the room, as in this image:

752

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Interior Elevations and Zone Shape


If you want the Interior Elevation to correspond to a zone, choose the Detect and Fit to Zones Vertical Range option from the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings.

If a zone is detected, its height will be used as the vertical range of the selected Interior Elevation viewpoint. Note: The zones height is the difference between its Level value and its Height value as set in Zone Settings):

Zones edited by Solid Element Operations are also calculated accurately, provided that you also check the Consider Solid Operations box. For example, a single zone trimmed to a slanted roof will have several different zone heights. These are accurately reflected in each viewpoint of the Interior Elevation group.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

753

Virtual Building

Display of Elements in Interior Elevation


Use the Model Display controls in Interior Elevation Settings to define the appearance of cut and uncut elements in the view. See Interior Elevation Model Display Panel. These options are largely identical to those in the Model Display panel of Section Settings. See also Model Display in the Section Window. Interior Elevations do not have a Marked Distant Area display option. Two special display options are available for the display of cut elements in Interior Elevations: Exclude View Blocking Walls: If this option is checked, any intervening walls which block the view in the Interior Elevation will not be displayed. Hide Cut Elements: If this option is checked, elements that are cut by the Interior Elevation Line will not be displayed.

754

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Document
About the 3D Document Create a 3D Document from 3D Window Create a 3D Document from the Floor Plan Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

755

Virtual Building

About the 3D Document


The 3D Document allows you to use either the Floor Plan or the 3D view of the model as the basis for creating a document, to which you can add dimensions, labels and additional 2D drawing elements.

3D Document: Floor Plan Projection


Create this type of 3D Document based on a projection of the Floor Plan. Define the projection by setting a 2D cut plane height and defining projection direction either upwards (toward the ceiling) or downwards (to the floor). This is useful, for example, to display the load-bearing structures on a slab plan, or a reflected ceiling plan. Use it also to create shaded Floor Plan views for presentation/interior design.

3D Document: 3D Projection
The 3D Document has its source in the 3D window. Specific parameters and options affecting 3D window display (such as projection and filtering/selection of elements) will affect 3D Document display. To add dimensions, just use ArchiCADs dimensioning tools, plus certain dimensioning functions that are available only for 3D Documents.

The 3D Document Viewpoint


The 3D Document is a viewpoint which appears in the Navigator Project Map. In many respects, the 3D Document is analogous to the Section viewpoint: it is an integral part of the ArchiCAD model, and its model elements are rebuilt automatically or manually, depending on its status. 756
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

In the 3D Document, you can select model elements and access their settings dialog boxes to make changes in the model, but you cannot edit them graphically or create new model elements. However, like other model views, the 3D Document has its own 3D Document Settings dialog box, where you can set parameters that are specific to the 3D Document: these include fill/pen display of element surfaces (including cut composite elements) and contours, transparency, 3D hatching, shading, shadow and sun effects. Note: The display of composite elements in the 3D Document window also depends on the Partial Structure Display settings. See also Partial Structure Display. In the 3D Document, you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures:

Related Topics: Create a 3D Document from 3D Window Create a 3D Document from the Floor Plan 3D Document Settings Model Display of the 3D Document Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

757

Virtual Building

Create a 3D Document from 3D Window


1. In the 3D window, set up the desired 3D view of the model: the perspective or projected 3D view; use 3D Cutting Planes; filter or select elements; use Marquee as needed, or perform solid element operations. 2. Create a new 3D Document by doing one of the following: With any model window (except the Floor Plan) open: Use New 3D Document from 3D... from the context menu of the Navigators 3D Documents folder.

With 3D window open (with nothing selected): Use New 3D Document from 3D command from the context menu

Use a menu command (Document > 3D Document > New 3D Document; or Document > Documenting Tools > New 3D Document). 3. The New 3D Document dialog box appears.

758

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Enter a Reference ID and Name for the new 3D Document; click Create. Note: Optionally, the name of the source view can be set as the default 3D Document Name. To set naming defaults, see 3D Document General Panel. 4. The 3D Document is created and opened in its own window. It is listed in the 3D Document folder in the Project Map of the Navigator. To adjust the content, settings and display of the 3D Document, you can adjust its source view and/or its display settings, and then redefine it. See the following for more information:

Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

759

Virtual Building

Create a 3D Document from the Floor Plan


Set up Model View
On any story of the Floor Plan, set up the model view you want to see in your 3D Document. If needed, you can limit the view using Selection or Marquee. (View settings for the 3D window, such as Filter and Cut Elements in 3D, have no effect on 3D Documents created from the Floor Plan window.)

Open 3D Document Default Settings


Do one of the following: use Document > 3D Document > 3D Document Settings, or use the context menu of the 3D Document folder in the Navigator.

Set up 3D Document Defaults


1. In the General panel: Define a default name (all 3D Documents will use this name), or else click the toggle to activate the Source View Name icon: this will automatically assign the source view as the name of the newly created 3D Document.

2. In the Floor Plan Projection Panel: Define Cut Plane Height and 3D Document Direction (Reflected Ceiling or Floor Plan).

760

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

For more information, see 3D Document Floor Plan Projection Panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

761

Virtual Building

Create New 3D Document


With the Floor Plan window open, do one of the following: Use New 3D Document from Floor Plan... from the context menu of the Navigators 3D Document folder.

Use the New 3D Document from Floor Plan command from the Floor Plan context menu (with nothing selected).
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

762

Virtual Building

Use a menu command (Document > 3D Document > New 3D Document; or Document > Documenting Tools > New 3D Document). Use the New 3D Document from Floor Plan command from the context menu of any Story from the Project Map. The New 3D Document dialog box appears.

Enter a Reference ID and Name for the new 3D Document; click Create. The 3D Document is created and opened in its own window. It is listed in the 3D Document folder in the Project Map of the Navigator. To adjust the content, settings and display of the 3D Document, you can adjust its view and/or its display settings, and then redefine it. See the following for more information:

Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

763

Virtual Building

Redefine the 3D Document


There are three ways to redefine a 3D Document after you have created it. Each method is described below:

Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit Source Window Redefine 3D Document Based on Current Redefine Using 3D Document Settings
Note the difference between Redefine and Rebuild. Rebuild refers to the model elements: their size, shape and relation to the rest of the model elements. Rebuild for a 3D Document works the same as for other model views (e.g. Section). Your 3D Document, if set to AutoRebuild, is rebuilt every time you open it. If it is Manual-Update, it is rebuilt only upon command. (View > Rebuild > Rebuild from Model).

Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit Source Window


If the 3D Document window is in front: use Open 3D Source (for 3D projections) or Open Source Story (for Floor Plan Projections) from the context menu to open the source window.

764

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Or right-click the 3D Document viewpoint or view from the Navigator, then click the Open Source View command:

Make your changes in the source window: Edit elements, layer settings, orientation or projection Change element visibility using Selection/Marquee If the source is a 3D Window, you can also change the Filter Elements settings (View > Elements in 3D View > Filter and Cut Elements in 3D) and adjust Cutting Planes Then use the Redefine command by doing one of the following: Select the 3D Document from the Navigator Project Map and right-click to access the Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D Window command

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

765

Virtual Building

With the 3D window in front and nothing selected, use the Redefine 3D Document command

This brings up the Redefine 3D Document dialog box.

Choose the 3D Document which you want to redefine based on the current 3D window or current Floor Plan window. Note that this list will contain only those 3D Documents created from the same type of window as the current frontmost window.

766

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

A warning reminds you that this Redefine operation is not undoable.

Click Redefine Anyway to proceed.

Redefine 3D Document Based on Current


Access this command by doing one of the following: With the 3D Document in front, use the Redefine based on the Current (3D or Floor Plan) command from the context menu with nothing selected. In the Navigator Project Map, right-click the 3D Document you want to redefine and use Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D window. In 3D Document Settings, check the box to Redefine the projection, cutting planes, and visible elements of the 3D Document based on the current 3D window. This is only available for 3D Documents using a 3D Projection.

For a 3D Document based on a 3D Projection: This command will redefine the 3D Document according to the following settings of the current 3D window: The current 3D projection, including zoom Filter and Cut Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) Selection/Marquee limitations Cutting Planes Note: The current window is not necessarily the same as the original source of your 3D Document. Current is the one currently open, or the one that was last open. For a 3D Document based on a Floor Plan Projection:
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

767

Virtual Building

This command will redefine the 3D Document according to the following settings of the current Floor Plan: Selection/Marquee limitations Orientation Zoom Story

Redefine Using 3D Document Settings


If you want to redefine an existing 3D Document without having to open the source 3D window, an easy way to do it is to use its 3D Document Settings. Open 3D Document Settings (select the 3D Document in the Navigator Project Map; or click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator or from the context menu; or from the Document > 3D Document menu).

768

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The controls in the 3D Projection panel allow you to access dialog boxes to modify the 3D Document and its 3D window source, without having to open or change the current 3D window:

Make any or all of the following changes: Click Redefine 3D Projections to bring up the Perspective or Parallel Settings dialog box which reflects the 3D Documents source 3D window. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the projections dialog box. This is where you can redefine Sun settings for your 3D Document: click Redefine 3D Projections, then More Sun to adjust the sun position. Click Redefine Filter Elements to access the Filter and Cut Elements in 3D dialog box. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the dialog box. Changes in your 3D Document will take effect when you click OK to leave 3D Document Settings. The current 3D window remains unchanged. For details on these controls, see 3D Document 3D Projection Panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

769

Virtual Building

The same Redefine function is available for a Floor Plan-based 3D Document: click the Redefine checkbox on the Floor Plan Projection panel, and click OK.

770

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Model Display of the 3D Document


While the 3D Document derives many of its settings from its 3D window source, several important settings for the 3D Documents model appearance are derived from 3D Document Settings.

See 3D Document Model Display Panel. Use the 3D Document Settings Model Panel to set: Fills and pens for element surfaces and contours, and for cut elements Transparency Vectorial 3D hatching Sun and Shadow effects Hidden Edges Boundary Contours (for Floor Plan-based 3D Documents) Important: These settings apply to the 3D Document and are independent of its source window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

771

Virtual Building

Details
About Details Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source Contents of the Detail Viewpoint Place a Linked Detail Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Updating the Detail Window

772

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Details
The Detail tool is used to generate a Detail drawing viewpoint from the model by placing a Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail window. It is also used to place linked Detail markers, as a reference to any viewpoint, view or drawing. The Detail Marker (a GDL object) is displayed according to the settings you made in the Detail Settings dialog box. You can also create an independent Detail drawing, with or without a marker. Detail viewpoints are displayed in a dedicated Detail Drawing Window and listed in the Details part of the Navigator Project Map. Detail viewpoints generated from existing elements in the project are 2D-only copies of these elements. The viewpoints can be updated to reflect changes in the plan. You can add additional 2D elements, text, labels and objects to a Detail Drawing. You may wish to fine-tune the Detail Drawing before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. To open the Detail Drawing in its own window, double-click the detail view name in the Navigator.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

773

Virtual Building

Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source


To create a Detail with its source in the model, place an area-based Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet or Detail. 1. Activate the Detail tool. 2. In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Create new detail viewpoint is selected.

3. Choose an area-based geometry method from the Info Box: Polygonal, Rectangular, or Rotated Rectangular. (The first, No Boundary geometry method, creates a marker linked to an independent viewpoint having no model source.)

4. Draw the Detail boundary and click to complete. 5. After drawing the detail boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Detail Marker. The X represents the Details origin.

Note: Source-type Detail markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6. A new Detail Drawing viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. 774
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Detail viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information - can be defined in Detail Settings. See Detail Tool Settings.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

775

Virtual Building

Contents of the Detail Viewpoint


The source-based detail drawing consists of only 2D lines/fills, including the 2D exploded representations of all construction elements inside the detail boundary. By default, only construction elements are transferred; annotations and dimensions are not transferred to the Detail viewpoint. (You can change this setting using a checkbox in the General Panel of Detail Settings.)

For information on what happens to annotation elements cut by the Detail boundary, see Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary. Only 2D tools are available in the Detail window. All types of 2D information can be added to the Detail Drawing: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. The Detail Drawing will include a line representing the Detail Boundary you drew on the plan. See Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary. Section Details (Detail viewpoints created from a Section) reveal the elevation of the original construction, which means that Elevation Dimensioning placed on Detail viewpoints shows correct elevation values, unless you displace drawing elements vertically. (The same is true for Elevation Dimensions in Details generated from Elevations and Interior Elevations.)

Related Topics: Worksheet vs. Detail

776

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Detail Marker


To place a linked detail marker without creating a viewpoint: 1. Activate the Detail tool. 2. In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.

3. Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. 4. Choose any of the Detail geometry methods to place the marker.

If you use the No Boundary geometry method: click once to place the marker If you use any of the area-based methods: draw a Detail boundary, then click with the hammer cursor to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

777

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint


An Independent Detail drawing is one whose content you create yourself, starting with an empty detail viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An Independent Detail drawing is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. You may wish to create an Independent Detail for your documentation which depicts something that does not otherwise exist in the model - for example, detail of a fence. These independent Detail Drawings always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can be marked or unmarked: Independent marked details have a corresponding detail marker on the plan. Independent unmarked details do not have a detail marker on the plan, but they exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator.

Create an Independent Detail viewpoint with a marker


1. In Detail Settings or the Info Box, choose Create New Detail Viewpoint. 2. Define the Marker Reference: the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint The link information of the chosen viewpoint/drawing will appear in the Reference to text field. After the marker is placed and the new Detail is created, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time. 3. Choose the single-click geometry method (the first icon among the Info Box geometry methods) and click to place a detail marker on the plan.

4. A new, empty Detail viewpoint is created (independent marked detail) and listed in the navigator. This viewpoint has no model source. To open the independent Detail viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator or access it with the Open Detail Drawing in the markers context menu. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the detail drawing window.

778

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Detail viewpoint without a marker


Use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Detail command. You can also access this command from the Detail folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator;

or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Detail or the Detail folder is selected. Independent unmarked details are listed in the Navigator, though they have no associated marker. Later, if needed, you can attach a Independent Detail viewpoint to a marker: place a linked marker and point the marker to your Detail viewpoint.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

779

Virtual Building

Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary


When you create a new Detail or Worksheet viewpoint using a polygon input method, the resulting drawing will show the Boundary as a dashed line. If you do not want this boundary included in the Drawing window, disable the relevant checkbox in Options > Work Environment > More Options.

780

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary


If you redraw the boundary of a source detail or worksheet marker, any markers linked to this markers viewpoint will not be updated until you issue the Update Linked Markers Boundaries command from the Detail/Worksheet viewpoint items Navigator context menu.

This command affects the shape of marker boundaries only, not any associated model content.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

781

Virtual Building

Updating the Detail Window


If the source view of a Detail viewpoint has been modified, update its contents with the Rebuild from Source View command (from context menu of the detail drawing listed in the Navigator, or from the View > Refresh sub-menu).

For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands.

782

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Worksheets
About Worksheets Worksheet vs. Detail Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source Contents of the Worksheet Window Editing in the Worksheet Window Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint Place a Linked Worksheet Marker Place an Unlinked Marker

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

783

Virtual Building

About Worksheets
The Worksheet window provides a dedicated environment for 2D model-based drawings, such as partial floor plans and partial sections, and for drawings created entirely in 2D. Worksheets can be used as a dedicated environment for finishing drawings using 2D tools, and for working with consultants limited to 2D methods. You might want use a Worksheet to add a diagram or organizational chart, which is totally independent of your model, yet useful for your documentation. As in the Detail window, elements on the Worksheet consist of 2D-only duplicates of any construction elements in exploded form (e.g. 2D lines and fills). Only 2D tools are available in the Worksheet window. You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. The user can link any type of marker to the Worksheet. You can place a Section marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type section. You can also place a Detail marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type Detail. Such Drawing Sections and Drawing Details cannot be refreshed based on the content of the Worksheet window. The Worksheet tool is active in any window. It has marker and linking options similar to those of the other ArchiCAD marker tools (Section, Detail). To open a Worksheet window, double-click its name in the Navigator. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the drawing window.

784

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Worksheet vs. Detail


While creating a Worksheet based on the source model is similar to creating a model-based Detail, the Worksheet is optimized for creating partial floor plans and partial sections. Unlike the Detail tool, the Worksheet tool has a single-click capture geometry method which reproduces the entire contents of the current window as 2D elements in the Worksheet viewpoint. Consequently, when transferring all or part of a source model view to a Worksheet window: Annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, appear in the resulting Worksheet, in addition to construction elements exploded into 2D components. (In contrast, a Detail viewpoint created from the model will - by default - contain the 2D-only copies of construction elements only, without the source models annotation/dimension elements.) The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source. (In contrast, a Detail is created, by default, at half the scale of the original.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

785

Virtual Building

Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source


To create a Worksheet with its source in the model, place a Worksheet marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, Worksheet or Detail. 1. Activate the Worksheet tool. 2. In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Create new Worksheet viewpoint is selected. 3. Choose any of the geometry methods from the Info Box.

Capture Screen input method: Use the single-click method: the first input method in the Worksheet info box. Choose this icon, then click anywhere in the active project window. You will create a Worksheet based on the entire contents of the window. Area-based input method: Use one of the polygonal or rectangular/rotated rectangle geometry methods to define the Worksheet area. 4. Draw the Worksheet boundary and click to complete. 5. After drawing the Worksheet boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Worksheet Marker. Note: Source-type Worksheet markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6. A new Worksheet viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Worksheet marker. See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Worksheet viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information are defined in Worksheet Settings. See Worksheet Tool Settings.

786

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Contents of the Worksheet Window


A project-based Worksheet only contains drawing primitives, that is, lines and fills. These originate from the construction elements on the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document. Section/ Elevation and Detail/Worksheet markers within the Worksheet boundary are live markers: they continue to function as markers. When transferring all or part of a model view to a Worksheet window, annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, also appear in the resulting Worksheet. To copy construction elements only, without annotations/dimensions, check the Copy construction elements only box in Worksheet Settings. The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source, if any. (If the source has no scale, the Worksheet will be shown at a default scale value.) If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements, dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers; Detail/Worksheet markers), then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria, as follows. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings. (However, by default, Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all, unless you uncheck Copy Construction elements only in Detail Settings.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary, the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimensions endpoints must be inside the boundary. Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary, that segment is included in the Worksheet. Door/Window markers: If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary, then all Doors, Windows, and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoints origin (the X) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary, the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary, the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet, although the lines geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line. Note: Interior Elevation markers, unlike Section/Elevation markers, are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

787

Virtual Building

Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary


If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements, dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers; Detail/Worksheet markers), then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria, as follows. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings. (However, by default, Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all, unless you uncheck Copy Construction elements only in Detail Settings.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary, the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimensions endpoints must be inside the boundary. Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary, that segment is included in the Worksheet. If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary, then all Doors, Windows, and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoints origin (the X) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary, the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary, the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet, although the lines geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line. Note: Interior Elevation markers, unlike Section/Elevation markers, are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components.

Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

788

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Editing in the Worksheet Window


Only 2D tools are available when the Worksheet window is active. All types of 2D information can be added to the Worksheet: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Drawings, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. You can add content to your Worksheet window in several ways: Select any element(s) from any window and paste them into the Worksheet window. All elements, including construction elements, will be pasted in 2D form. To transfer elements from a Trace Reference, first switch the Reference with the active window, then copy-paste from there into the Worksheet (in exploded form) Draw all new 2D elements into the Worksheet window.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

789

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint


An independent worksheet is one which you create yourself, starting with an empty worksheet viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An independent worksheet is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. These independent Worksheets always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can either have a marker, or not. Independent worksheets without a marker in the project exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator. To create an independent Worksheet without a marker, use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Worksheet command. You can also access this command from the Worksheet folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator; or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Worksheet or the Worksheet folder is selected. Independent Worksheets without a marker are also listed in the Navigator. However, you can subsequently link a marker to such a Worksheet as needed.

790

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Worksheet Marker


To place a linked Worksheet marker without creating a viewpoint: 1. Activate the Worksheet tool. 2. In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected. 3. Choose any of the Worksheet geometry methods to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Worksheet marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

791

Virtual Building

Managing Markers in ArchiCAD


About Markers Display of Marker Range Lines Source Marker Highlight Changing Marker Type Transfer Marker Parameters Copying a Marker Navigation Using Markers Find Linked Markers Check Markers Palette Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker Deleting a Marker

792

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Markers
Markers can be placed using any of the following tools: Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) Worksheets Details With any of the Marker tools, you can opt to place a source marker. A source marker creates a new viewpoint (e.g. a Section, Elevation, Worksheet, Detail) involving the model as their source. Any of the Markers - except Interior Elevation - can optionally be defined as a linked marker. Such markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing. This information is displayed in the marker, which can be used to navigate to the referred item. An unlinked marker has no model source and displays no linked information. You cannot use it to navigate among markers, but you can define any custom text for it.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

793

Virtual Building

Display of Marker Range Lines


After you draw an input line or polygon with the any of the marker-type tools, these input lines will remain displayed on screen when you place the Marker. Marker Range items include: Elevation, Interior Elevation Line Section/Elevation Limit Line (for Sections and Elevations of limited depth) Distant line (for Sections and Elevations with a Marked Distant Area) Interior Elevation Limit lines Polygons defining area-based Details and Worksheets These Marker Range items are on-screen elements only; and never present on printouts. You can choose to show or hide Marker range items of all types using the View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range toggle. To customize the line type/color of these Marker Range lines, use the controls in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

794

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Source Marker Highlight


Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. This option makes it easy to tell at a glance which of your markers on screen are source markers. To toggle this highlight on or off for all source markers, use the View > On-Screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers command. To change the color of the source marker highlight, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

795

Virtual Building

Changing Marker Type


You can change the type of an already placed marker, so long as all the Marker references point to items that originate with a Marker tool.

To change a linked marker to a source marker:


Select the marker.

Use the Set as Source Marker command from its context menu; or Open the markers Settings dialog box and choose the Source Marker option The linked marker becomes the source marker, while the original source marker becomes a linked marker. This function is available for: Linked markers which are linked to a viewpoint/view/drawing that is located within the current project. The linked marker must have been placed using the same tool as the item to which it was linked (e.g. a Section marker linked to a Section viewpoint). Note: A viewpoints cut/model attributes are defined by its source marker. If a linked marker becomes the source of a section, that markers cut/model attributes are now applied to the viewpoint. Note: If you change a linked detail marker into a source detail marker, the viewpoints defining polygon will change to reflect the new source detail markers polygon. Linked markers linked to an independent viewpoint of the same type. The independent viewpoint is deleted and replaced by a source viewpoint. (If the original linked marker had no boundary, the source will take on a default boundary value.) Markers linked to an external drawing cannot be changed to a source marker.

To change a source marker to a linked marker:


Select the marker. Use the Set as Linked Marker command from its context menu; or Open the markers Settings dialog box and choose the Linked Marker option The original source marker becomes a linked marker containing the same reference information as before. 796
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Transfer Marker Parameters


You can use the Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands between markers. If you Pick Up Parameters from a source marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will take on all of the first markers parameters except its link information, and except for its geometry (e.g. the range of a section marker.) If you Pick Up Parameters from a linked marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will become identical to the first: a second linked marker with the same parameters, and containing the identical reference information, as the first. See also Parameter Transfer.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

797

Virtual Building

Copying a Marker
Any interaction (Copy/Paste, Drag/Rotate/Mirror Copy/Copies) that results in creating a new copy of a marker will have the following results: Copying a source marker (Section/Elevation/IE or Worksheet) results in a second source marker, which creates a new viewpoint having the same parameters as the viewpoint associated with the original marker. The new viewpoints name, however, will be different. Moreover, the Marker Link information is not copied. Copying a source Detail marker will create a new linked Detail marker, which is linked to the original detail viewpoint.

798

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Navigation Using Markers


To navigate using a marker, select the marker and open the context menu.

Use the Open command to go to the referred item. If the marker is linked to a Drawing, use the context menu (Go to Drawing) to open the layout containing the referred drawing.

From the same context menu, the Open/Open in new window commands will open the source viewpoint/view of the linked drawing. The linked detail marker in the image below refers to the first placed drawing of a selected Interior Elevation view. Its context menu allows you to Go to the Drawing Open the Interior Elevation view in the current or in a new window

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

799

Virtual Building

Find Linked Markers


To find all the markers linked to a particular viewpoint/view/drawing, select the item from the Navigator. Use the Find Linked Markers command from the items context menu.

For Drawings placed on Layouts, the Find Linked Markers command is also available if you select the Drawing itself, then open the context menu.

The Find Linked markers dialog box lists all the linked markers: 800

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

By marker subtype (shown as an icon) Placed to: ID and name of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed. (If it is a source marker, the viewpoint name is underlined.) Clicking either column header will sort the list accordingly. Click Marker Settings to open the Tool Settings dialog box of the selected marker. Click Go to Selected to zoom to the selected marker. (The button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

801

Virtual Building

Check Markers Palette


The Check Markers function lists which marker-referred items are missing from the project. The Check Markers Palette is available from Window > Palettes > Check Markers. To list undefined marker references, click the Check Markers button at the top of the palette.

The palette lists all the markers in the project which the user has automatically or manually linked a viewpoint, drawing or view, but whose referred viewpoint/drawing/view has since been deleted from this project. (In this case, the marker will display Autotext in place of the missing data.) If no such marker exists, the Palette will display this message: No undefined marker references in this project. Markers are listed, and can be sorted, according to the following: Marker subtype: Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet/Interior Elevation (shown as icon) Placed to: ID and Project Map path of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed Selected item: Name and ID of the markers referenced item (i.e. the viewpoint/view/ drawing one you chose when defining the marker reference). If this referenced item has been deleted from the project, this column will show N/A. Approve: Editable checkbox for each marker. You can sort items by any of these properties by clicking on its column header. You can then perform a secondary sorting function: clicking a second column header will further sort within the hierarchy obtained by the first sorting. An icon at the bottom of the palette allows the user to zoom to the selected marker. (The zoom button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.) For each problematic marker listed (or multiple selected markers), the user can click Marker Settings to re-link the marker(s) or otherwise modify them. The user may decide that the marker is OK the way it is (even though it continues to display undefined Autotext). In this case, the Approve checkbox can be used as a sorting criterion; check the box for these markers. (For example, if you know that the undefined Autotext refers to an external project that has not yet been loaded.)

802

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If you dont want the palette to re-list these approved markers as problems the next time you click the Check Markers button, use the Hide Approved Markers option from the pop-up at top right of the dialog box.

Otherwise, use the List all items option.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

803

Virtual Building

Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker


If you delete a viewpoint, the program will first check whether its source/linked markers are located on a locked layer or in a different Teammates workspace, or whether the marker elements themselves have been locked. These markers include: The viewpoints source marker Markers linked to the viewpoint Markers linked to views created out of the viewpoint. If none of these markers is locked or reserved, then the program displays a Warning dialog box informing you that proceeding with the Delete procedure will delete all of the following: The viewpoint (even if its source marker displays the data of a different viewpoint) Any views created out of the viewpoint All the source/linked markers listed above

If you delete a view, any markers linked to that view will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. These markers will be listed as problematic the next time you run the Check Markers function. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint. If you delete a drawing, any markers linked to that drawing will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from view/viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint.

804

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Deleting a Marker
If you delete a source marker, a dialog box appears informing you that deleting a source marker will also delete the viewpoint and any markers linked to it. However, the same dialog box gives you a different option: delete the source marker, but keep the viewpoint as an independent viewpoint with no model source. Deleting a linked marker has no effect on any other element.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

805

Virtual Building

Interactive Schedule
About Schedules Open and View a Schedule Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items Editing and Updating Schedule Items Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule Format a Schedule Schedule Headers Add Annotations to Schedule Previews Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts

806

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Schedules
ArchiCADs Interactive Schedule function allows you to automatically generate schedules. Unlike simple lists created with the commands of the Document > Schedules and Lists menu, the Interactive Schedule not only displays quantities and other parameters - you can actually edit it. This makes it possible to notice and correct inconsistencies resulting from a data entry error or from the merging of the work of several people on different parts of the same project. For example, the schedule may allow you to detect that all but one of the thirty or forty doors placed in your building have the same height and width. You can then select this door directly from the schedule and check whether there is a reason for this inconsistency. If you find that this was a mistake, then you can correct the setting in the schedule and automatically update the door in all views. Similarly, its easy to double-check how many of the doors open to the right or the left. You can access Schedules from either the Navigator palette or the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules submenu. Click the name of a defined Schedule to open the Interactive Schedule window and update its contents. Schedules are viewpoints, which you can save as views and output as drawings on a Layout, or save in various other file formats. See Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule). A formatted schedule can be placed into any 2D window (typically a Worksheet), by using Copy/ Paste. The contents of the schedule, after pasting, will consist of lines and text, which you can freely edit, but will no longer be associative to the model.

Types of Interactive Schedules


There are two categories of Interactive Schedules: Element Lists show characteristics of basic construction elements

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

807

Virtual Building

Component Lists are optimized to list information about each component of composite elements (composite walls, slabs, roofs and/or multi-component profile elements

Content of Interactive Schedules


The content of the Schedule is based on Schedule Scheme Settings. To adjust these, you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Scheme Settings button at top right. For more information on defining schedule content, see Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings.

Units in Interactive Schedules


The units of the listed values are set as follows: As a rule, the units shown in the Interactive Schedule are the same as in all other model views. That is, an editable value (such as wall height) is shown on the Interactive Schedule in the units defined in Project Preferences. See Dimensions Preferences. While you are editing this value, the units displayed are those of set in Working Units. 808
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

See Working Units. A calculated value (such as wall volume) is listed in the Interactive Schedule using the units defined in Calculation Units. See Calculation Units and Rules Preferences.

For Teamwork Users:


See Reservation in Interactive Schedules.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

809

Virtual Building

Open and View a Schedule


See also Navigating in the Interactive Schedule Window. ArchiCAD comes with predefined Schedules, such as Door List; Wall List; Window List. To open any of these schedules to list the elements in the current project, double-click the Schedule name in the Navigator.

. (You can also access Schedules through the Go command of the Mini-Navigator Toolbar, or from the Window menu.) The Schedule window opens, showing the schedule, along with formatting options in the left column. To display the schedule only, without the formatting panel, click the black arrow on the dividing line.

For information on formatting the schedule, see Format Options (Interactive Schedule). 810
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The Interactive Schedule window, like other Listing windows, has an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.

To adjust individual row or column heights, manually drag the tabs on the top and left side of the schedule. Double-click any tab to fit the cell to its contents.

If your Schedule includes 3D Front View as a field, remember that the display of this preview is affected by the Model View Options. Note: To display previews using lines only (no shaded surfaces), make sure you click the appropriate Override Fill checkbox in the Override Fill Display panel of Model View Options (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options).

Navigating in the Interactive Schedule Window


To navigate among fields in the Interactive Schedule window, use familiar keyboard shortcuts: Move right or left: Enter, Shift+Enter Move down or up: Tab, Shift+Tab
ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

811

Virtual Building

Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items


You may wish to view an Element Schedule for only certain items on the Floor Plan, for the purpose of interactively editing these elements. Select the desired elements (on the Floor Plan only), then find the desired Element Schedule in the Navigator Project Map or View Map. Right-click the schedule name and choose List Floor Plan Selection Only to view schedule data for the selected items only (as opposed to the items defined in the Schedule Scheme criteria).

This is a quick way to filter elements for editing as a group, by taking advantage of the Interactive Schedule capabilities. You cannot save a view out of the displayed data.

812

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Editing and Updating Schedule Items


To work on an item of the Interactive Element Schedule, click its column (or row). You will see that some of the cells of this column become editable, while others cannot be modified. In the example below, you can see that while the Library Part Name field is locked, it is possible to overwrite the width and height fields.

Any changes you make in these fields of the Schedule are automatically and instantly reflected in the Floor Plan and in other views, when activated. Conversely, all changes made on these elements in the Floor Plan or another editable view are updated in the Schedule when you return to it. If you have selected an item in the Schedule Window, use the Select on Floor Plan icon to go to the Floor Plan window and view the selected item.

The icon to its right, Select in 3D, takes you to the 3D Window and zooms onto the selected item.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

813

Virtual Building

Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings


The contents of your Interactive Schedule are defined in the Scheme Settings dialog box. Here, you define (1) the criteria for selecting the items to be listed in the Schedule; and (2) the fields (i.e. the particular information about the chosen items) to be listed in the Schedule. Choose the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules > Scheme Settings command from the menu; or the Scheme Settings button from the opened Schedule window.

. In the top Schemes Panel, choose the scheme you want to edit, or use the buttons at the right to create, rename, delete, import and export schemes. For details, see Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule).

814

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If you choose Create New, you must define whether the new Schedule will be an Element Schedule or a Component Schedule.

Related topics: Define Schedule Criteria Define Schedule Fields

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

815

Virtual Building

Define Schedule Criteria


In the Criteria panel of the Interactive Schedule Scheme Settings, select the first line, then choose a criterion for the items you wish to include in the Schedule. For simple Element lists, choose Element type.

In the Value column, select the desired element. For example, to create a Door List we have chosen Element Type is Door as the only criterion.

816

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Add New Criteria


To add a new criterion, click the Add button.

If the Element Type is an object-type element, the Add Object Parameters option is available from the Add pop-up. From the appearing dialog box, choose the desired parameters to add as criteria. To add IFC Properties as criteria, choose Add IFC Properties from the Add pop-up. From the appearing dialog box, choose the desired properties to add as criteria. You can now choose a second Element Type criterion, such as Window. The and/or field in the first row (Element Type is Door) is now editable: in this case, choose or.

The two values (Door, Window) are joined as an or statement, so that the resulting schedule will include every element that is either a Window or a Door. To narrow the scope of a schedule, add additional criteria. For example, if you want a schedule of only those doors and windows which are on Story 2 and above, add a new criterion by clicking the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

817

Virtual Building

Then choose Story from the Criteria list, and complete the row with the desired Story value (>=2).

In this example, the schedule will list all elements that fit either of the Element Type Criteria, and also fit the Story criterion: to be on the list, the element must be either a window or a door, and it must be located with the defined Story range. Add as many criteria as needed to define the Interactive Schedule. For example, you can narrow the elements listed according to their Structural Function Classification (e.g. Load-Bearing or Non-Load-Bearing.)

818

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Additional Object Parameters and IFC Properties


Use the black arrow at the right end of the Add button to access additional parameters and properties to use as criteria: Add Object Parameters: If you have chosen an object-type Element as an Element Type, and you want to use one of its particular parameters as an additional criterion, click this command. In the appearing dialog box, browse the loaded libraries to find the library part whose parameters you need. Choose the parameter, then click Add. This parameter will then be listed in your Criteria list. Add IFC Properties: If you want to use IFC properties as criteria for the schedule, click this command. The appearing Select IFC Properties dialog box lists all IFC properties defined for all elements in the project. Only those properties are listed which are checked in the element Settings dialog box (and which will therefore be exported if the project is saved in IFC format). Note: Use the controls at the top of the Select IFC Properties dialog box to filter the properties listed here: Choose a particular IFC Element Type; and/or Filter the list by any text string in the property sets and property names Click on the listed properties that you want to use as search criteria in the Select IFC Properties dialog box. Use Ctrl+click to multi-select. Click Add as Criteria to return to the Scheme Settings box. The IFC properties you selected are now added as schedule criteria.

Complex Criteria Definition


If needed, use the Open Parentheses and Close Parentheses columns of Scheme Settings to set up nested criteria for more complex schemes: in any selected row, click on the pop-up under the parentheses column to choose a parenthesis, or no parenthesis.

Each open must have a corresponding close in order for the scheme to be logical. If there is a mistake in your parentheses logic, the Criteria invalid! warning appears at the bottom of the panel.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

819

Virtual Building

Define Schedule Fields


In the Fields Panel of Schedule Scheme Settings, you will choose which fields should be displayed in your schedule. From the list of Available Parameters on the left, choose the desired items, and click Add at the bottom of the dialog box to add them to the Schedule Fields on the right. For example, in the Wall List scheme pictured here, we want the Wall Layer to be included in the schedule. Choose Layer from the Available Parameter, then click Add to add it to the Schedule Fields on the right.

An illustrated list of the parameters, divided by element type, is available here: See Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule.

Sort Schedule Fields


To change the order in which fields are listed in the schedule, use the up/down arrows at the left edge of each row to move the field up or down.

See also Schemes Fields Panel. You can further set the order in which items are listed within each field, by using the three buttons at the right:

820

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Click the first button to sort walls in this field in ascending/descending order. (You can also leave this field blank, for None. None means that this field will not be taken into consideration when sorting.) In the example below, walls will be listed by Wall Type (the name of the schedule column that lists walls by Building Material, the first schedule field); inasmuch as several walls are of the same type - such as Masonry Block- the walls will be listed in order of their volume.

Click the second button to add a schedule cell which displays the sum of the items in the selected field. Here, we will have the schedule add a sum to the schedules Volume column.

The second button contains an icon for a second option: to list a quantity for this field.

Here, we will have the schedule add a Quantity to the schedules Wall Type column.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

821

Virtual Building

The result: Wall Type shows a Quantity at the bottom of the column (a total of 8 walls), and the Volume column shows a total sum of all the volumes at the bottom (65.19 m3).

Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sums/quantities, which is called Grand Total. If you choose Grand Total from the Apply to pop-up list, the formatting options will apply to this row/column of the schedule only.

The third button lets you add a flag to one of the fields in the list. (You cannot flag more than one field at a time.) The flagged field will display a separate sum or quantity for each group of identical elements in that field. For example, the Wall Type field already has a Quantity row, showing the total number of walls; to show a Quantity for each type of wall in that field, we have added a flag to the Building Material field.

822

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The result: Wall Types show a separate quantity for each separate wall type. Moreover, the Volume column also lists the corresponding volume sub-totals.

Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sum/quantity subtotals, which is called Total.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

823

Virtual Building

Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule


Wall Listing Parameters Roof Listing Parameters Shell Listing Parameters Roof/Shell Edge Listing Parameters Beam Listing Parameters Morph Listing Parameters Column Listing Parameters Slab Listing Parameters Door-Window Listing Parameters Skylight Listing Parameters Object/Stair/Lamp Listing Parameters Mesh Listing Parameters Curtain Wall Listing Parameters Zone Listing Parameters

824

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Wall Listing Parameters


WALL FIELD
Building Material/ Composite/Profile

DESCRIPTION
Name of the Walls Building Material, or its composite structure, or its profile.

Height

Height of Wall (as set in Wall Settings).

Maximum height of the Wall

Height of Wall at its highest point, taking into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations).

Maximum Height of the Height of Wall skin, at its Wall Skin on Outside highest point, on the Walls Face outside face. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). Maximum Height of the Height of Wall skin, at its Wall Skin on Inside Face highest point, on the Walls inside face. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations).

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

825

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Minimum Height of the Wall Skin on Inside Face.

DESCRIPTION
Height of Wall skin, at its lowest point, on Walls inside face. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). Height of Wall at its lowest point. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations).

Minimum height of the Wall

Minimum Height of the Wall Skin on Outside Face

Height of Wall skin, at its lowest point, on the Walls outside face. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations).

Length of the Wall at the Length of the Wall, as center measured from end to end along Walls centerline. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations.

Length of the Wall on the Outside Face

Length of the Wall, as measured from end to end along Walls outside face. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations.

826

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Length of the Wall on Inside Face

DESCRIPTION
Length of the Wall, as measured from end to end along Walls inside face. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations.

Conditional length of the Length of Wall along the Wall on Inside Face Walls inside face, subtracting the length of any openings that exceed a given length, as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall length by). Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Conditional length of the Length of Wall along its Wall on Inside Face inside face, subtracting the length of any openings that exceed a given length, as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall length by). Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Edge Surface Name of surface override assigned to the edges of the Wall (In case there is no override, the Schedule will show empty quotation marks.)

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

827

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Inside Face Surface

DESCRIPTION
Name of the surface assigned to the Walls inside face.

Outside Face Surface

Name of the surface assigned to the Walls outside face.

Number of Columns

Number of Columns that intersect the Wall

Number of Doors

Number of Door elements in the Wall

Number of Holes

Number of Empty Opening Objects in the Wall

828

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Number of Windows

DESCRIPTION
Number of Window elements in the Wall

Analytic surface area of Surface area of all Wall openings on the inside openings (windows, doors, face empty openings) on the Walls inside face. Surface calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. Analytic surface area of Surface area of all Wall openings on the outside openings (windows, doors, face empty openings) on the Walls outside face. Surface calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. Combined Width of doors Sum of the nominal widths (as defined in Door Settings) of all doors placed in the Wall.

Combined Width of windows

Sum of the nominal widths (as defined in Window Settings) of all windows placed in the Wall

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

829

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Perimeter of the Wall

DESCRIPTION
Perimeter of the horizontal cross section of the Wall, as it is displayed on the Floor Plan. Wall perimeter can thus vary depending on its Floor Plan Projection settings (e.g. Cut Only vs. Projected with Overhead) Wall intersections have no effect on the perimeter value. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Angle of a slanted Wall from the perpendicular to its outside face. (One angle of a double-slanted Wall.)

Outside Slant Angle

Inside Slant Angle

Angle of a slanted Wall from the perpendicular to its inside face.

830

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Area of the Wall

DESCRIPTION
Area of the horizontal cross section of the Wall element, as it is displayed on the Floor Plan. Area of a Wall can thus vary depending on its Floor Plan Projection settings (e.g. Cut Only vs. Projected with Overhead). Wall intersections have no effect on the area value. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations

Conditional surface area Surface area of Wall on its on the Outside Face outside face, subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall surface by). Takes trims and SEOs into account. Conditional surface area Surface area of Wall on its on the Inside Face inside face, subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall surface by). Takes trims and SEOs into account.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

831

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Gross surface area of the Gross surface area of the wall on the outside face Wall - including the surfaces of any openings - on the outside face. Takes trims into account. SEOs are ignored. Gross surface area of the Gross surface area of the wall on the inside face Wall - including the surfaces of any openings - on the inside face. Takes trims into account. SEOs are ignored.

Net surface area of the edges

Sum of the areas of all Wall edges. Takes into account any trims or Solid Element Operations.

Net surface area on the Outside Face

Surface area of the Wall on the outside face. Takes into account any openings, as well as trims and Solid Element Operations.

Net surface area on the Inside Face

Surface area of the Wall on the inside face. Takes into account any openings, as well as trims and Solid Element Operations.

832

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Thickness

DESCRIPTION
Thickness of the Wall as defined in Wall Settings. (Displayed in dimension units.)

Air Skin Thickness

Thickness of Wall skin whose structure is defined as Air skin (in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules.)

End Thickness of the Wall

End thickness of Wall. (Second thickness, assigned in Wall Settings to a trapezoid Wall.)

Insulation Skin Thickness

Thickness of Wall skins whose structure is defined as Wall Insulation (in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules.)

Wall Skin Thickness on the Outside Face

Skin Thickness value of the skin on the Walls outside face. Each skin thickness is defined in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures.

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

833

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Wall Skin Thickness on the Inside Face

DESCRIPTION
Skin Thickness value of the skin on the Walls inside face. Each skin thickness is defined in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures.

Net volume

Net volume of the Wall: height * length * thickness, and subtracting the volume of openings if any, and subtracting the effect of trims and Solid Element Operations. Volume of all Wall openings (windows, doors, empty openings). Volume calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. (Does not take SEOs into account.) Volume of Wall, subtracting the volume of any openings that exceed a given size, as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall volume by). Takes trims and SEOs into account.

Analytic volume of openings in the Wall

Conditional volume

834

ArchiCAD 17 Solo Reference Guide

Virtual Building

WALL FIELD
Conditional Wall Skin Volume on the Inside Face

DESCRIPTION
Volume of Wall skin that is on the Walls inside face, subtracting the volume of any openings within that skin that exceed a given size, as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall volume by). Takes trims and SEOs into account. Volume of Wall skin on the Walls outside face, subtracting the volume of any openings within that skin that exceed a given size, as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (Reduce Wall volume by). Takes trims and SEOs into account. Volume of Wall (including volume of openings, doors and windows). Volum